JP7613938B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to provide an advantageous state for the player.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are some that are capable of executing a super reach effect (specific effect) that uses a character to notify whether or not the machine is in a jackpot gaming state, and an effect (post-event effect) in which a pattern is re-drawn after a jackpot has been notified (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-34239 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Document 1.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A light emitter;
An operation means operable by a player;
A sound output means;
a performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance capable of informing the user that the game is being controlled to the advantageous state, an operation performance that prompts the user to operate the operation means in the specific performance, a movable body performance that operates the movable body when the game is being controlled to the advantageous state, and a result notification performance and a post-event performance that are executed after the movable body performance;
Equipped with
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance in which a specific character is displayed before the movable body performance , a second specific performance in which a special character is displayed before the movable body performance , and a third specific performance in which neither the specific character nor the special character is displayed before the movable body performance can be executed;
As the post-event performance, a first post-event performance can be executed in which the specific character is displayed after the result notification performance is executed in the first specific performance,
As the post-effect performance, a second post-effect performance can be executed in which the special character is displayed after the result notification performance is executed in the second specific performance,
As the post-event performance, after executing the result notification performance in the third specific performance, a third post-event performance can be executed, which is a performance mode related to the third specific performance and does not display either the specific character or the special character;
As the movable body performance, a first movable body performance that executes the movable body performance in the first specific performance can be executed,
As the movable body performance, a second movable body performance that executes the movable body performance in the second specific performance can be executed,
As the result notification performance, a first result notification performance that executes the result notification performance in the first specific performance can be executed,
As the result notification performance, a second result notification performance that executes the result notification performance in the second specific performance can be executed,
It is possible to make the light-emitting body emit light in the post-event performance, the operation performance, the movable body performance, and the result notification performance,
The sound output means can output a performance sound in the post-event performance, the operation performance, the movable body performance, and the result notification performance,
The post-event performance can be executed when a first condition is satisfied and when a second condition that is more advantageous to the player than the first condition is satisfied.
When the first post-performance is executed when the second condition is satisfied , the light emitter can be caused to emit light in a specific light emission pattern common to when the second post-performance is executed when the second condition is satisfied ;
When the third post-effect performance is executed when the second condition is satisfied , it is possible to cause the light-emitting body to emit light in a light-emitting pattern different from the specific light-emitting pattern ,
In the first movable body performance, it is possible to output the performance sound corresponding to the first movable body performance from the sound output means by a sound output pattern common to the second movable body performance,
In the first result notification performance, it is possible to output the performance sound corresponding to the first result notification performance from the sound output means by a sound output pattern common to the second result notification performance,
The proportion of the second advantageous state is different depending on which of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance is executed.
It is characterized by:
In addition, other gaming machines,
A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable advantageous state based on a specific display result that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first symbol and a variable display of a second symbol,
a state control means capable of controlling the engine to a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state;
a variable display pattern determining means for determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on a result of the determination by the determining means;
updating means for updating the numerical information based on execution of the variable display;
Equipped with
the update means updates numerical information when the variably displayed first identification information is displayed and when the variably displayed second identification information is displayed,
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times;
when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state,
In the case of a variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the long period during which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are a small number of types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided, and since the numerical information continues to be updated even when the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the player can be easily rescued and motivation to play can be increased, thereby improving marketability.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention as well as features other than the invention-specific features.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic part 069SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic part 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving count determination table for each transition trigger. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. This is an explanatory diagram to explain Yu-time (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining Yu-time (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining Yu-time (rescue time reduction). 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Battle Rush, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Yu-Time. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Extreme Battle Rush. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to a variable display count display and a special display count display. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of the effects when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified example of time-saving entry effect B. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the rescue time reduction is reached. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to a customer waiting screen. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as feature part 069SG variant example 1. A figure showing a modified example of a presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as feature section 069SG modified example 1. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing for game control as variant example 2 of feature section 069SG. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern stopping processing as feature part 069SG variant example 2. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern stopping processing as feature part 069SG variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process as a modified example 2 of the characteristic part 069SG. A figure showing variant example 3 of characteristic portion 069SG. A diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. A figure showing an example of a countdown preview presentation operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a countdown preview presentation. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation for a hold change notice. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the pattern chance eye announcement. A figure showing an example of the effect display preview performance. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a pre-reading notice type determination table. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing a pre-reading preview performance pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13A is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button notice performance pattern determination tables. 11A to 11D are diagrams showing a character preview pattern determination table. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a movable body operation pattern determination table. 13A to 13D are figures showing a movable object preview pattern determination table. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining various operation examples according to game status. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the sure-change state and the miss-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time-saving state A, and (B) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the miss-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time-saving state B. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the special state and time-saving state A. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the special state and time-saving state A. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B. This is an example of the performance of SP Reach E and SP Reach D. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operation of non-reach out-of-range fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operation of non-reach out-of-range fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. 13A to 13C are timing charts showing examples of control operations in SP reaches E, C, and D. This is a diagram comparing a super reach and a non-reach miss. (A) to (C) are figures showing examples of entry introduction effects, and (D) is a figure showing an example of the performance of time-saving entry effect A. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the special mode entry performance, and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams showing an example of the time-saving mode entry performance B. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table as embodiment 2 in feature part 069SG. A figure showing a part of the variable display start setting process as embodiment 2 in characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. This is an example of the presentation operation of SP Reach D. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining characteristics according to game status. In the feature part 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal pattern hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal pattern, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the second start winning port opening time when a normal pattern is hit. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a change pattern according to a variable display result. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. This is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a special probability state. This is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a special probability state. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. An explanatory diagram of the probability of winning at the starting winning slot and the winning interval. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values α, β, and γ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values α', β', and γ'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ, ε, and ζ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ', ε', and ζ'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values η, θ, and ι. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values η', θ', and ι'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ, λ, and μ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ', λ', and μ'. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of period values v, ξ, and π. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of period values v', ξ', and π'. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. 1A is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting values of a pachinko gaming machine for 10 hours, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the design values of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a normal state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a time-saving state A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a time-saving state B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average fluctuation time in a probability variable state. This is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the second special chart is executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special state. This is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays of the second special chart are executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average change time when 110 change displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is one in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average change time when 1,100 change displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is one in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in feature portion 018SG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state. This figure shows the execution periods of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. This figure shows the execution periods of various effects in the failure variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of characters in SP reach performances A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the lighting patterns of LEDs in SP reach performances A to E, and (C) is a diagram showing the output patterns of background music and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. This is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach performances A to E. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation from the start of the variable display of SP reaches α, β, and γ to the development into the SP reach presentation. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of SP reach presentation A. A figure showing examples of the presentation operations of SP reach presentations B and C. A figure showing examples of the presentation operations of SP reach presentations D and E. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation. A diagram showing an example of a movable body presentation. A figure showing examples of the performance operations for announcing a jackpot in SP reach effects A to E. A figure showing an example of the performance operation for notifying the loss of SP reach performances A to E. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance A. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance B. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance B. 13A is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table A, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table B, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table C. 13 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a smooth rainbow light emission lighting pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a flash rainbow light emission lighting pattern. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of a pachinko game machine at characteristic portion 120IW. An explanatory diagram showing an example configuration of a special variable winning ball device in characteristic section 120IW. 1 is a diagram showing the configuration of various control boards and the like in characteristic portion 120IW. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a time-saving miss determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature portion 120IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. A flowchart showing an example of game control main processing in characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special pattern process in the feature portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion effect determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram of the table for determining the setting suggestion performance when a jackpot occurs. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in Modification 1. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 2. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 3. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in variant example 4. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 5. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in modified example 5. 23 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 6. A timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant example 7. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time-saving states in variant example 8. An explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 090IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 090IW. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified opening patterns of small win games. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified opening patterns of small win games. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a caption display execution lottery table and a caption display mode determination lottery table. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing types of time-saving options. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing a second variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the second special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions. 10 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of a gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation form of a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation form of the time-saving entry presentation in variant example 1-3. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing each effect in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode of a provocative reach in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode for notifying the establishment of rescue time reduction in variant example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of control of a gaming state in the modified example 2.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of type 1-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., 2) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also smaller than the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the "probable variable state").
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "probable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby making it possible to provide a preferable second special state, since the variable display is consumed at a faster rate than in other states.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C);
The start order of the variable display of the decoration identification information of each column is the same for a case in which, in the first special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case in which, in the second special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed,
The time until the variable display speed of the decorative identification information of each column that has started the variable display reaches the maximum speed is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the start order of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is common between the case where the variable display is a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A, and the case where the variable display is a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time until the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C reach the maximum speed is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A (tb1 to tb2 < ta1 to ta3). See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the order in which the decorative identification information of each column starts to be variable is the same in the first special state and the second special state, the time taken to reach maximum speed is different, which gives a different impression for each state and enhances interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
The stop order of the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the left → right → middle order in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A, and the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed simultaneously in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display stopping order of the decoration identification information in each column differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that different impressions are given for each state, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
The order in which the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is stopped is the same for a case in which, in the first special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case in which, in the second special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed,
The time from when one of the decoration identification information in the multiple columns is statically displayed to when the next decoration identification information is statically displayed differs between a case where the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the decoration identification information to the advantageous state in the first special state, and a case where the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the decoration identification information to the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, a decorative pattern display The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is common to the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time from when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be different between the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the time from when one decorative identification information is statically displayed to when the next decorative identification information is statically displayed differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that different impressions can be given for each state, enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
an output means for outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each row is stopped and displayed;
The number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is three times in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and time-saving state A because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at different timings, and in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so that it is one time. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by outputting the stop sound differently between the first special state and the second special state, different impressions can be given for each state, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
an output means for outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each row is stopped and displayed;
The number of times the stop sound is output in one variable display is common between a case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in one variable display may be common between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern is displayed in a probability variable state and a time-saving state A, and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern is displayed in a time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by making the number of times the stop sound is output common between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in a state in which the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result rather than a specific state when the determination means does not determine that the decoration identification information is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
When the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state, the specific operation display is executed, and when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state, the specific operation display is not executed (for example, when the pattern is a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A, a specific operation display (a pattern stop action) is executed, whereas when the pattern is a non-reach miss variation pattern in the time-saving state B, a specific operation display (a pattern stop action) is not executed. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the special action display is used to enhance the presentation effect in the first special state, a smooth variable display can be achieved by not executing the special action display in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in a state in which the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result rather than a specific state when the determination means does not determine that the decoration identification information is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display mode of the specific operation display is common between the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example, the specific operation display (pattern stop action) is common between the case where the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is in the probability change state and the time-saving state A and the case where the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is in the time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the performance effect with the specific operation display, while commonizing the mode of the specific operation display in the case of the probability change state, the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the presentation effect is enhanced by the specific action display, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the manner in which the specific action display is displayed between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-8,
It is possible to perform variable display by synchronizing decoration identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) with predetermined identification information (e.g., a small pattern) different from the decoration identification information,
The period from when the identification information is stopped and displayed to when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed is shorter in the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, than in the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to when the small pattern is stopped and displayed is shorter in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B than in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)>t2 (tb3 to tb4)} portion. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
The minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the first special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display, and the minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the second special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display are common (for example, the pattern determination period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the probability change state and the time-saving state A until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the next variable display, and the pattern determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the time-saving state B until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the next variable display, are common parts. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing control that takes into account the rendering process until the decoration identification information is completely frozen and displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-10,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", a miss variable pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" and a miss variable pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and the "probable variable state" are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of the plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, in the case where the variable display result is a "miss", the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., 2) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is less than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also less than the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the "probable variable state").
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortening state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "time-shortening state A" and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "probable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby making it possible to provide a preferable second special state, since the variable display is consumed at a faster rate than in other states.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a losing variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a losing variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1 or 2-2,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a losing variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to a losing variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, it is preferable that the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average control period is shorter than in the third special state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, thereby providing a preferable second special state, while in the first special state, the average control period is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-4,
In the case of a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 2) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the time-shortening state A, and the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the time-shortening state A is smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-071) A gaming machine of form 1-12 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is also smaller than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are fewer types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, an ideal second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-13 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for performing a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part for notifying game value information capable of identifying the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part,
An execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from an execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the post-event performance part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-event performance part in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state A and the probability change state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state B, while the pattern determination time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state A and the probability change state is common to the pattern determination time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display in which it has been decided to control to an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-14 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for performing a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part for notifying game value information capable of identifying the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part,
a display means for executing a specific action display for causing the indicator to perform a specific action when the indicator is displayed in a stopped state during an execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state;
An execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from an execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the specific operation display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific operation display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time-saving state A and the probability change state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time-saving state B, while the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time-saving state A and the probability change state is common to the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the execution period of the specific action display in the variable display that has been determined to be controlled to an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-14,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", a miss variable pattern (e.g., "SP reach D") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" and a miss variable pattern (e.g., "SP reach D") that can be determined in the "probable variable state" are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of form 2-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot variable patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" (e.g., 2) and is also less than the number of loss variable patterns that can be determined in the "probable variable state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are fewer types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, an ideal second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-6,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a jackpot variable pattern (e.g., SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is common to a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-shortening state A and the probability variable state (e.g., the probability variable state)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-7,
At least a part of the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is a common part to a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both the time-shortening state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-8,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average control period is shorter than in the third special state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, thereby providing a preferable second special state, while in the first special state, the average control period is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-9,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortened state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-shortened state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-shortened state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probability variable state (e.g., 3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of form 1-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-15,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A to E Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) is displayed after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state (e.g., a reach state), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information is displayed without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 95%), and is higher than the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probable change state" (for example, 95%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, by making the manner of the variable display a specific manner, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
The period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts to when it is stopped in the second non-specific variable display pattern is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts to when the variable display mode becomes the specific mode in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach miss variable pattern is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode in the super reach miss variable pattern. See FIG. 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, so that a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information of a specific column among the multiple columns is started to when it is stopped is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information of the specific column is started to when it is stopped in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, in a non-reach miss variable pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started to when it is stopped is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started to when it is stopped in the super reach miss variable pattern. See FIG. 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decoration identification information of the predetermined row ends in a short period of time, so that a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-19 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-18,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of form 2-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 1-10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A to E Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) is displayed after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state (e.g., a reach state), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information is displayed without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state (for example, the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 95%), and is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probable change state" (for example, 95%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, by making the manner of the variable display a specific manner, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-12 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-11,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-13 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-12,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B is common to a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of form 1-20 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-19,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A to C, E jackpot") which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state, and a second specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach D (instant hit or full spins)", "not via SP", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the second special state when the special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the first special state when the special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display (for example, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state B is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probability variable state (for example, 5%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it has been decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, the variable display mode is set to a specific mode, so that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a first specific action display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the variable display mode becomes a specific mode, and a second specific action display (e.g., a pattern stop action display) for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed;
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific action display and the second specific action display are executed by the display means, whereas in the second specific variable display pattern, the first specific action display is not executed by the display means but the second specific action display is executed (for example, in the variation pattern of SP reach E which goes through a reach, a reach specific action display and a jackpot specific action display are executed, whereas in the variation pattern of SP reach D which does not go through a reach, a reach specific action display is not executed but a jackpot specific action display is executed. See FIG. 11-55).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the first specific action display is performed in the second special state, the player is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, and therefore a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-21,
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of form 2-14 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-13,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A-C, E jackpot") which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state, and a second specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach D (instant hit or full spins)", "SP non-via A", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state B is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probability variable state (for example, 5%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that a long period has continued during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it has been decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, the variable display mode is set to a specific mode, so that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-14,
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-15,
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach big win variable pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of form 1-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-22,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestion performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved memory means when a reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the first special state and the second special state and when a variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and does not execute the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state A", and when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "probable change state", a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state B", a part that does not execute a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the state is not controlled to be advantageous, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern does not unnecessarily induce excitement through suggestive effects, and therefore a favorable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, if the variable display is one that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is not executed by the performance execution means, and if the variable display is one that is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is executed by the performance execution means (for example, in the time-saving state B, if the pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern, the "movable object forecast" or "character forecast" is not executed, and if the pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the "movable object forecast" or "character forecast" may be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
the variable display pattern determination means includes a variable display pattern that displays a display result of the variable display after the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific state,
The suggestive performance includes a provocative performance inviting a player to know whether the state of the variable display will be a specific state (for example, a suggestive performance inviting a player to be controlled to a jackpot game state may include a "reach notice" or a "button notice" as a provocative performance inviting a player to know whether the state of the variable display will be a reach state (whether a reach will be established)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-26 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-25,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a portion capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (for example, a line A or a vibration (small)) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a line B or a vibration (large)) which has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the variable display result);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of form 2-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-16,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object announcement" or a "character announcement");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved memory means when a reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and when a variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state, and does not execute the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state A", and when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "probable change state", a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state B", a part that does not execute a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the state is not controlled to be advantageous, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern does not unnecessarily induce excitement through suggestive effects, and therefore a favorable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of form 1-27 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-26,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the identification information as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to a game (e.g., a performance control command);
A performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice performance) capable of executing a performance including a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The performance execution means is capable of determining one pre-reading notice performance pattern from among a plurality of types of pre-reading notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice");
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed, the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is also smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
The rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 30%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 40%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, the number of pre-reading preview performance patterns is small, thereby reducing development costs, and the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performance, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-28 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-27,
As a look-ahead notice performance pattern which can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there are a first look-ahead notice performance pattern and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, there is a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed, and the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the first pre-reading preview performance in the second special state, a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-29 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-28,
As a look-ahead notice performance pattern which can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there are a first look-ahead notice performance pattern and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, there is a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed, and the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the second pre-reading preview performance is likely to be executed in the second special state, a favorable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-30 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-29,
The pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the second special state are common (for example, the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the probability change state and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the part that is a "pattern chance eye notice").
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a pre-reading preview performance pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of form 2-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 1-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the identification information as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to a game (e.g., a performance control command);
A performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice performance) capable of executing a performance including a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The performance execution means is capable of determining one pre-reading notice performance pattern from among a plurality of types of pre-reading notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance notice", "effect display notice");
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is less than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is also less than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
The rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 30%), and is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 40%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, the number of pre-reading preview performance patterns is small, thereby reducing development costs, and the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performance, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-19 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-18,
The look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability change state are common (for example, the "pattern chance eye notice") part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a pre-reading preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-20 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-19,
The look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is common to the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in both the time-saving state A and the probability change state (for example, the "pattern chance eye notice") part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-20,
The number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state, and the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the third special state (for example, the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable pre-reading preview performance patterns is reduced to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable pre-reading preview performance patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of form 1-31 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot and 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 20% for a miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 30% for a miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times that the player is prompted to take an action in one variable display is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-32 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, the percentage of the action promotion effect being executed by the effect execution means when the variable display is one that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the percentage of the action promotion effect being executed by the effect execution means when the variable display is one that has not been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state B, the percentage of the effect control CPU 120 executing a “button notice” when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 10%) is higher than the percentage of the effect control CPU 120 executing a “button notice” when the variable display result is a miss (for example, 5%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the fact that the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-33 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-32,
The action promotion performance pattern executable by the performance execution means includes a first action promotion performance pattern and a second action promotion performance pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first action promotion performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the second action-promoting presentation pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second action-promoting presentation pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as presentation patterns for the "button notice", there are a "hit" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern which has a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "hit" pattern is executed, and the rate at which the "hit" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%) is lower than the rate at which the "hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (for example, 40%), but the rate at which the "hit" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B may be higher than the rate at which the "hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the action-promoting performance is executed in the second special state, the second action-promoting performance pattern is often obtained, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-34 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-33,
The period during which the action promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the period during which the “button notice” is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the period during which the “button notice” is executed in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the “reach notice” is executed)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution period of the action prompting effect can be made common between the first special state and the second special state, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-34,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a motion promotion preparation performance before executing the motion promotion performance,
The period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, before the operation effective period starts, an effect in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect display is displayed) before executing the “button notice”, it is preferable that the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state B are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the action promotion preparation performance common between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced and an appropriate notification can be provided that the action promotion performance will be executed.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of form 2-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss) and is also lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times that the player is prompted to take an action in one variable display is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of form 1-36 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a performance for encouraging a player to perform a motion and a specific performance for informing the player that the player is being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a "win/lose button performance" and a "movable body performance");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
As the performance execution patterns of the action prompting performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., “patterns A-2 and A-3”) in which the specific performance is executed after the action prompting performance is executed, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., “pattern A-1”) in which the specific performance is executed without executing the action prompting performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A (for example, 0%), and is higher than the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" or "full rotation performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state (for example, 0%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not been made, the player is less urged to take action when notified that a decision has been made to control to the advantageous state, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of form 2-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a performance for encouraging a player to perform a motion and a specific performance for informing the player that the player will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice" and a "win/lose button performance");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
As the performance execution patterns of the action prompting performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., “patterns A-2 and A-3”) in which the specific performance is executed after the action prompting performance is executed, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., “pattern A-1”) in which the specific performance is executed without executing the action prompting performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of the "movable body performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A, and is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of the "movable body performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state without executing the "hit/miss button performance". See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not been made, the player is less urged to take action when notified that a decision has been made to control to the advantageous state, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of form 1-37 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The types of the action prompting effects that can be executed by the effect execution means include a first action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (e.g., an action prompting display for a “one-hit” action), and a second action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period (e.g., an action prompting display for a “continuous hit” or “long press” action),
The effect execution means is capable of executing both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state, and is capable of executing the first action promotion effect in the second special state, but does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of determining the execution of both the “one-hit pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” in the “probable change state” and the “time-saving state A”, and is capable of determining the “one-hit pattern” in the “time-saving state B”, but does not determine the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the player is less prompted to perform troublesome actions such as operating over a predetermined operating period, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of form 2-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The types of the action prompting effects that can be executed by the effect execution means include a first action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (e.g., an action prompting display for a “one-hit” action), and a second action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period (e.g., an action prompting display for a “continuous hit” or “long press” action),
The effect execution means is capable of executing both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state and the third special state, and is capable of executing the first action promotion effect in the second special state, but does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of determining the execution of both the “one-hit pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” in the “probable change state” and the “time-saving state A”, and is capable of determining the “one-hit pattern” in the “time-saving state B”, but does not determine the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the player is less prompted to perform troublesome actions such as operating over a predetermined operating period, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of form 1-38 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive effect (e.g., "large vibration") that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means;
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times that control to the advantageous state is suggested is reduced, taking into account the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not continued, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-39 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-38,
The rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in the second special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 90%), but the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive performance between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-40 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-39,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is higher than the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means (for example, the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%), but the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive performance between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of form 2-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive effect (e.g., "large vibration") that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means;
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 30% miss) and is also lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 40% miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times that control to the advantageous state is suggested is reduced, taking into account the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not continued, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of form 1-41 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-40,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a provocative performance for provoking whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is to be a specific mode (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The execution rate of the teasing performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the teasing performance per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state B” (for example, 10% for a big hit, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state A” (for example, 80% for a big hit, 20% for a miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “probability change state” (for example, 80% for a big hit, 30% for a miss). Also, the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state B” (for example, 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state A” (for example, 40%), and is lower than the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “probability change state” (for example, 50%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, the number of times that the question of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of form 2-26 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-25,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a provocative performance for provoking whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is to be a specific mode (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a big hit, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a big hit, 20% for a miss). ), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 80% for big wins, 30% for misses). Also, the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 40%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 50%). See FIG. 11-50.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, the number of times that the question of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of form 1-42 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a moving body performance that operates the moving body and a specific performance that notifies the user that the moving body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "moving body notice" and a "moving body performance");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
As the performance execution patterns of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., "patterns A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is also executed during the execution period of the specific performance, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state B” is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 10%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state A”, and is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to an advantageous state taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated even before a specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-43 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-42,
The control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the movable body to the advantageous state in the first special state and the control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the movable body to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) is common to the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the control data used to control the movable body in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-44 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-43,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the control data (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, and the control data (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-44,
a display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body,
The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (see the movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) and the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (see the movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the effect images displayed in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-45,
A vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion is provided,
The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-47 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-46,
The rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state is higher than the rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, the rate at which “patterns A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)” are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (for example, 80 to 90%) is higher than the rate at which “patterns A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)” are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first special state, interest can be enhanced by drawing attention to whether or not the movable body moves.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-48 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-47,
The execution frequency of the movable body performance in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body performance in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency of the "movable body performance" in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (for example, 80 to 90%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated in the second special state, a preferable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of form 2-27 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a moving body performance that operates the moving body and a specific performance that notifies the user that the moving body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "moving body notice" and a "moving body performance");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
As the performance execution patterns of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., "patterns A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is also executed during the execution period of the specific performance, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state B” is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 10%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state A”, and is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Probable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to an advantageous state taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated even before a specific performance.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of form 1-49 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
a presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body presentation" and a "post-presentation") capable of executing presentations including a specific presentation that notifies the player that the display will be controlled to the advantageous state when the display is a variable display that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-presentation that is executed after the specific presentation and notifies the player of game value information (for example, the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is also smaller than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a “jackpot”, the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time-shortened state B” is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time-shortened state A”, and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
The presentation mode of the post-event performance is common between the case where the post-event performance is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-event performance is executed in the second special state (for example, the presentation mode of the “post-event performance” which notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the SP reach performance notifies the player of the control to the jackpot game state is the part which is common to the “time-saving state B”, the “probability change state”, and the “time-saving state A” as shown in FIG. 11-60. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display that has been decided upon to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller number of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide an advantageous second special state by using a presentation that is common to the first special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-50 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific performance executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state and the specific performance executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the "movable body performance" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, and the "movable body performance" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts. See FIG. 11-59 (D1)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by sharing specific effects between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-51 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-50,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the light-emitting control data executed based on the extension command D300).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-52 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-51,
A vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion is provided,
The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of form 2-28 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
a presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body presentation" and a "post-presentation") capable of executing presentations including a specific presentation that notifies the player that the display will be controlled to the advantageous state when the display is a variable display that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-presentation that is executed after the specific presentation and notifies the player of game value information (for example, the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is less than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also less than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state").
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A" and shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
The presentation mode of the post-event performance is common to the case where the post-event performance is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-event performance is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-event performance is executed in the third special state (for example, the presentation mode of the “post-event performance” which notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the SP reach performance notifies the player of the control to the jackpot game state is the part which is common to the “time-saving state B”, “probability change state”, and “time-saving state A” as shown in FIG. 11-60. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller number of variable display patterns and a shorter average period of the variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, a common presentation can be used to liven things up in the first special state and the third special state, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of form 1-53 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-52,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means
When the second reserved memory means has no reserved memory stored in the first special state and the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period that can store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory means can be determined;
In the case where the reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the second special state and the determination means does not determine that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the CPU 103 can determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the reserved memory number is 0 in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) having a long variable display time to earn time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory, while when the reserved memory number is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variable pattern (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variable time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variable time of 3 seconds) having a shorter variable display time than a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, even if the reserved memory is not stored, a predetermined variable display pattern having a long variable display period is determined, so that the consumption speed of the variable display is not reduced, and a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of form 2-29 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-28,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means
When the second reserved memory means has no reserved memory stored in the first special state or the third special state and the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period during which the second reserved memory means can store the reserved memory is determined;
In the case where the reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the second special state and the determination means does not determine that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the CPU 103 can determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the reserved memory number is 0 in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) having a long variable display time to earn time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory, while when the reserved memory number is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variable pattern (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variable time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variable time of 3 seconds) having a shorter variable display time than a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, even if the reserved memory is not stored, a predetermined variable display pattern having a long variable display period is determined, so that the consumption speed of the variable display is not reduced, and a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of form 1-54 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "entry performance") capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the control of the special state by displaying a special state start display;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The performance execution means includes:
When the control of the first special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed (for example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variable image 069SG471 is displayed in the probability variable entry performance, while when the control of the time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time-saving state A and the probability variable state is displayed in the time-saving entry performance B, and the part that displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability variable state or the time-saving state A is started. See FIG. 11-50, FIG. 11-63, FIG. 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, the special state start presentation not only displays the special state start display that is common to when control of the first special state begins, but also displays a special display that is not displayed when control of the first special state begins, thereby creating excitement for the start of the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-55 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-54,
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern of a variable display period in which the special state start performance can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state has been started (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may be capable of determining a special variable display pattern having a variable display time in which the “entry performance” can be executed in the rescue time reduction reaching variation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special state start presentation can be executed in an optimal manner.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of form 2-30 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "entry performance") capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the control of the special state by displaying a special state start display;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The performance execution means includes:
When the control of the third special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed (for example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variable image 069SG471 is displayed in the probability variable entry performance, while when the control of the time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time-saving state A and the probability variable state is displayed in the time-saving entry performance B, and the part that displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability variable state or the time-saving state A is started. See FIG. 11-50, FIG. 11-63, FIG. 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the special state start presentation, not only is a special state start display that is common to when control of the third special state begins, but also a special display that is not displayed when control of the third special state begins, thereby creating excitement for the start of the second special state.

(SG2020-119) A gaming machine of form 1-56 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-55,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot C (10R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When the determination means determines that control should be made to the advantageous state, the decoration variable display means is capable of executing a special decoration variable display (e.g., SP reach D (full rotation)) which displays a specific display result, which is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays the special decoration variable display;
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation performance” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B (for example, 100%) is higher than the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A (for example, 0% (not executed)), and is higher than the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state (for example, 0% (not executed)). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a more advantageous second advantageous state, taking into consideration the long period during which the second special state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of form 2-31 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-30,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot C (10R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When the determination means determines that control should be made to the advantageous state, the decoration variable display means is capable of executing a special decoration variable display (e.g., SP reach D (full rotation)) which displays a specific display result, which is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays the special decoration variable display,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the third special state (for example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is selected as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B, The percentage (e.g., 100%) at which the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the "full spin presentation" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the "SP reach D (full spin)" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state, and is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the "SP reach D (full spin)" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state. See FIG. 11-69.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a more advantageous second advantageous state, taking into consideration the long period during which the second special state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(Feature 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of the form 1 of the characteristic part 099SG is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-100) Form 2 gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the first number of times and is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the third special state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-101) Form 3 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-102) Form 4 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the second number of times and is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the third special state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-103) Form 5 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of a variable display whose variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of a variable display whose variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-104) Type 6 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value ξ is a part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-105) Type 7 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-106) Type 8 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value ξ' is a portion smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-107) Type 9 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of type 10 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value λ is a portion smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-109) Type 11 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-110) Type 12 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value λ is a portion smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-111) Type 13 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of type 14 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the first number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value θ is a part smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-113) Type 15 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 2 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 2 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-114) The gaming machine of type 16 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value θ' is a portion smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-115) Type 17 gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-116) Type 18 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the second special state, by the first number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the first special state, by the first number of times, and is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value ε is a portion smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-117) Type 19 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the variable display is executed more frequently and in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-118) The gaming machine of type 20 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value ε' is a portion smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches gaming media into a gaming area (e.g., a right gaming area and a left gaming area) into which the gaming media can flow,
As the variable display, it is possible to execute variable display of special identification information and variable display of normal identification information (for example, a portion capable of executing variable display of special patterns and variable display of normal patterns),
a variable means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B forming a second starting winning hole) that changes the state between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium is less likely to enter than in the first state, based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information;
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the special identification information as reserved memory;
Equipped with
The game area has a special path (e.g., a left game area) in which the variable means is provided, and a non-special path (e.g., a right game area) different from the special path,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the game state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), the part where the normal winning probability is the same even if the game state is the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the probability-changing state),
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning port is 3 seconds even when the game state is the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the probability variable state).
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is launched toward the special path (for example, the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B are both game states in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the commonality of gameplay between the first special state and the second special state, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to a large difference in gameplay between the first special state and the second special state, which are both special states.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21,
In the case where the period value is obtained by measuring the period required for the first or second number of variable displays not controlled to the advantageous state to be executed in each special state, the start point of the measurement includes the time when the launch of the game medium is started (for example, the part for calculating the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss, as the period from the time when the game ball is shot out or the time when the shot game ball enters a start winning hole to the time when the variable display based on the start winning is ended),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period value can be appropriately obtained by measurement.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2, 6, 10, 14, and 18,
A reserve memory means is provided for storing a plurality of pieces of information regarding the variable display as reserve memory,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in any of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four regardless of the game state),
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of the change pattern of the variable display that results in a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories, so that the average variable display period of the variable display that results in a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The period value is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in the first number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved memory number (for example, as shown in Figures 12-13, the period value in each game state is a part that is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in 110 variable displays by the average variable display period of each reserved memory number),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period A, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion a (for example, A is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and a is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period B, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion b (for example, B is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and b is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion c (for example, C is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A, and c is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period D, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion d (for example, D is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, and d is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α is a part calculated by the value of A×a+B×b+C×c+D×d).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 23 or aspect 24,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion e (for example, E is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and e is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period F, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion f (for example, F is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and f is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion g (for example, G is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and g is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period H, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion h (for example, H is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and h is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β is a part calculated by the value of E×e+F×f+G×g+H×h).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 23 to 25,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period I, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion i (for example, I is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss, and i is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period J, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion j (for example, J is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state is a miss, and j is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period K, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion k (for example, K is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state is a miss, and k is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period L, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion 1 (for example, L is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss, and 1 is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The period value of the third special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio l, and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ is a part calculated by the value of I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4, 8, 12, 16, and 20,
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information related to variable display as reserved memory,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in any of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four regardless of the game state),
The average variable display period of the variable display varies depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss varies depending on the number of reserved memories, so that the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss varies depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The period value is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in the second number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved memory number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the period value in each game state is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in 1100 variable displays by the average variable display period of each reserved memory number),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 28 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period A, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion a' (for example, A is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and a' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period B, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion b' (for example, B is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and b' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion c' (for example, C is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A, and c' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period D, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion d' (for example, D is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, and d' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display period B, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c', and the average variable display period C, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α' is a part calculated by the value of A×a'+B×b'+C×c'+D×d').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

The gaming machine of means 29 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27 or 28,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion e' (for example, E is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and e' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period F, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion f' (for example, F is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and f' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion g' (for example, G is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B, and g' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period H, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion h' (for example, H is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B, and h' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display period F, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β' is a part calculated by the value of E×e'+F×f'+G×g'+H×h').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 27th to 29th aspects,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period I, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion i' (for example, I is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss, and i' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period J, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion j' (for example, J is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state is a miss, and j' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period K, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion k' (for example, K is the average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state, and k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period L, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion l' (for example, L is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state, and l' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The period value of the third special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display period J, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ' is a part calculated by the value of I×i'+J×j'+K×k'+L×l').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

(Feature part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) The gaming machine of the feature part 018SG form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A light emitter (for example, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32),
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special performance that moves the movable body and causes the light-emitting body to emit light (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing the SP reach performances A to E and the movable body performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance B) that displays a specific character (e.g., enemy character X-1) and notifies whether or not the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state without displaying the specific character can be executed.
When it is notified that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, a part where a movable body performance can be executed during the execution period (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach performance),
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character (e.g., character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body (see FIG. 13-14 (D2) (D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body in a manner common to the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed (see FIG. 13-14 (D1)),
The light emission mode of the light emitter in the special performance (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2) is common between the case where the special performance is executed in the first specific performance and the case where the special performance is executed in the second specific performance (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating mode of the movable body and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting body in the first special effect, in which a specific character is displayed, are common to a second special effect, in which a specific character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while the presence or absence of a specific character during the execution period of the special effect increases the correlation between the special effects and the special effects, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first specific performance is executed than when the second specific performance is executed (for example, since the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α, the SP reach performance B and SP reach performance C have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the SP reach performance A (jackpot expectation rate: SP reach performance A < SP reach performance B < SP reach performance C) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the second special effect is executed as the special effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1 or 3-2,
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the “decisive effect” in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B = SP reach effect C = SP reach effect D = SP reach effect E) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the special effects common, the control data for the movable bodies and light-emitting bodies in the special effects can be common, thereby enabling further reduction in manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period subsequent to the first period,
The presentation mode in the first period is common to the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation, while the presentation mode in the second period is different between the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation (for example, the execution period of the movable body presentation includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the presentation mode in the first period is common to the SP reach presentations B to E and the SP reach presentation A (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14(C) is common), while the presentation mode in the second period is different between the SP reach presentations B to E and the SP reach presentation A. The parts different from the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D1) and the images shown in FIG. 13-14(D2 to D5)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by keeping the presentation format common until the first period, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs, while at the same time increasing interest in the presentation of the specific presentation, since it is unclear until the first period whether it is the first or second specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a third specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) that displays a special character (e.g., enemy character X-2) different from the specific character as the specific effect,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific performance is executed and when the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a jackpot in a low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in a high base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance E is 800/997).
In the third specific performance, during the execution period of the special performance executed when it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled, an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) common to the first specific performance corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed, and the special character (e.g., character image 018SGX2) is displayed;
The light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance executed in the third specific performance (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) is common to the light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance executed in the first specific performance (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating mode of the movable body and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting body in each special effect can be standardized to reduce manufacturing costs, while the number of specific effects with different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state can be increased, allowing players to focus on which specific effect will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-5,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The light emission end state of the light-emitting body in the special effect is common regardless of the detection timing at which the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective operation period before the fact that the specific effect has been controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or at the timing at which the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the manner in which the light emission of the light-emitting body ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's action, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-6,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a post-period performance (a big win notification) in a post-period after the special performance during the specific performance,
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific performance in which the later period performance is executed (for example, in the later period after the movable body performance during the execution of the SP reach performances A to E, a jackpot confirmation notification can be executed as a later period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is common regardless of the type of the SP reach performances A to E (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2). See FIG. 13-6 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the post-period performance is executed using a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of specific performance, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-7,
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) are provided;
The effect execution means is capable of outputting a special effect sound from the sound output means during the special effect,
The output pattern of the special performance sound is common to any type of the specific performance (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is common to any type of SP reach performance A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3). See FIG. 13-6 (C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the output pattern of the special effect sound common, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-9 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-8,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The output end state of the special effect sound in the special effect is common regardless of the detection timing at which the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective operation period before the fact that the specific effect has been controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or at the timing at which the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the mode in which the output of the special effect sound ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's action, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special performance executed in the first specific performance is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the specific character and the effect image, thereby improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

(SG2020-019) A gaming machine of form 3-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32),
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that operates the movable body, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing SP reach performances A to E and post-performances A and B);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a performance in which a specific character (e.g., an enemy character) is displayed and whether or not the specific character is controlled to the advantageous state is notified using the specific character can be executed in a first mode (e.g., SP reach performance B) and a second mode (e.g., SP reach performance D),
When it is notified that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, a part where a movable body performance can be executed during the execution period (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach performance),
During the execution period of the special performance, in both the first and second modes, a common effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body is displayed together with the specific character (e.g., character image 018SGX1),
When the specific performance is executed in the first mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific performance of the first mode is not executed, and when the specific performance is executed in the second mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific performance of the second mode is executed (for example, in the case of SP reach performance B, instead of the post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach performance, the post-performance A in which no enemy character is displayed is executed (see FIG. 13-17), while in the case of SP reach performance D, the post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach performance (see FIG. 13-18 and FIG. 13-19) is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second modes share the same operating patterns of the movable bodies in the specific characters and special effects, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while displaying the common specific characters in different effects, thereby increasing the correlation between the specific effects and the special effects, and between the specific effects and the post-effects, thereby improving the effect of the effects.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-12 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect in which the specific character is changed into a special form after the special effect executed in the specific effect,
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second mode is executed after the post-effect effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, in the big win notification before the post-effect effect A, a character image 018SGX1Z of the defeated enemy character X-1 that is not displayed due to a fade-out display is displayed (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)), and in the SP reach effect D, in the post-effect effect B, a special image 018SGXZ of the attacked enemy character X-2 that disappears and becomes a star after being blown away is displayed (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes depending on the type of specific effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-13 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11 or 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the post-event performance during a variable display period in which one variable display is being executed,
In the post-event performance, game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that has been notified of being controlled by the specific performance related to the post-event performance is notified (for example, the execution period of "post-event performance A, B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is the portion from timing ta5 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performances A to E is temporarily displayed to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7) during the variable display period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, attention can be increased to the post-event performance in which the gaming value information is announced, and interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-14 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11 or 3-12,
A gaming machine in which a specific display result is derived and displayed as a result of a variable display, thereby informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the post-performance when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-performance A, B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is the portion from timing ta5 when the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the jackpot determination notification of SP reach performances A to E to timing ta7 when the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed (variable display ends) during the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize the timing when the post-performance will be executed, thereby increasing attention to the post-performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-14,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which a game value to be awarded is greater than that of the first advantageous state,
The proportion of the control to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific presentation of the second mode is executed than when the specific presentation of the first mode is executed (for example, when the SP reach presentation B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the control to “jackpot B (6R)” (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach presentation D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the control to “jackpot C (10R)” (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state) is 40%).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific presentation is executed in the first mode or the second mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-15,
When the performance execution means executes the specific performance in the first mode, it is capable of executing the post-performance in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, in post-performance A of SP reach performance A, since no character appears in SP reach performance A, no character appears in post-performance A either. Also, in post-performance A of SP reach performances B and C, characters appear in SP reach performances B and C but no character appears in post-performance A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a post-performance is also executed when the specific performance of the first mode is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance during one variable display,
A variable display period of the variable display in which the specific performance is executed in the second mode is shorter than a variable display period of the variable display in which the specific performance is executed in the first mode,
In the specific performance of the second mode, the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result is longer than the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result in the specific performance of the first mode (for example, the variable display period of the SP reach γ for a high base is shorter than the variable display period of the SP reach β for a low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), and the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP reach β to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the SP reach β (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ > SP reach β)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second type of specific presentation executed in a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced by lengthening the period after the end of the special presentation, even if the variable display period is short.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of form 3-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means is provided that can execute a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the game is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the specific performance, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 is provided as a part that can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B);
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific effects, a first specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect D) is displayed to indicate whether or not the specific character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state, and a second specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) is displayed to indicate whether or not the special character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state, the second specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) is displayed to indicate whether or not the special character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state,
As the post-event performance, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character displayed in the first specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, thereby executing a first post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) that notifies game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state,
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) can be executed in which the special character displayed in the second specific performance and the special character are displayed and operated to notify game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
At least the behavior of the special character is common to the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (see FIG. 13-18 and FIG. 13-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using a common character for both the special performance and the post-performance, manufacturing costs can be reduced while the relationship between the special performance and the post-performance can be easily understood, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of the performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-19 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-18,
The execution period of the second post-effect is common to the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of “post-effect B” corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E are all common),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the execution period, it becomes easier to reuse the control data for the post-event performance, in particular the action control data for special characters, thereby enabling further reduction in manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-20 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-18 or 3-19,
The performance execution means is capable of causing a light-emitting body to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body is common to the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball addition part of the post-event performance B is common to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E (light emission pattern LP4-4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission pattern can also be standardized, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-20,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a background image in the post-performance,
The background image is common to the first and second post-event performances (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance D and the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the background image can also be made common, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-21,
The special character is common to the first and second post-event performances (for example, the ally character A-1 is common to the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance D and the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special characters can also be made common, which further reduces manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-22,
The performance execution means includes:
In the first post-event performance, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at the same time,
In the second post-event performance, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in the post-event performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D, an image of an enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time, and in the post-event performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance E, an image of an enemy character X-2 and an ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, each character is displayed simultaneously, which enhances the impression of the post-show performance and improves the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-23,
The performance period of the post-performance includes a first performance period and a second performance period subsequent to the first performance period,
The performance execution means includes:
During the first performance period, a suggestion display regarding the magnitude of the game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that notifies that the specific performance related to the post-performance is controlled and an addition display indicating the magnitude of the game value to be added to the suggestion display are displayed (for example, a planned ball output addition part in which the number of planned balls to be output is added and displayed in response to an ally character appearing in SP reach performances D and E attacking an enemy character);
In the second performance period, the amount of the game value shown in the addition display is added to the game value shown in the suggestion display to produce an awarded game value, which is reported as the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, in a planned ball output reporting part, after a friendly character delivers a final blow to an enemy character, the planned number of balls is displayed as a stopped number and the planned number of balls is reported, and then a fixed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is displayed as a stopped number and the variable display ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the post-performance, the amount of game value to be awarded in an advantageous state is announced after the suggestion display and the addition display are displayed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the post-performance.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of form 3-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means is provided that can execute a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the game is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the specific performance, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 is provided as a part that can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B);
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., "jackpot A (6R)" in a low base state and "jackpot B (6R)" in a high base state) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (e.g., "jackpot B (6R)" in a low base state and "jackpot C (10R)" in a high base state),
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance D), a second specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance E) different in performance mode from the first specific performance, and a third specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance A) different in performance mode from the first specific performance and the second specific performance can be executed.
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the first specific performance, a first post-event performance (for example, a post-event performance B in which an ally A-1 and an enemy X-1 appear) of a performance aspect related to the first specific performance can be executed;
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (for example, a post-event performance B in which an ally A-1 and an enemy X-2 appear) of a performance aspect related to the second specific performance can be executed,
As the post-performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, a third post-performance (e.g., post-performance A) of a performance mode related to the third specific performance can be executed;
The proportion of the second advantageous state varies depending on whether the first specific performance, the second specific performance, or the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state), is 40% when the SP reach performance D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach performance E is executed; when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state), is 100% when the SP reach performance A is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, not only is it notified that a special effect will control the player to an advantageous state, but the proportion of the player being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which special effect is executed, so that the player's attention to the special effect can be appropriately increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-25,
The performance period of the first post-performance and the performance period of the second post-performance are the same,
The performance period of the third post-performance is different from the performance periods of the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C are all common, and the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E are all common, while the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance A" (10 seconds) is different from the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-performance B").
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the performance period of the first post-performance and the second post-performance common, it is easier to standardize the performance content and control between the first and second post-performances, which reduces manufacturing costs. Furthermore, by executing a third post-performance which has a different performance period, it is possible to prevent the post-performance from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the post-performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-27 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-25 or 3-26,
The performance execution means is capable of causing the light-emitting body to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-event performance is common to the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the second post-event performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the third post-performance is different from the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball release notification part of the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E are common, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-performance A corresponding to the SP reach performance A are different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E. See FIG. 13-6).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the lighting pattern for the first post-performance and the second post-performance common, manufacturing costs can be further reduced, and by executing a third post-performance with a different lighting pattern, the effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable pieces approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 (described later) that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball striking handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball output rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly turning on and off the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, they also include one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding feature 069SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 069SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-64. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 069SG, for example, "step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "069SGS1", "normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach" and "super reach" to "SP reach". In addition, in the characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the same symbols are used to omit detailed description of the configurations that are similar to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or have different forms, arrangement positions, etc. but have the same functions. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing a player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[First embodiment]
The following describes the first embodiment of the feature part 069SG. As described in FIG. 7, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is not set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different rates at which the big win display result is displayed, but is described as a game machine in which the big win probability is set to about 1/319.

In addition, after the gaming machine is powered on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a certain number of times (900 times in this example) in succession in a low probability state but the next jackpot does not occur, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in playing), and in this example, it is a gaming state called "Yu-time".

In this embodiment, if the multiple types of jackpots are controlled to jackpot A, 110 variable displays are performed in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) out of the multiple types of time-saving states, so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of time-saving state A to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 790, while if the multiple types of jackpots are controlled to either jackpot B or jackpot C, 110 variable displays are performed in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 900. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter becoming "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, in the variable display when the rescue time reduction is reached, a shutter image (see Figs. 11-23 (B) and (C)) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the first background image (see Fig. 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state that was displayed as the background image in the variable display before the rescue time reduction is reached, and then a third background image (see Fig. 11-23 (D)) corresponding to the rescue time reduction is displayed as the background image.

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed in a right game area where game balls can flow down. Game balls that are weakly shot by the launching device flow down the first path in the left game area, and game balls that are strongly shot by the launching device flow down the second path in the right game area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed along the flow direction of the game balls. The first large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 069SG2A (see FIG. 11-2). The second large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 069SG2B (see FIG. 11-3).

Furthermore, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area (first path) can win in the general winning port 10 and the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, and game balls flowing down the right game area (second path) can win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning port 10, and the first or second large winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

There are multiple obstacle nails between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left game area cannot win in the second start winning hole or the large winning hole, and game balls flowing down the right game area cannot win in the first start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special pattern display device 069SG004A capable of variable display of the first special pattern, a second special pattern display device 069SG004B capable of variable display of the second special pattern, a first reserved indicator 069SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserved indicator 069SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal pattern display device 069SG020 capable of variable display of normal patterns, a normal reserved indicator 069SG025C capable of displaying the normal reserved memory number, A game information display unit is provided in which a round indicator 069SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of a jackpot game during the jackpot game, a right hit lamp 069SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right game area, such as a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (high probability state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a high probability/high base state (high probability state) lamp 069SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state), and a time-saving lamp 069SG134 that lights up in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) and a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) are all arranged together. Note that, when the game state is normal, the right hit lamp 069SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the gaming center where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening has a V prize opening and an outlet downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the outlet when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 069SG023B1 that can detect, via a switch circuit 110, that the game ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 069SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 069SG031 for encouraging a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 069SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserved LED 069SG034A that lights up when the first reserved memory number is 1 to 2, and a first reserved LED 069SG035A that lights up when the first reserved memory number is 3 to 4. 69SG034B, a second pending LED 069SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 069SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating them by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used to control the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 069SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 069SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 069SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this feature part 069SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 069SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in FIG. 7, as well as the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), as well as a fluctuation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the set value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value.

(Big hit type determination table)
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpots A to C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the case of jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the cases of jackpot B and jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in a long open state in the first round of the jackpot game state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this example, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, but this is extremely rare, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be explained as not having a V entry and the special rate control not being executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, but this is extremely rare, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as having a V entry and the special rate control being executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which 110 times of probability variable control and time-saving control can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D in which time-saving control is executed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot game state may be provided. By doing so, it is almost certain that the next jackpot will be won, which increases interest, and even if a jackpot does not occur in the 110 times probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after 899 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), simply executing one variable display in the normal state will further control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described later, which increases interest.

(Time reduction)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving times for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this example, the game enters the time-saving state A (in this example, the time-saving state B is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time-saving). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed 110 times (in this example, the time-saving state C is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time-saving). In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this example, a time-saving state B of 1100 times (Yu-1100 Battle Rush (Yu-1100 Battle Rush))). However, even if 900 fluctuations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the time-saving state B again based on this.

In addition, when a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) the time reduction control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 1100 times, so that the time reduction state B (in this example, the play state with 1100 time reductions and 1100 battle rushes) may be controlled. In this case, even if a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability change state, time reduction state), the transition control of the game state is not performed (it is not controlled to the time reduction state with 1100 time reductions). This is to avoid reducing the degree of relief for the player. For example, if a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed when the game is controlled in the probability change state where a jackpot is likely to occur, the game state is re-controlled to the time reduction state with 1100 time reductions, which is not preferable because it would be controlled from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state for the player. Therefore, the game can be configured to be controlled to a time-saving state of 1,100 times only if the game state controlled when the time-saving losing symbol is stopped and displayed is a normal state.

The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the percentage of control to the time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting value to be set, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set to be higher as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value.

(Fluctuation pattern)
11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table in this embodiment.

Figure 11-5 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in the normal state is 0 to 2, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-5 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 2, 97 judgment values are assigned to non-reach B, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 1 judgment value is assigned to SP reach B. Also, as shown in Figure 11-5 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 3, 97 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach B, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 1 judgment value is assigned to SP reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-5 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 judgment values are assigned to SP non-via B, 40 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 50 judgment values are assigned to SP reach B.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in the special bonus state is 0, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-6 (B), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 85 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, 10 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0, 5 judgment values are assigned to SP non-via A, 80 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 15 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D.

In addition, FIG. 11-7 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in time-saving state A is 0, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E. Also, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 90 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, 5 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 5 determination values are assigned to SP non-via A, and 95 determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

In addition, Figure 11-8 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-8 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-8 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to super-shortened non-reach, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

As shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), in the high probability state, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is approximately 8.2 seconds {((7 s x 95) + (40 s x 2) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is approximately 4.8 seconds {((3 s x 85) + (7 s x 10) + (40 s x 2) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}.

Assuming that the first variable display when the probability of a special state begins has a reserved memory number of 0, and that the 2nd to 110th variable display has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, the average variable display time for a losing variable pattern that can be determined in the probability of a special state is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6(C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 80) + (40 s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

As shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), in time-saving state A, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 9.15 seconds {((7 s x 95) + (50 s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3 s x 90) + (7 s x 5) + (50 s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}.

Assuming that when time-saving state A starts, the first variable display has a pending memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 110th variable displays have a pending memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable display pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state A is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in time-saving state A is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

As shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), in time-saving state B, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}.

Assuming that when time-saving state B starts, the first variable display has a pending memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 1100th variable display has a pending memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable display pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 x 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in time-saving state B when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 40 seconds.

In this way, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the number of possible variation patterns for a miss is three for the special state, two for the time-saving state A, and two for the time-saving state B. When the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number of possible variation patterns for a miss is four for the special state, three for the time-saving state A, and two for the time-saving state B.

The average variable display time of the determinable losing variation pattern is 4.83 seconds in the guaranteed bonus state, 5.58 seconds in time-saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in time-saving state B.

In addition, when the number of reserved memories is between 0 and 3, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined is three for the special state, two for the time-saving state A, and one for the time-saving state B.

The average variable display time of the determinable jackpot fluctuation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the guaranteed bonus state, 62.8 seconds in time-saving state A, and 40 seconds in time-saving state B.

In other words, the number of types of variable patterns for misses that can be determined decreases in the order of high probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (high probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average time of the variable display time of the variable patterns for misses that can be determined decreases in the order of high probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (high probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In addition, the types of variable patterns for big wins that can be determined decrease in the order of special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (special probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average time of the variable display time of the variable patterns for big wins that can be determined decreases in the order of special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (special probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B). In this way, the time-saving state B has fewer types of variable patterns and a shorter variable display period than the special probability state and time-saving state A. In other words, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, the number of types of fluctuation patterns for misses and types of fluctuation patterns for big wins that can be determined is greater in the special state than in the time-saving state A, but the number of types of fluctuation patterns for big wins may be greater in the time-saving state A than in the special state, or may be the same in the special state and the time-saving state A.

The various fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-5 to 11-8 are used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In particular, in time-saving state B, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-8 is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that even if the first start winning occurs in time-saving state B, the number of possible fluctuation pattern types is smaller than in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A, and the average variable display time is shorter, resulting in a monotonous and efficient variable display.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

When a V-winning occurs during a jackpot game state due to a "jackpot A", the game is controlled to a probability variable state in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state, as in the case of "jackpot B" and "jackpot C", so the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. When a V-winning does not occur during a jackpot game state due to a "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the game is controlled to a time-saving state A in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, as in the case of "jackpot A", so the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table does not use a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the type of jackpot, but rather uses a fluctuation pattern determination table linked to the state after the end of the jackpot game state, since irregular states may occur during the jackpot game state.

In other words, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after the end of a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the passage of a gaming ball through a specific area (e.g., a V winning hole, etc.) in the jackpot gaming state, if a V winning occurs in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is possible, the machine is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is possible, the machine is controlled to a first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is difficult, the machine is controlled to a second time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, in which the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are a common time-saving state, and it is preferable that the variable display period of 1 in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state is shorter than the variable display period of 1 in the time-saving state B of this embodiment.

(Fluctuation pattern without reach)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern without a reach ("shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "non-SP A, non-SP B") is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established after the variable display is started and the variable display result is a "miss" or "jackpot" is stopped and displayed. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", and "non-SP A, non-SP B" are collectively referred to simply as "non-reach" or "non-reach variation pattern". Incidentally, "non-SP A, non-SP B" is a non-reach variation pattern for a jackpot that is a jackpot without the establishment of a reach or SP reach.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns not involving a reach, when it is determined to be a "non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 7000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-SP via A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 7000 + 15000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-reach B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 12000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-SP via B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 12000 + 15000 ms, when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 3000 ms, when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 5000 ms, and when it is determined to be an "ultra-shortened non-reach" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 1500 ms. Of these, the "super-shortened non-reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern that can only be determined in time-shortened state B, and has a shorter variable display period than any of the variation patterns determined when the game is controlled in other game states in which time-shortened control is executed (time-shortened state A, special probability state).

(Fluctuating pattern with super reach)
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern with the super reach ("SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", "SP reach D", "SP reach E"), after the reach state is established, as the SP reach performance, a bowling performance (SP reach A) in which the ally character and the enemy character bowl and notify whether or not the jackpot is won, and a battle performance (SP reach B to E) in which the ally character and the enemy character battle and notify whether or not the jackpot is won, are executed, and the final display result is fixed and stopped after the bowling performance or the battle performance ends. Here, if the final display result is a "miss", a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed, or a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, and then a performance (revival performance) in which the ally character revives and wins against the enemy character is executed.

A "variation pattern without a reach" is a variation pattern in which the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a specified reach state and a variable display result is displayed. This includes a variation pattern in which even if there is a reach tease such as a "reach notice" described below, the variable display result is displayed without ultimately becoming a reach state. Also, a "variation pattern with a super reach" is a variation pattern in which, after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a specified reach state, the reach performance develops and an SP reach performance is executed, and then the display result is displayed.

The Super Reach jackpot variation pattern (SP Reach A to E) also includes a variable display part in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed, and a post-show performance part in which the number of balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state is notified in a specific manner after the victory and revival performances of the variable display part have ended.

The variable display period of the variable display part is different for each type of SP reach A to E: 45,000 ms for SP reach A, 80,000 ms for SP reach B, 40,000 ms for SP reach C, 25,000 ms for SP reach D, and 50,000 ms for SP reach E. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-performance part is the same for SP reaches A to E: 15,000 ms. In this embodiment, the post-performance part is assigned a predetermined period of time (for example, 15,000 ms) in the variable display period, but the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of SP reach. In addition, a fanfare period during a jackpot game state may be assigned to the post-performance part.

In this embodiment, all fluctuation patterns involving a reach are super reach fluctuation patterns, and an example is given of a form in which a normal reach fluctuation pattern is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach fluctuation pattern may also be set.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 11-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (classification of command) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 11-9(A) is only an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbols etc. that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot" ("miss with time reduction"), and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8FXXH is a pattern confirmation command that stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, and specifies the pattern confirmation period until the next variable display begins.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), command 8F00H is a pattern determination command A that ends the variation of the special pattern and sets the pattern determination period to 0.5 seconds. Command 8F01H is a pattern determination command B that ends the variation of the special pattern and sets the pattern determination period to 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, and (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, a pattern determination command with different EXT data set is transmitted in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. Specifically, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, a pattern determination A command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. Also, (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, a pattern determination B command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 20 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control times in the time-saving state excluding rescue time-saving (time-saving state A). Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-change count notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-change control times in the chance-change state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED069SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED069SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time-saving counter to a hexadecimal number and specifies it when the power is restored. With the command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, different EXT data is set according to each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value (four-digit value) of the rescue time-saving counter when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction number specification 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction number specification 2 commands that specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number specification 3 commands that specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number specification 4 commands that specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count designation command, which is a presentation control command that designates the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), different EXT data is set according to the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A designation command, which specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B designation command, which specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C designation command, which specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D designation command, which specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, which is a performance control command that designates the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that designates a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
11-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a performance control command instructing recovery from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of a rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets the current rescue time reduction counter value converted to a hexadecimal number, and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is performed, the rescue time reduction number designation command is sent and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this example, when power is restored after a power outage, a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery and a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery are sent separately from the command at the time of recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command to specify power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

In addition, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, a clear process is performed on the area including the area of the rescue time reduction counter in the initialization process in step S8.

Also, when the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command instructing initialization in step S9, it sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on and a jackpot is not generated even after 900 variable displays are executed, rescue time reduction is performed and the time reduction state B is controlled. Note that, in this example, since the presentation control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also specify the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is "900" in this example), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a recovery time reduction count designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be reliably managed.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be made so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Time-saving flag, special flag)
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to the time-saving state A via the jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of the jackpot A ends, and is cleared when the time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, or when the 110 times of time-saving control end and the game is controlled to the normal state).

The time-saving flag B is set when the game is in the time-saving state B controlled via the rescue time-saving function. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed since the RAM was cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed in a low probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state B, when the time-saving control ends after 1100 times and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The high probability flag is set when the game is controlled to the high probability state. In this embodiment, if a V is won in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the high probability state when the jackpot game ends, and the high probability flag is set accordingly. This high probability flag is erased when the high probability state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the high probability state, when the 110th high probability control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the high probability flag is erased when YES is determined in step 069SGS69A in FIG. 11-12 described later, based on the fact that it is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the high probability state.

(Special pattern normal processing)
11-11 and 11-12 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 069SGS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved memory count is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory count is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 069SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 069SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, for example.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the jackpot state is in a probability variable state is not set (if the state is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for low probability. Also, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for determining a win matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot to be the type (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in advance, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing normal special pattern processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this example, the time-saving state A is entered based on a jackpot A being reached, and the time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot has occurred even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this example) have ended, but it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control to time-saving state A based on a jackpot being reached.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 069SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 069SGS69).

In this example, steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the variable display number until the time-saving relief from step 069SGS71 onwards, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the variable display number until the time-saving relief from step 069SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that is a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "110" (see step 069SGS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a variable display that is a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "111", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, the process of step 069SGS69A is executed, and if the game is in a high probability state, the process of steps 069SGS70 and after (particularly the process of step 069SGSS71) is not executed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a high probability state (in this example, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the high probability flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70 and subsequent steps without being executed, and the process proceeds to step 069SGSS84. However, this is not limited to the above. When the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, but a rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the unupdated rescue time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, it means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (time that is controlled to the time reduction state B, or time that is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in the time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not occurred, which is the trigger for setting the rescue time reduction counter to 900. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS71). Also, in this example, by executing the processing of step 069SGS71, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 069SGS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 sets 7FH uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 069SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation or countdown presentation described below.

In addition, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the time of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only the first time the rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time the rescue time reduction occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping pattern of the special pattern in a stopping pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
11-13 and 11-14 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 069SGS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 069SGS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the probability hit flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, rescue time-saving decision flag, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 900 variable displays are executed in the low probability state after the jackpot game ends, rescue time reduction will occur and control will be performed to time reduction state B.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 069SGS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit LED lighting notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the lighting of the right hit LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the first large prize opening 069SG007A and the second large prize opening 069SG007B are controlled to be open (step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-shortening determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time-shortening flag B and controls the game to the time-shortening state (step 069SGS171A). Then, the time-shortening count counter is set to "1100" (step 069SGS172).

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). The CPU 103 also controls the start of illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and controls the transmission of a right hit LED illumination notification command to the performance control CPU 120 notifying illumination of the right hit LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS174B). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the game is simply controlled to the time reduction state B, and the rescue time reduction counter is not set, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the game may be configured to control to the time reduction state B when the rescue time reduction occurs, and also to set the rescue time reduction counter (set to "900"). With this configuration, it becomes possible to continuously generate rescue time reductions, and once a rescue time reduction occurs, the game can be configured to continue the time reduction state until a jackpot occurs.

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time a variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be added by one each time a variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "900".

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 069SGS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 1100, which is greater than the number of variable display times (900) until a rescue time-saving time is generated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving time counter may be set to a value equal to or less than "900" in step 069SGS172.

In addition, in step 069SGS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "110" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "1100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 110 times with a 10% probability, and 1100 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving time type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (either time-saving flag A or B) and ends the time-saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to end the illumination of the right-hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right-hit LED off notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the right-hit LED 069SG031 that it has been turned off (step 069SGS151). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a normal state designation command (a type of game state designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the process of steps 069SGS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Also, if the time-saving end flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state transition)
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described below. Figures 11-15 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability region, the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs but the game ball does not pass through the high probability region, the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is activated ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clear process or (P-2) after the end of the high probability state, when the variable display count reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q) (Q-1) after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, when the variable display count reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), it will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state)).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the game is controlled to the probability variable state again. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-15, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-15, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1,100 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is activated ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clear process or (P-2) after the end of the special probability state, when the variable display count reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q) (Q-1) after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, when the variable display count reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state).

In this example, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the special probability area, the game will always transition to time-saving state A, but this control mode is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times that would occur if the game ball did not enter the special probability area (110 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game may be configured to continue in the current time-saving state B.

In this example, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state, this would be disadvantageous to the player, so the state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state.

(Explanation of Yu-Time)
Next, the characteristics of "Yu-Time", which is the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state) in this embodiment, will be explained based on Fig. 11-16 to Fig. 11-18. Fig. 11-16 shows an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is not installed, with (A1) and (A2), and shows an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is installed, with (B1) and (B2). Fig. 11-17 shows an example of deviation fluctuation in the normal state, with (A) to (D). Fig. 11-18 shows an explanatory diagram of Yu-Time in which the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state, with (E1) and (E2), and (F1) to (F4) showing the Yu-Time of this case in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state. Note that, for the convenience of explaining the characteristics of "Yu-Time", explanations will be given using explanatory images different from the performance images explained below in Fig. 11-16 to Fig. 11-18.

First, in the case of a pachinko game machine not equipped with the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 11-16 (A1) (A2), even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, which is about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in the low probability state (for example, normal state (low probability/low base state)) after the jackpot ends, it will not be controlled to "Yu-Time", that is, the time-saving state. Since the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability denominator at this point, the player continues playing without a jackpot for a long time and is making a lot of investment. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 11-16 (B1) (B2), after the end of a jackpot, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine will enter "Yu-Time" and be controlled to time-saving state B for a specific number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times, or up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability, so he or she has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and has invested a lot. However, by being controlled to "Yu-Time", that is, time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot occurring increases, so a decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues playing (is "addicted") without winning a jackpot during the period from the end of the jackpot until control enters "Yu-Time", and during that period various preview effects are executed, hyping the player up. In addition, when the variable display reaches 900 times, for example, when the variable display is executed the first number of times (e.g., 105 times) after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 11-17(A)), when the variable display is executed the second number of times (e.g., 213 times) (see FIG. 11-17(B)), when the variable display is executed the third number of times (e.g., 506 times) (see FIG. 11-17(C)), when the variable display is executed the fourth number of times (e.g., 882 times) (see FIG. 11-17(D)), at least an SP reach or other effect with a high probability of a jackpot (e.g., the "super hot" SP reach effect) will be executed a certain number of times, and since these SP reach effects continue to fail, it is highly likely that the player will feel quite depressed.

As shown in Figure 11-18 (E1) (E2), even if the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) is finally controlled after 900 variable displays, if this time-saving state B is in a state with low variable efficiency such as the normal state (low probability/low base state), the number of wasted shots will increase, leading to further additional investment and prolonged play. Also, since the SP reach effects are all missed during the 900 variable displays, which is quite depressing, the desire to play will decrease if provocative effects occur frequently in "Yu-Time".

As shown in Fig. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment is a time-saving state in which the variable efficiency is higher than the normal state (low probability/low base state), so that the player can continue playing while suppressing additional investment. In addition, the time-saving control executes the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, which is a maximum of about 3.8 times the probability of a jackpot), so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot during the period controlled in the time-saving state B is high (for example, about 97%), so that the player can play with peace of mind. For example, if the jackpot probability is 1/319.9, the probability of not winning a jackpot with one variable display is about 99% {(319.9-1)÷319.9=0.996874}, and the probability of not winning a jackpot within 1100 spins is about 3% (0.996874^1100=0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1,100 spins is approximately 97% (1-0.031937=0.968063).

In addition, in "Yu-Time", the variable display period of the selected variable pattern is short, so the variable efficiency is higher than in other time-saving states, and therefore there is a high possibility that the miss variable display will be efficiently consumed and a jackpot will be won in a short period of time, and a right-hit play will result in a jackpot in the second special game, so it is an advantageous state in which there is a high possibility that a jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C) will be awarded. In addition, since it is difficult to execute the preview performance and SP reach performance described below, and there are few opportunities to be aroused by miss performance, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in motivation to play. In other words, unlike the game state for waiting for the next jackpot while enjoying the performance, such as the probability change state and time-saving state A, the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment is a game state in which efficiently consuming the miss variation and winning the next jackpot is prioritized over enjoying the performance. Details of the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment will be explained below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state A is controlled via the big win A, the presentation mode is controlled to "Battle Rush". FIG. 11-19(A) is a diagram showing a presentation example in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state A) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 110, the second background image 069SG320 showing an evening cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode being "Battle Rush", and a presentation mode display 069SG221 consisting of the characters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 110) is displayed in correspondence with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, active display 069SG003 is displayed in active display area 069SG013 in response to the execution of the variable display of the second special pattern, and four second reserved displays 069SG002 are displayed in second reserved display area 069SG012 in response to the value of the second reserved memory count being 4. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the screen of image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory count (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory count (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓") corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, reserved display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time reduction remaining display 069SG201, right hit notification image 069SG400, etc. may be displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (upper layer) to prevent the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, small symbol, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer) to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small symbol is also called the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed (see the small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth symbol, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol, such as when a performance content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or when a performance is performed in which the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command, thereby performing a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Also, the performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command, thereby performing a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED069SG032 or the second special pattern LED069SG033, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) after the 110th variable display is completed while the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A, the first background image 069SG310 showing a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern, and the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "0 games") corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to the low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG221 in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX games remaining", XX = 0 to 100) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less, a countdown effect will be executed, as described below, and a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH", the text "XXX times left", and a triangular object, XXX = 1 to 300) will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

(Yu-1100 Battle Rush [Yu-Time])
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state B via the rescue time-saving is controlled, the presentation mode is controlled to "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" (also called "Yu-Time"). Figure 11-19 (B) is a diagram showing an example of presentation in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Yu-1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state B) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 1100, the third background image 069SG330 showing a nighttime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern in accordance with the presentation mode being "Yu-1100 Battle Rush," and a presentation mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 1100) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed at the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the display format (e.g., design, font, color, etc.) of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is the same for the special bonus state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, which allows costs to be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B ends, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern. At this time, the characters "PLAY/1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 1100), and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In this embodiment, even if 900 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B will not be controlled. Therefore, after 110 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state A or the probability state described below, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B, the variable display count display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the time-saving state B will be controlled if 900 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), during the period controlled in time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and the second hold display 069SG002 is displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period controlled in time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 may not be displayed. Note that during time-saving state A or the probability bonus state, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 may or may not be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A and then the 110th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, it is possible to display text such as "BATL RUSH END" before controlling the game state to a low probability/low base state. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B and then the 1100th variable display is completed, it is preferable not to display text such as "BATL RUSH END" as described above.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, after the 1100th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the shutter effect (see FIG. 11-23 (B)) that is performed when transitioning to time-saving state B may be performed before controlling the game state to the low probability/low base state.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A, a countdown notification may be issued to indicate that there are 10 time-saving turns remaining when the 101st variable display begins, but when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, no countdown notification may be issued even when the 1091st variable display begins. This prevents the player from being hyped up when time-saving state B (Yu-time) is about to end.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the probability of a special state is reached via the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the presentation mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush". FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing a presentation example in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-20(A), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 11 to 110, the fourth background image 069SG340 showing a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern in accordance with the presentation mode being "Extreme Battle Rush", and a presentation mode display 069SG223 consisting of the characters "Extreme Battle Rush" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 11 to 110) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the remaining variable display count controlled to the high probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(B), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 10, an emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 10) is displayed in an enlarged form compared to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time-saving count counter is 11 to 110, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to an enlarged form of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201, and the display color of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed, or an effect display may be added to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201. Also, a dedicated sound effect may be played from the speaker at the timing when the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is switched from the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 to the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, the remaining time-saving display may be displayed in a manner similar to that of the special probability state. In addition, in time-saving state B, the highlighted time-saving remaining display may not be displayed to avoid causing stress to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(C), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state, when the 110th variable display in which the display result is "miss" is being executed, a result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The result image 069SG500 includes the characters "Extreme Battle Rush Ended" notifying that Extreme Battle Rush has ended, the characters "BONUS x x times" indicating the number of jackpots (x is the number of jackpots), and the characters "XXXX pt" indicating the total number of game balls that have been awarded (XXXX is the total number of game balls that have been awarded).

The number of jackpots included in this result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive jackpots based on the variable display in a high probability state (the so-called consecutive jackpot count), and the total number of game balls awarded includes the number of prize balls awarded in the consecutive jackpots.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(D), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state after 110 variable displays have been completed, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "0 games") corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to a low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG223 in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the highlighted time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX games remaining", X = 0 to 10) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the game state is controlled to the normal state from the special state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B, a left-hit notification effect may be executed to instruct the player to hit to the left based on the end of the time-saving control. The left-hit notification effect displays a left-hit notification image and the words "Hit to the left" or an arrow image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the sound "Please hit to the left" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, after the 110th variable display has ended when controlled to time-saving state A as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 1100th variable display has ended when controlled to time-saving state B as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), or after the 110th variable display has ended when controlled to the high probability state as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), when control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count of the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed as a common "0 times", making it difficult to grasp the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (such as the type of previous jackpot, and whether it was controlled to time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or high probability state), and increasing the expectation of being controlled to time-saving state B.

When control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count displayed by the variable display count display 069SG202 may be set to display the variable display count executed in each state, such as "110 times" when control of time-saving state A ends, "1100 times" when control of time-saving state B ends, and "110 times" when control of the high probability state ends. By doing this, it is possible to roughly check the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (the type of jackpot last time, and whether it was controlled to time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or high probability state), which makes it easier to predict the variable display count until it is controlled to time-saving state B, which can lead to increased motivation to play.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, a common song (e.g., song A) may be played as a fixed background music, and in the probability bonus state, one of a number of songs including song A (e.g., songs A to X) may be selectable, and the selected song may be played.

In addition, when music A is played during the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. may be illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to the music A (such as a lighting pattern that matches the rhyme of the music).

In addition, when song A is played in the time-saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. may be made to emit light in a different lighting pattern (such as a lighting pattern that matches the background image) than when song A is played in the time-saving state A or the special probability state.
In addition, the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state A and the probability change state (patterns that match the rhyme of the music) are emphasized more than the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state B (patterns that match the background image), and the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state B are subdued. The emphasized light emission patterns include patterns with higher brightness than subdued light emission patterns, patterns with short switching intervals of light emission data, patterns with short blinking cycles, etc. In this way, since the player may be depressed in the time-saving state B as described in the above flow, the player's dissatisfaction can be suppressed by subduing the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. without overemphasizing them.

In addition, for example, a common background image may be displayed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, but the perspective (visibility) of the background image in time-saving state B may be made different from that in time-saving state A, so that even though the same background image is used, it is clear that the state is completely different (a different impression is given).

The size of the decorative pattern may also be different between time-saving state A and time-saving state B (for example, time-saving state A: normal, time-saving state B: large) so that it is clear (give the impression) that the states are completely different even though the background image is reused.

In addition, after the special chance entry effect/time-saving entry effect A is executed, a display to remind the player not to forget to take the prepaid card and a display of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable not to display the display to remind the player not to forget to take the prepaid card and the gaming machine manufacturer after the time-saving entry effect B is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by the above-mentioned displays when entering the time-saving state B without going through a jackpot.

(Variable display count display, special display count display)
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "Game XXX times" or the like) corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to the low probability/low base state, and a special count display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "Until Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "XXX times left", and a triangular object or the like) corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction is reached can be displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the effect in which the special count display is displayed is referred to as a countdown effect.

In this embodiment, whether the variable display count display or the special count display is displayed is determined according to the value of the rescue time reduction count counter. In addition, the display mode of the special count display can be changed according to the value of the rescue time reduction count counter. Figure 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation on the image display device 5 when the variable display count display or the special count display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(A), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 301 and 900, a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the words "Game XXX times", where XXX = 0 to 699, etc.) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. The number (XXX) in the variable display count display 069SG202 is incremented each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(B), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 31 and 300, a countdown effect is executed, and a white special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until PLAY-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the white text "XXX times remaining", and a white triangular object, XXX = 31 to 300) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX times remaining", and a red triangular object, XXX = 30) is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 11-21(D), it is shifted to the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 and displayed in a reduced manner. Then, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX times remaining", and a red triangular object, XXX = 1 to 30) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the special number of times display is not displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the special number of times display may be displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0. For example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 1, after the special number of times display in red is displayed, when the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 0 is executed, the special number of times display 069SG203 in gold (in this example, the characters "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" and the gold characters "0 times remaining", and a gold triangular object, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display count display 069SG202 is hidden during the period when the special count display 069SG203 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special count display 069SG203 may be displayed while the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed, and the variable display count display 069SG202 may be added and the special count display 069SG203 may be subtracted in accordance with the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to display the variable display count display 069SG202 in a manner that is less visible than the display manner of the special count display 069SG203 (for example, display the variable display count display 069SG202 in a less noticeable manner, such as by displaying it in a smaller size than the special count display 069SG203).

The trigger for starting the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 may be a fixed timing, such as when the variable display starts when the remaining number of variable display times before being controlled to the time-saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, 50 times remaining), or may be an irregular timing, such as when a lottery for starting the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is executed and won, when the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach miss ends, or when the remaining number of variable display times before being controlled to the time-saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, 50 times remaining) is suggested by the execution of a remaining number suggestion effect. In addition, when the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is started, the special number of times display 069SG203 may be highlighted by being displayed on a full screen, etc. In addition, instead of displaying the special number of times display 069SG203, a dedicated background effect that switches to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "Super hot when you reach it") may be executed.

In addition, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 301 to 900, the table may be switched to a variation pattern table in which the SP reach variation pattern is more difficult to determine than before the value of the rescue time reduction counter reached 301 to 900. By doing this, it is possible to allow the player to play with a variable display that reflects their intention to enter the rescue time reduction mode quickly.

In addition, during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the execution of various preview effects described below may be restricted (for example, not executed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). In addition, if the execution time of the preview effect overlaps with the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the special number of times display 069SG203 may be displayed in a manner that does not highlight, or if the execution time of the pre-reading preview effect described below overlaps with the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the special number of times display 069SG203 may be displayed when the variable display after the pre-reading preview effect ends is started, or if a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period) is a jackpot, the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 may be restricted (for example, not displayed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner).

(Example of the presentation when the rescue time reduction is reached)
As described above, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed (when the rescue time reduction is reached without a single jackpot after the RAM is cleared), a pattern determination A designation command is sent in which the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation, and (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot (when a jackpot is hit once and the rescue time reduction is reached without a single jackpot thereafter), a pattern determination B designation command is sent in which the pattern determination period is 20 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. In this embodiment, since the pattern determination period is different between the case (i) and the case (ii), the presentation mode is different for the period from when the rescue time reduction reaching variation in the low probability/low base state ends until the game is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time reduction state B) and rescue time reduction play begins (i.e., the pattern determination period).

Next, an example of the performance when (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed will be explained using Fig. 11-22 to Fig. 11-25. In this example, a case where (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" will be explained.

(Example of the performance in case (i))
Figure 11-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss," and Figure 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern determination A designation command, determines and stops the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "146") in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In other words, it determines and stops the decorative pattern combination that results in a "miss".

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and displays the hold display 069SG001 in the first hold display area 069SG011 based on the first hold memory count being 1. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image for the decorative pattern based on the normal game state.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved memory count is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved memory count is 0. It also confirms and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "146") in the small symbol display area. In other words, it confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that will result in a "miss."

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special pattern (the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes a shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, determines and stops the final small symbol combination (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. In other words, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" is determined and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. By doing this, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue playing left-handed and their interest will decrease, so by quickly displaying the right-handed play notification image 069SG400 in the bottom right of the screen and then fading in the right-handed play notification image 069SG401, the player can be led to play right-handed in an optimal manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-23 (D), when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) at the timing when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-22), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode becoming "Yu-1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays a time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Also, displays the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

Next, an example of the presentation when (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot is reached will be described using Figures 11-24(A) and 11-25. In this example, a case where (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot is described, in which the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss."

(Example of the performance in case (ii))
Fig. 11-24 shows (A) a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variable pattern is determined to be "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" when the rescue time-saving is reached after 900 variable displays after a big win, and (B) a time chart showing a modified example of the time-saving entry effect B. Fig. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image related to each of these effects.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-25 (A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration in the "non-reach (shortened non-reach or non-reach) miss" variation pattern when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process, as shown in Figures 11-23 (A) and (B), so a description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25(C), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(A)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination B designation command, stops and confirms the final small symbol combination (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. In other words, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display result is stopped and confirmed. Also, in response to the end of the variable display, a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. By doing this, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue playing left-handed and their interest will decrease, so by quickly displaying the right-handed play notification image 069SG400 in the bottom right of the screen and then fading in the right-handed play notification image 069SG401, the player can be led to play right-handed in an optimal manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and fades out the right-hit notification image 069SG401 while still displaying the right-hit notification image 069SG400. Thereafter, it executes the time-saving entry presentation B, and displays the entry image 069SG473 (described later in this example, an image including the words "Entering YU-1100 BATTLE RUSH") on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In time-saving entry performance B, the entry image 069SG473 containing the text "Entering Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed to notify the player that the game state will be controlled to time-saving state B (low probability/high base state).

The entry image 069SG473 is also composed of an entry image 069SG470 that is displayed when the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state are started, a Yu-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed in the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen, and a Yu-time image 069SG473B consisting of the character "Yu".

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25 (E), when the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T5 shown in Figure 11-24 (A)), the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), and the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode becoming "Yu-1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays a time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Also, displays the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

11-24(A) and 11-25 show an example in which the presentation mode becomes "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed at the timing when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B after the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. The presentation mode may become "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B after the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed. For example, the presentation mode may become "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at the timing when (A) a customer waiting demo display designation command is received after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, or at the timing when the first variable display is started after (B) the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B. Also, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the pattern determination period specified by the pattern determination A command) during the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B command (time T4 in this example), the time-saving entry effect B (Figure 11-25 (D)) is not executed, the effect mode becomes "Yu-1100 Battle Rush," and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed.

In addition, when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in FIG. 11-23(B) or FIG. 11-25(B), an image suggesting that control will be made to time-saving state B (for example, the character "Play") may be displayed. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the timing when control is made to time-saving state B and the timing other than the timing when control is made to time-saving state B (for example, the timing when the presentation mode is switched) when the shutter image 069SG250 is commonly displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, a different presentation mode is exemplified when (i) the rescue time-saving mode is reached after the RAM is cleared and (ii) the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common presentation mode may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii). In other words, the time-saving mode entry presentation B may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii), or the time-saving mode entry presentation B may not be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii). Also, a time-saving mode entry presentation B with a different mode may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii).

In the examples of Fig. 11-24(A) and Fig. 11-25, a form in which the time-saving entry effect B is executed during the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the time-saving entry effect B may be started after control is entered into the time-saving state B. Below, modified examples of the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time-saving state is reached are explained based on Fig. 11-24(B), Fig. 11-26, and Fig. 11-27.

Figure 11-24(B) is a modified time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached. Figure 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in FIG. 11-26(A) is the same as that shown in FIG. 11-25(A), so a description is omitted. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special pattern (the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-26 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern confirmation B designation command, stops confirming the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "234") that will result in a "miss" display result in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and also stops confirming the small pattern combination that will result in a "miss" display result in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (D), based on receipt of the right hit LED lighting notification command, the right hit LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while the right hit notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400, and the text "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, starting the right hit notification.

Next, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), control of the time-saving state B begins and variable display can begin, but if the number of reserved memories is 0, the display of the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in Figure 11-26 (D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26(E), when right-hit play is started in time-saving state B and the second start winning (or the first start winning) occurs, the first variable display is started (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), and the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation when the second variable display starts after the first variable display has ended (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry presentation B.

The time-saving entry performance B may be started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time-saving state B (for example, in the middle of the first variable display or at the start of the second or subsequent variable display). In addition, if the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms) such that an ultra-short variable pattern is determined as the variable display variable pattern, it may be executed continuously over multiple variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving entry performance B is displayed continuously regardless of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, if the variable display of a jackpot starts during the execution period of the time-saving entry performance B, the currently executed time-saving entry performance B may be interrupted or ended, and a performance corresponding to the variable pattern (for example, an SP reach performance) may be started, or a jackpot notification performance may be executed without going through a performance corresponding to the variable pattern.

Next, Figure 11-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-27(A) to (C) is the same as the presentation configuration shown in Figures 11-26(A) to (C), so we will omit the explanation.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-27 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern confirmation B designation command, stops confirming the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "234") that will result in a "miss" display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also stops confirming the small pattern combination that will result in a "miss" display in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), based on receipt of the right hit LED lighting notification command, the right hit LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while the right hit notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400, and the text "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, starting the right hit notification.

Here, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, control of the time-saving state B begins when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), and the first variable display begins, so that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), the performance control CPU 120 begins the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Also, the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(E), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation when the second variable display starts after the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry presentation B.

In this way, when the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation ends, the presentation control CPU 120 turns on the right-hit LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-hit LED lighting notification command, and starts the right-hit notification by displaying the right-hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the word "Right Hit" on the display screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, since the variable display does not start until the control of time-saving state B starts, even if the shutter presentation or time-saving entry presentation B, which indicates that the control of time-saving state B is starting, does not start, it is possible to prevent the player from starting disadvantageous left-hit play without knowing that the time-saving state B is being controlled.

In the above embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, and 20 seconds when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, a common pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. Even in this case, the right-hit notification and time-saving entry performance B are executed after the variable display starts after the control of time-saving state B has started, thereby preventing the player from starting the disadvantageous left-hit play without knowing that the time-saving state B has been controlled.

In the above embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, and the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated and the background image of the play-by-play 1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to receive the pattern determination A designation command normally, for example, if it misses the pattern determination A designation command sent from the CPU 103, or if the pattern determination A designation command is corrupted and the received command cannot be recognized as the pattern determination A designation command, the shutter effect may be terminated at the timing when (A) a customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to the time reduction state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern designation command, etc.) is received, and the shutter effect may be terminated and the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated and the background image of the play-by-play 1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Furthermore, when another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern determination designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after control to time-saving state B is received, the shutter effect may be ended, the display of shutter image 069SG250 may be ended, and the background image of the Yu-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the rescue time-saving period is reached after 900 variable displays following a jackpot, an example is shown in which the shutter effect ends when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 ends, and the time-saving entry effect is executed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive the pattern determination B designation command normally, for example, if it misses the pattern determination B designation command sent from the CPU 103, or if it cannot recognize the received command as the pattern determination B designation command due to command corruption of the pattern determination B designation command, then (A) at the timing when a customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed. Note that, at the timing when other commands corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern determination designation command, etc.) are received, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed.

In addition, in Fig. 11-22 to Fig. 11-25, when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, each of the effects that are executed when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" is explained. Although not specifically illustrated, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "SP reach A miss or SP reach B miss", an SP reach effect that corresponds to the SP reach type (for example, a bowling effect for SP reach A, and a battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and after an image of an ally character being defeated by an enemy character in a bowling effect or battle effect is displayed to notify that the variable display result is a miss, a shutter effect is started, and a time-saving entry effect B may be started during the pattern determination period after the shutter effect ends.

In addition, if the variable display (rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation) where the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 is a jackpot, the following (1) to (3) may be performed.

(1) When the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 0 has determined the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)," a shutter effect is performed when the variable display starts (for example, the same as in FIG. 11-23 (B)), and the shutter effect ends at the timing when it develops into the SP Reach effect B (see the timing in FIG. 13-11 (A2)), after which the SP Reach effect B is executed and a jackpot is announced.

(2) If the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value is 0 has determined the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)," a winning effect may be executed in which the special count display remains at "1" and no shutter effect is executed, resulting in the execution of the SP Reach effect B.

(3) A special variation pattern for a jackpot when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (for example, shutter closes → shutter opens with decorative patterns aligned → jackpot) may be provided.

It is also preferable to restrict the execution of the look-ahead effect described below when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 0 and a specific number of times remains, and to restrict the execution of the look-ahead effect in a variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 0.

(Example of customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo display designation command that designates a customer waiting state, a customer waiting demo performance is executed in which a demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. 11-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in the customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, the words "Demo Video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the words "Yu-Time Equipped" are displayed on a triangular object). Also, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, the demo image 069SG700 further includes a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, a special number of times display in white) in addition to the various images mentioned above (ally characters, the words "Demo Video", etc.).

This configuration makes it possible to notify players while they are waiting for customers that there are only a few variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached (in this example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less), thereby promoting operation.

(Variations of the waiting screen)
In the example of Figure 11-28 (A), a special number of times display 069SG203 is included in demo image 069SG700 when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 300, but this is not limited to the above embodiment. Regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction counter, the special number of times display 069SG203 may not be included in demo image 069SG700 in either case where the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 301 or more or 300 or less.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(B), when a customer waiting demo performance is executed, a demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, the words "Demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image of a triangular object with the words "Yu-time installed"), but does not include a special count display regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction count counter.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-28 (C), when a new start winning occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the customer waiting demo performance ends and the special number of times display 069SG203 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this configuration, by not informing the player of the number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached while in the waiting state, it is possible to prevent only gaming machines with a small number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached from being selected, and to suppress excessive bias in the operation of gaming machines.

In addition, regardless of whether the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on, the variable display count display and special count display may be hidden until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) after the power is turned on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is 301 or more or 300 or less, the variable display count display and special count display are hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing players from playing solely for the purpose of rescue time reduction. Also, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power outage is 301 or more or 300 or less, the variable display count display and special count display are hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing players from avoiding playing.

With this configuration, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on at the opening of the store, it is possible to prevent players who aim to shorten the rescue time from selecting and playing on a gaming machine with a small number of variable display counts remaining until the rescue time is reached by referring to the final number of variable display counts at the time of the power outage on the previous day. Also, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on at the opening of the store, it is possible to prevent players who aim to shorten the rescue time from avoiding playing on a gaming machine with a large number of variable display counts remaining until the rescue time is reached by referring to the final number of variable display counts at the time of the power outage on the previous day.

In addition, without being limited to the above form, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches a specific value, the variable display count display or special count display may be displayed even if the variable display has not been executed a predetermined number of times since the power was turned on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) that is less than a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50), the special number display may be displayed during the customer waiting state after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed. Also, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is not a specific value, but the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) due to the variable display executed after the power is turned on, the special number display may be displayed even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not a value corresponding to the predetermined number of times.

(Feature 069SG Modification 1)
Next, a description will be given of a modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG. Fig. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation related to a transition to a customer waiting screen as modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG. Fig. 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the performance operation related to a transition to a customer waiting screen as modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG.

First, an example of the performance operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (A1), for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols stopped in the normal state (low probability/low base state) without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demo performance by displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of a customer waiting demo display designation command (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). After that, when a starting winning occurs, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of the performance operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after the rescue time reduction is reached will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit LED 069SG031 based on receiving the right hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, displays the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in front of the decorative pattern, to start the right hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time reduction state B is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols in the rescue time reduction reaching variation stopped without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer waiting demo display designation command, will maintain the state in which the right hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed, without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo performance (see FIG. 11-29 (B3)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the shutter presentation at the timing when the first variable display starts based on the start of right-hand play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hand hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 when the second variable display starts (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), starting the time-saving entry performance B (see FIG. 11-29 (B5)).

Next, an example of the presentation operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-hit notification will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-29 (C1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more (for example, 1), the presentation control CPU 120, based on receiving a right-hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, turns on the right-hit LED 069SG031, and displays a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays a right-hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in the image in front of the shutter image 069SG250, thereby starting the right-hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, control of the time-saving state B is started, and the first reserved memory is consumed and the first variable display is started, so the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first reserved memory becomes 0, the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 will remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-29 (C3)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the pattern stopped during the first variable display after the control of the time-saving state B was started, without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer waiting demo display designation command, will maintain the state in which the right hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250, without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo performance (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation at the timing when the second variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and after hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, displays the entry image 069SG473 and starts the time-saving entry presentation B (see FIG. 11-29 (C5)).

In this way, in feature part 069SG variant 1, during the period from when the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation ends until the time-saving entry performance B ends, the performance control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and prioritizes the execution of the right-hit notification, so that the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-hit notification image 069SG400, do not disappear. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (A2), the demo image 069SG700 is displayed, which prevents the player from starting unfavorable left-hit play without knowing that the game is controlled to time-saving state B.

In addition, in this modified example, an embodiment is shown in which the execution of the customer waiting demo effect is restricted and the right hit notification is given priority during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation to the end of the time-saving entry effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may restrict the execution of the customer waiting demo effect by not sending a customer waiting demo display designation command during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation to the end of the time-saving entry effect B.

Next, we will explain another variation of the example of the presentation operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen when the rescue time reduction is reached.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit LED 069SG031 based on receiving the right hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, displays the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in front of the decorative pattern, to start the right hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time reduction state B begins (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display being started after the variable display of the symbols in the rescue time-saving reaching variation has stopped and been controlled to time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120, based on having received a customer waiting demo display designation command, displays demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute a customer waiting demo performance, and displays right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the shutter presentation at the timing when the first variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), when the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, when the player touches the touch ring of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the demo image 069SG700 is made invisible and the customer waiting demo performance is terminated, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" shown in FIG. 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and then the shutter performance is started when the first variable display is started.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 and starts the time-saving entry performance B when the second variable display begins (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, during the period from when the variable display of the rescue time-saving achievement fluctuation ends until the time-saving entry performance B ends, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed to enable the customer-waiting demo performance to be executed, but the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" may be displayed together with the demo image 069SG700 to execute the right-hit notification. In this way, the control for displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer-waiting demo performance is the same as in the normal state, reducing the processing burden, while the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from starting the disadvantageous left-hit game.

In addition, for example, the right hit notification image 069SG400 may be displayed in a state where it is more visible than the demo image 069SG700, for example by overlapping a right hit notification image 069SG401 that is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 in front of the demo image 069SG700.

(Feature 069SG Modification 2)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modified example 2 will be described. Fig. 11-31 is a flowchart showing a game control timer interrupt process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-34 is a flowchart showing a display process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 11-13 and 11-14, an example is given of a form in which the right hit lamp 069SG132 is turned on and off and a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command are sent to the performance control board 12 within the special pattern stop processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing of turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and the processing of sending the right hit LED on notification command and the right hit LED off notification command to the performance control board 12 may be executed outside the special pattern stop processing. Also, an example has been given in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by the normal special pattern processing, and the rescue time reduction determination flag is set to the on state when the rescue time reduction is reached, but the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be decremented by the special pattern stop processing, and the right hit lamp 069SG132 may be turned on and off and a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command may be sent to the performance control board 12 without using the rescue time reduction determination flag.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 as feature part 069SG variant 2, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a display process (step 069SGS24A) including a setting process for turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24) and a process for sending a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command to the performance control board 12, and also executes a display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 in accordance with the setting process performed in the display process after executing the normal pattern process process (step S26).

In feature 069SG variant 2, in order to execute the display process (step 069SGS24A) and display control process (step 069SGS26A) described above, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop process shown in Figures 11-32 and 11-33.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-32 and FIG. 11-33, the CPU 103 first executes the processing of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS135 in the same manner as the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-14 when the jackpot flag is set. Then, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS138 and 069SGS139 without starting the illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED illumination notification command, and then clears the memory of the state of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B (step 069SGS139a), executes the processing of step 069SGS140, and ends the special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS133, then identifies the state of time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B at that time, and updates and stores the state of time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B (step 069SGS160). It also determines whether or not the special probability flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the special probability flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the special probability flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), it further determines whether or not the value of the rescue time-saving counter is already 0 (step 069SGS162).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is already 0, that is, if the time reduction state is already B (step 069SGS162; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No), decrement the value of the rescue time reduction counter by 1 (step 069SGS163), and determine whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after decrementing the value by 1 has become 0 (step 069SGS164).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then executes the process of step 069SGS152 without turning off the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED off notification command, and then proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

In addition, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174, and then sets a specific number (e.g., 4) to a specific number reaching information output counter indicating the number of times that the specific number reaching information, indicating that the variable display number has reached 1100 times without the variable display result being a jackpot, is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like, without starting the illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED start notification command, and sets a specific number (e.g., 4) to a specific number reaching information output counter indicating the number of times that the specific number reaching information is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like, and sets a specific number reaching information output period timer indicating the output period for each specific number reaching information, and proceeds to step 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In addition, in the information output process at the time of the next interrupt (step S23), the CPU 103 outputs the specific count reaching information for the period set in the specific count reaching information output period timer the number of times set in the specific count reaching information output count counter.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 sets a transition flag for turning on/off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and sending a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command within the display process (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interrupt, and then executes the process of step 069SGS175 to end the special symbol stop process.

As shown in FIG. 11-34, in the display process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the transition flag is set, that is, whether the special symbol stop process that results in a miss in the variable display result was executed at the previous interrupt (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated. If the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182), and the stored states of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are compared with the current states of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B (step 069SGS183), and it is determined whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the on state (set state) (step 069SGS184).

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the on state, that is, if the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B has been newly controlled (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right-hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to light, and a right-hit LED lighting notification command is sent to the performance control board 12 to end the display process (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has not changed to the on state (step 069SGS184; No), it is further determined whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the off state (cleared state) (step 069SGS187). If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and if the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, if the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B has been newly controlled to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right-hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to be turned off, and a right-hit LED off notification command is sent to the performance control board 12, and the display process is terminated (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In addition, in the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on or off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting in step 069SGS185 or the lighting-off setting in the process of step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the text "Right Hit" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving a right hit LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103, and ends displaying the right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the text "Right Hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving a right hit LED turning off notification command from the CPU 103.

(Feature 069SG Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, a special number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is decreasing. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a rescue time reduction suggestion display that suggests that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is decreasing, which is different from the special number display, may also be executed.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-35 (A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration for the variable display count display and special count display (white mode) shown in Figures 11-21 (A) and (B), so a description will be omitted. Also, the presentation configuration other than the rescue time reduction suggestion presentation in Figures 11-35 (C) and (D) is the same as the presentation configuration for the special count display (red mode) shown in Figure 11-21 (C), so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-35(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 11 and 30 and the first stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is executed, the first suggestion image (in this example, the first suggestion image 069SG800A related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, which covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image is an image with a higher display priority than the background image (it has a higher display layer and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, the player sees a decrease in visibility of the background image in the portion where the first suggestion image is superimposed. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-35(D), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 10 and the second stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is executed, a second suggestion image (in this example, a second suggestion image 069SG800B related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, which covers the upper 1/2 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image has a higher display priority than the background image (it has a higher display layer and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, the player sees a decrease in visibility of the background image in the portion where the second suggestion image is superimposed. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In this embodiment, the background image including the suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) from the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. In this way, by varying the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the rescue time reduction counter regardless of whether the variable display of the special pattern is being executed or not, it is possible to suggest that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is getting low, and interest can be increased.

In this example, a suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached is superimposed on the background image as an image that changes the interface image, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and an image that is not related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached may be superimposed on the background image. For example, an effect image whose display area and display color differ according to the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be superimposed, and when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image may be a first area (e.g., 25% of the screen) and the display color may be blue, but when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image may be a second area (e.g., 50% of the screen) that is larger than the first area and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various performances)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 11-36 to 11-50. Fig. 11-36 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. Fig. 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. Fig. 11-38 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. Fig. 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the reserve change notice. Fig. 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pattern chance eye notice. Fig. 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display notice. Figs. 11-42 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. Figs. 11-43 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table. Fig. 11-44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. Fig. 11-45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. Fig. 11-46 (A) is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing a button notice performance pattern determination table. Fig. 11-47 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a character notice pattern determination table. Fig. 11-48 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body operation pattern determination table. Fig. 11-49 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body notice pattern determination table. Fig. 11-50 (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the characteristics according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-36, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute countdown notices, hold change notices, symbol chance notices, and effect display notices as pre-execution previews that predict the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a moving object preview, a character preview, a reach preview, and a button preview as preview presentations that indicate that a jackpot will be reached in the variable display.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a hit/miss button presentation and a movable body presentation as a deciding presentation that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in a variable display based on the super reach jackpot variation pattern (SP reach A to E).

In addition, after the variable display part ends, in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in the variable display based on the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern (SP Reach A to E) is executed, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a post-performance in the post-performance part that notifies the player of the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in a specific manner.

In addition, when control of one of the special states, the guaranteed bonus state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B, begins, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute an entry presentation that notifies the start of control of each game state by displaying a state start indication.

(Preview preview performance)
Next, the foreseeing notice performance will be explained. In this embodiment, in the start winning judgment process of step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the start winning, stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and executes a process of updating the reserved memory number. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information, and a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value is executed. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory number, a performance control command is sent to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the reserved memory number, and the foreseeing judgment.

In the look-ahead notice setting process of step S161 in the look-ahead process of FIG. 10, the presentation control CPU 120, based on the information received from the main board 11, determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead notice presentation that suggests that the reserved memory stored in a specified area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if so, the type of look-ahead notice presentation to be executed (for example, whether to select "countdown notice," "reserved change notice," "pattern chance notice," or "effect display notice," and the presentation pattern of each notice).

In this embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is determined on the condition that the number of reserved memories is "4", but it may also be determined when the number of reserved memories is other than "4". Also, although the type of look-ahead preview performance to be executed is determined to be one of countdown preview, reserved change preview, symbol chance preview, and effect display preview, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple previews may be executed simultaneously.

The "countdown preview" is a performance that executes a countdown such as "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" each time the variable display of a reserved memory that was not the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins, until the variable display of the reserved memory that was the subject of the look-ahead preview performance (hereinafter also referred to as the target reserved memory) begins.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern of the countdown announcement is determined from among the following patterns: ending the countdown at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0". The expectation level increases in the order of ending at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0" (expectation level: ending at "3" < ending at "2" < ending at "1" < ending at "0").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-37(A), when a start winning occurs, a countdown notice is executed and a pattern that ends at "0" is determined. After the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(B)), when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(C)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(E)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(F)).

Then, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(G)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-38(H)). Then, when the next variable display starts, that is, a variable display of a pending target (for example, a super reach fluctuation pattern), a character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and a countdown display 069SG414 showing "0" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not specifically shown, if the "3" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed in FIG. 11-37 (C), if the "2" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed in FIG. 11-37 (E), and if the "1" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed in FIG. 11-38 (G).

The countdown presentation pattern is arbitrary, and five or more presentation patterns may be set. The countdown may also be allowed to start from a number other than "3." The countup may also go up from "0" → "1" → "2" → "3."

The "Hold Change Notice" is a display that changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold that is the subject of the pre-reading notice display until it is announced whether or not the target hold will be a jackpot in the variable display of the hold memory (target hold).

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns of the hold change notice include a pattern in which the display color of the hold display finally becomes "blue", a pattern in which it becomes "green", a pattern in which it becomes "red", and a pattern in which it becomes "gold", and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed explanations are omitted in this embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the hold display (for example, at which timing the change occurs, such as at the time of the start winning, when the hold memory is consumed, or during the variable display period of the target hold, and if "red" is determined, whether to change to "red" from the beginning or to change gradually, such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be determined arbitrarily. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-39(A), when a hold change notice is executed and a "red" pattern is determined following the occurrence of a start winning, the hold display of the target hold that was the subject of the hold change notice is displayed in white, and then the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target hold changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39(B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target hold changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, a super reach fluctuation pattern), starts.

The number of presentation patterns for the pending change notice is arbitrary, and there may be five or more patterns. In addition, pending changes may not only involve a color change as described above, but may also involve changes to characters, items, etc.

"Pattern Chance Notice" is a display in which losing symbols are displayed as "even number symbol combinations" or "odd number symbol combinations" in the variable display of reserved memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading notice performance until the variable display of the reserved memories (target reserved) that became the subject of the pre-reading notice performance begins.

In this embodiment, the performance patterns of the symbol chance eye notice include a pattern in which the losing symbol is displayed as an "even symbol combination" (for example, "264") and a pattern in which the losing symbol is displayed as an "odd symbol combination" (for example, "135"), and based on the variable display result, it is decided whether the losing symbol is an "even symbol combination" or an "odd symbol combination". In addition, the symbol combination of the "even symbol combination" or the "odd symbol combination" may be decided from among a plurality of types. In addition, the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052 described later that constitutes the decorative symbol may be a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, or a "gold" pattern, and one of these patterns is decided. The expectation level is higher when the losing symbol is an "odd symbol combination" than when it is an "even symbol combination". Additionally, the colors of the pedestal display increase in order from "blue" to "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40(A), when a start winning occurs and the execution of the symbol chance eye prediction and the presentation pattern are determined, the variable display ends and the symbol chance eye prediction starts from the next variable display.

If the losing symbol is determined to be an "even number symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is determined to be a "blue" pattern, the losing symbol will be displayed as an even number symbol combination of "246" and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "blue" (see Figures 11-40 (B1) (B2)). On the other hand, if the losing symbol is determined to be an "odd number symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is determined to be a "red" pattern, the losing symbol will be displayed as an odd number symbol combination of "375" and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "red" (see Figures 11-40 (C1) (C2)).

In this embodiment, the decorative design is composed of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 that is displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. The base display section 069SG052 is formed in a roughly rectangular shape so as to surround the numbers "1" to "9" displayed on the number display section 069SG051, and is displayed in a specified display color (such as white), which is a display mode common to all numbers ("1" to "9").

The number of patterns for the symbol chance prediction is arbitrary, and the number of symbol combinations and the display colors of the base display unit 069SG052 may have five or more patterns. Character images and decorative images may be displayed on the base display unit 069SG052. For example, individual character images corresponding to each number ("1" to "9") may be displayed.

The "effect display preview" is a performance in which an effect image is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the variable display of a reserved memory that was not the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins until the variable display of the reserved memory (target reserved) that is the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins.

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns of the effect display preview include a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "gold" pattern for the effect image, and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the display color of the effect image changes (for example, if "red" is determined, the color may be changed to "red" from the beginning, or may be changed in stages such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be determined arbitrarily. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-41(A), when an effect display preview is executed and a "red" pattern is determined in response to the occurrence of a start winning, the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-41(B)), the next variable display starts (see FIG. 11-41(C)), and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, a "blue" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-41(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41(E)), and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, a "red" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-41(F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach variable pattern), begins, the effect image 069SG420 becomes hidden (see Figure 11-41 (G)).

The number of presentation patterns for the effect display preview is arbitrary, and there may be five or more presentation patterns. The size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied depending on the degree of expectation. The effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display or at other times.

Next, the pre-reading notice performance type determination tables A to D used by the performance control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in a specified area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state based on information received from the main board 11, and the type of pre-reading notice performance to be executed if execution is determined will be described. In FIG. 11-42, (A) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table B used in the probability change state, (C) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table C used in the time-saving state A, and (D) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table D used in the time-saving state B. In the following, random numbers from 0 to 99 are used as random numbers for determining the various performance types.

As shown in FIG. 11-42(A), in the notice performance type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 10 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 15 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42(B), in the notice performance type determination table B used when the game state is in the probability variable state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 5 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 15 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42(C), in the pre-notification performance type determination table C used when the game state is the time-saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 40 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change pre-notification", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye pre-notification", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display pre-notification". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change pre-notification", 10 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye pre-notification", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "effect display pre-notification".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), in the advance notice performance type determination table D used when the game state is time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye advancement". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when the variable display result is a "miss," the rate of "not executing" the pre-reading preview performance increases in the following order: normal state, special chance state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B. In other words, it is most likely to be executed in the special chance state, and not executed (least likely to be executed) in time-saving state B. In addition, the "countdown preview" is a preview that is not executed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, and the "hold change preview" and "effect display preview" are previews that are not executed in time-saving state B.

Here, the type of pre-reading preview performance is determined by comparing the three game states in which time-saving control is executed (high probability state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B).

First, the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is 80% in the special state, 60% in time-saving state A, and 30% in time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is 40% in the special state, 30% in time-saving state A, and 0% (not executed) in time-saving state B.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "two types" in time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "zero types (not executed)" in time-saving state B.

In this way, in time-saving state B, only if the variable display result is a "jackpot," the "symbol chance eye forecast" can be executed, and no other look-ahead forecast effects are executed, and if the variable display result is a "miss," no look-ahead forecast effects are executed. In other words, in time-saving state B, the execution rate of look-ahead forecast effects is lower than in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A, and the number of possible types of effects that can be determined is smaller.

In addition, in time-saving state B, a "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" can be executed as a look-ahead notice performance. This is because in time-saving state B, a change pattern with a short variable display time (such as an ultra-shortened non-reach) is likely to be determined, and when a look-ahead performance is executed in one variable display, the time is short, so it is easy to miss color changes in small reserved display areas such as "reserved change notices." In addition, while a "countdown notice" is executed in multiple variable displays, it is difficult to notice the change in count because the period for displaying the count in one variable display is short. In contrast, a "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is executed in multiple variable displays, and the change in display color of the decorative pattern and the base can be suitably shown when the decorative pattern is stopped, so it can be said to be a look-ahead notice performance suitable for execution in time-saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the example shows a form in which the pre-reading preview performance is not executed when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "miss" in the special probability state or the time-saving state A, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B. Also, if the number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is less than the number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" in the special probability state or the time-saving state A, two or more types of pre-reading preview performance may be executed in the time-saving state B.

Next, we will explain the effect pattern determination tables A to F that the effect control CPU 120 uses when determining the effect pattern of the pre-reading preview effect that has been decided to be executed. In Figure 11-43, (A) is effect pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is effect pattern determination table B used in the special probability state, (C) is effect pattern determination table C used in the time-saving state A, (D) is effect pattern determination table D used in the time-saving state B, (E) is effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is effect pattern determination table F used in the special probability state.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(A), in the presentation pattern determination table A, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is normal, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 50 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 10 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(B), in the presentation pattern determination table B, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is in the probability change state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 50 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 10 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(C), in the presentation pattern determination table C, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is the time-saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue," 20 judgment values are assigned to "green," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "red." On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue," 20 judgment values are assigned to "green," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red."

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (D), in the presentation pattern determination table D used to determine the presentation pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "red," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "gold." On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss," the "symbol chance eye notice" is not executed, and therefore no judgment values are assigned to any presentation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43(E), in the presentation pattern determination table E used to determine the presentation pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(F), in the presentation pattern determination table F used to determine the presentation pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the probability state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0".

In this way, the presentation patterns for the pending change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold"). Also, the presentation patterns for the countdown notice are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "end at 3," "end at 2," "end at 1," and "end at 0" (expectation level: "end at 3" < "end at 2" < "end at 1" < "0").

Here, the presentation patterns of various announcements are determined by comparing the three game states in which time-saving control is executed (high probability state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B).

In addition, the number of presentation patterns for various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "two types" in time-saving state B. The number of presentation patterns for various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "zero types (not executed)" in time-saving state B.

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," one of two types, "red" or "gold," can be determined as the presentation pattern for the "Pattern Chance Eye Notice." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," no presentation pattern for the "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is determined (not executed). In other words, in time-saving state B, there are fewer presentation patterns that can be determined than in the special state or time-saving state A.

(Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be described. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the preview performances "movable object preview", "character preview", "reach preview" and "button preview" can be executed at a predetermined time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute various preview performances in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 11-44, and if execution is determined, the performance pattern of the preview performance to be executed.

The "movable object preview" is a presentation that suggests that a jackpot will be controlled by vibrating the movable object 32 up and down when the variable display starts (see Figure 11-57 (A1) (B1)). The presentation patterns for the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small), and depending on the result of the variable display, it is decided whether to execute the "vibration (small) pattern" or the "vibration (large) pattern".

The movable body 32 can move vertically between an origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and a performance position approximately in the center of the display screen, and can fall from the origin position to the performance position under its own weight. The vibration in the movable body preview is a performance in which the movable body 32 vibrates vertically between the origin position and a specified position between the origin position and the performance position. Furthermore, the performance patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "character preview," a specific character appears during the period from when the variable display begins until the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and the character's lines are displayed while the audio of the displayed lines is output from speakers 8L, 8R to incite the player as to whether or not the reach state will occur (see Figure 11-57 (A2) (B2)). The reach preview presentation patterns include a "line A pattern" in which the character's lines are "Reach?" and a "line B pattern" in which the character's lines are "Maybe it's reach!!", and depending on the result of the variable display, either non-execution, "line A pattern," or "line B pattern" is determined. The content of the lines is arbitrary and may be lines other than those mentioned above.

The character's dialogue patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Also, the type of character does not change, but it may be possible to select one of multiple types of characters depending on the variable display result.

The "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of decorative patterns has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur (see Figures 11-57 (A3 to A5), (B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins just before the stop display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A4), (B4)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display begins, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has elapsed, if the reach state does not occur, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L passes the stop display position and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-57 (A5), (B5)), and if the reach state occurs, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position.

The reach mode is a mode (also called a reach performance) in which, from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed stationary, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

When the fluctuation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines by lottery whether to execute the reach notice in the reach notice execution decision process of step 069SGS278 described below, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result, and sets the performance control pattern (process table) according to the decision. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the reach mode does not appear after the reach notice is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is SP reach, the reach mode appears after the reach notice is executed, and the SP reach performance is executed.

The "button notice" is an effect that is executed when the reach notice is executed, from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R that has the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, until the specified effective operation period has elapsed (see Fig. 11-57 (A4) (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the specified effective operation period has elapsed, and it starts with the display of the operation promotion display and a button image that resembles the push button 31B, and ends when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, with the operation promotion display and button image going invisible.

The presentation patterns (operation promotion modes) of the button preview include a "long press pattern" that encourages the user to press and hold the push button 31B for a specified operation period, a "repeated press pattern" that encourages the user to repeatedly press the push button 31B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that encourages the user to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the variable display result, the non-execution, "long press pattern," "repeated press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation prompt will say "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "Continuous tap!" for the "rapid tap pattern," and "One hit!" for the "single hit pattern."

(Decisive performance)
Next, the deciding performance will be explained. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the deciding performance is a performance that is executed before informing whether or not the jackpot is controlled at the end of the SP reach performance in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern (see Fig. 11-58 (C4 to C8), Fig. 11-59 (A10 to D3), (B7 to D3)), and there are a "win/lose button performance" that is executed during a predetermined operation effective period, and a "movable body performance" that is executed after the "win/lose button performance".

The "win/lose button effect" is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B until a specified valid operation period has elapsed. It begins with the display of an operation promotion display consisting of the text "RELEASE!!" or "PRESS!!" and a button image that resembles the push button 31B, and ends when operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, with the operation promotion display and button image going invisible (see Figure 11-58 (C4), Figure 11-59 (A8-A10), (B7)).

The presentation patterns include a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red. In the "movable body operation pattern determination process" described below, if "Pattern A-1", "Pattern A-2", "Pattern B-1", or "Pattern B-2" is determined, the "white pattern" is determined, and if "Pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. It is also possible to determine either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" depending on the variable display result, regardless of the "movable body operation pattern determination process". Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body effect" is an effect that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, it is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the effective operation period in the "win/lose button effect", or when the effective operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, and if the movable body 32 drops from the origin position to the effect position, it notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if the movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position to the effect position, it notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, that is, it notifies that it has been a miss (see Figure 11-58 (C6) and Figure 11-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 built into the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated and an effect image emphasizing the movable body 32 are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. When the movable body 32 does not fall, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 do not light up, and the image of an enemy character being defeated and the effect image are not displayed.

In this way, in the "decisive effect," if the variable display result is a jackpot, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the jackpot, and if the variable display result is a miss, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the miss effect is not executed, but instead the movable body effect is executed.

(Post-show performance)
Next, the post-effect performance will be described. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the post-effect performance is a performance in which the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state is specified in the post-effect performance part after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative pattern in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variable pattern is executed is notified that the jackpot game state will be controlled (see Fig. 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern to the announcement of the variable display result, and the post-performance part is the period from the end of the variable display part in the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern to the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-performance part period. The post-performance may be executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the pattern determination period after the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern.

In the post-show performance, the ally character and enemy character that appeared in the SP reach performance are displayed, along with a planned ball number counter display showing the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, and the planned ball number counter display increases each time the ally character attacks the enemy character. Next, during a specified operation valid period, an operation prompt display consisting of the characters "Push!" and a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the ally character defeats the enemy character, a specified number (e.g., 1000 or 1500) is displayed on the planned ball number counter display, and the planned number of balls to be awarded during the jackpot is announced. Then, after the post-show performance ends, the jackpot game state begins.

(Rush-in performance)
Next, the entry performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the entry performance includes a "entry introduction performance" executed before the start of the "probability variable entry performance" and the "time-saving entry performance A", a "probability variable entry performance" executed when the control of the probability variable state starts after the end of the big win game state, a "time-saving entry performance A" executed when the control of the time-saving state A starts after the end of the big win game state, and a "time-saving entry performance B" executed when the control of the time-saving state B starts because 900 variable displays have been executed without being controlled to the big win game state in the low probability state. In addition, the timing at which the rescue time-saving reaching variation (the variable display when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0) at which the "time-saving entry performance B" is executed is started, that is, a "shutter performance" (see FIG. 11-23 (B) (C), FIG. 11-25 (B) (C)) is executed before the execution of the "time-saving entry performance B".

Specifically, the "high probability of winning" and "time-saving entry effect A" are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, and the "time-saving entry effect B" is executed during the pattern determination period (e.g., 20 seconds) after the 900th variable display (rescue time-saving arrival fluctuation) at which the start condition for control of time-saving state B is met has ended.

The "Time-saving entry effect A" is an effect that notifies the player that control of the time-saving state A will begin by displaying the words "Entering BATTLE RUSH!!" after the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is executed (see Fig. 11-63 (D)).

The "high probability entry effect" is an effect that notifies players that control of the high probability state will begin by displaying the characters "Extreme" in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" after the entry introductory effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) (see Fig. 11-63 (D) and Fig. 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

The "Time-saving entry effect B" is an effect that indicates that the control of time-saving state B will begin by displaying the words "Entering BATTLE RUSH!!" plus "Play 1100" without displaying the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) (see Fig. 11-63 (D) and Fig. 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

In addition, for the special bonus entry effect/time-saving entry effect B, the words "Enter BATTLE RUSH!!" may be displayed after the words "Extreme" or "Play/1100" are displayed.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-44 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable start command reception flag is on or not (step 069SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271; Yes), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 069SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is not on (off) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes), the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer is shifted up by one buffer number (step 069SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After execution of step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern designation command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in response to reception of the variation pattern designation command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is erased when the variable display ends. The variation pattern designation command may be erased in response to reading.

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Note that in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the display result designation command received in response to reception of the display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, and is erased when the variable display ends. Note that the display result designation command may be erased upon reading.

In this feature section 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, from among a plurality of combinations of even number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888") as the stopping symbols. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot B, the stopping symbols are determined from a plurality of combinations of odd number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined to be a combination of decorative symbols with three symbols aligned in "7" (jackpot symbol). Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a miss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are not aligned is determined as the stopping pattern.

In addition, in the pre-reading prediction setting process of step S161 in the performance control process processing of FIG. 10, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the aforementioned pattern chance prediction, it decides whether the stopped patterns of the variable display until the variable display of the target hold starts will be a combination of even patterns or a combination of odd patterns.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a rescue time reduction count A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached is stored in the command storage area, that is, whether or not the fluctuation is a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A). If it is a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), a shutter performance setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter performance setting process, a period until the performance start is set in the shutter performance start waiting timer, and the corresponding shutter performance starts when the performance start waiting timer times out.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS283. If the fluctuation pattern is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), a reach notice execution decision process is executed (step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution decision process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for deciding whether to execute the reach notice is extracted, and a reach notice execution decision table shown in Figure 11-46 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the reach notice.

In the reach notice execution decision table, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), different judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and "execution" for the game state when it is "normal state", "high probability state", "time-saving state A", and "time-saving state B", respectively, so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in FIG. 11-46(A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is in the "normal state", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "high probability state", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "time-saving state A", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 40 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "time-saving state B", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the reach notice is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a reach notice can be executed with a probability of 20% in time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice may not be executed in time-saving state B.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not a reach notice has been decided to be executed in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A). If it is determined that a reach notice has not been decided to be executed (step 069SGS279A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS280. If it is determined that a reach notice has been decided to be executed (step 069SGS279A; Yes), a presentation control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice is selected (step 069SGS279B), and then a button notice pattern decision process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button preview pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the button preview pattern is extracted, and the button preview pattern is determined using button preview pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

In the button preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E), for each pattern of "non-execution", "one hit", "repeated hit", and "long press", different judgment values are assigned for the variable display results of "jackpot", "missed reach", and "not missed reach", so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), in the button preview pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is a "missed reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is a "non-missed reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C), in the button preview pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Also, when the variable display result is a "missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Also, when the variable display result is a "non-missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46(D), in the button preview pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "missed reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 5 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "not missed reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 5 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "long press".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), in the button preview pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B," when the variable display result is "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "no execution," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "one hit." When the variable display result is "missed reach," 95 judgment values are assigned to "no execution," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit." When the number of reserved memories is "0," and the variable display result is "miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "no execution."

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the button preview is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0", a non-reach or SP reach variation pattern is determined, but the execution rate of the reach prediction is low, and even if the reach prediction is executed, the button prediction is not executed.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which, when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B, a reach notice is executed but a button notice is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notice may be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the button notice when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the example shown, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" in the time-saving state B and the variable display result is "miss," the button prediction is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach prediction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button prediction may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot or a missed reach, a "one-hit" pattern that prompts the player to perform a single operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and "repeated taps" or "long press" operations that prompt the player to perform an operation for a specified effective operation period, that is, "repeated taps" or "long press" operations that are more cumbersome to operate than "one-hit" operations that prompt the player to perform a single operation, are not promoted.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS279A that the execution of a reach prediction has not been decided (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button prediction pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the performance control CPU 120 executes a character prediction pattern determination process (step 069SGS280). In the character prediction pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the character prediction pattern is extracted, and the character prediction pattern is determined using character prediction pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (A) to (D).

In the character preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D), for each pattern of "No execution", "Line A (Reach?)", and "Line B (Maybe it's a reach!!)", different judgment values are assigned when the variable display result is "jackpot" and when it is "miss", so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-47(A), in the character preview pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47(B), in the character preview pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A," and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47(C), in the character preview pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B".Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), in the character preview pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Time-saving state B", when the variable display result is "Big hit", 90 judgment values are assigned to "No execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Line B". When the variable display result is "Miss", 95 judgment values are assigned to "No execution", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Line A". When the reserved memory count is "0", and the variable display result is "Miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "No execution".

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the character preview is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss," a non-reach or SP reach variable pattern is determined, but the character preview is not executed in the variable display of either variable pattern.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a character preview is not executed when the variable display result is a "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a character preview at a rate lower than the execution rate of the character preview when the variable display result is a "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the example shown, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" in the time-saving state B and the variable display result is "miss," the character announcement is executed at a rate of 5%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character announcement may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, after executing the character preview pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A). If the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), proceed to step 069SGS282. If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), execute the movable body operation pattern determination process (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern is extracted, and the movable body motion pattern is determined using movable body motion pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

In the movable body operation pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D), there is a "Pattern A-1" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance (decisive performance), a "Pattern A-2" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is a vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance, a "Pattern A-3" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is a vibration (large) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance, and a "Pattern A-4" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is moved in the movable body performance of the decisive performance. For each of the patterns, "Pattern B-1" for a miss in which the body 32 does not fall, "Pattern B-2" for a miss in which the moving body announcement is a vibration (small) and the moving body performance does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, and "Pattern B-3" for a miss in which the moving body announcement is a vibration (large) and the moving body performance does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, different judgment values are assigned for when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and when it is a "miss" so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48(A), in the movable body operation pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(B), in the movable body operation pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(C), in the movable body operation pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time-saving state A," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(D), in the movable body operation pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1."

As such, when comparing the movable body operation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot in the three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern A-2" and "Pattern A-3," in which both the movable body announcement and the movable body performance are executed, is higher in the special probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1," in which the movable body announcement is not executed and only the movable body performance is executed, is higher in time-saving state B than in the special probability state and time-saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body operation patterns when the variable display result is a miss in three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3," in which only the movable body prediction is executed, is higher in the special probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B (not executed).

In other words, in the case of time-saving state B, the execution rate of the moving object announcement is lower than in the special chance state and time-saving state A (execution rate of the moving object announcement: special chance state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable object preview is not executed and only the movable object performance is executed is 90%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be 90% or less as long as it is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability change state or the time-saving state A. Also, the execution rate when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B may be 100%.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS281A that the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable object prediction pattern determination process (step 069SGS282). In the movable object prediction pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable object prediction pattern is extracted, and the movable object prediction pattern is determined using movable object prediction pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A) to (D).

In the movable object prediction pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D), for each pattern of "non-execution", "small vibration", and "large vibration", different judgment values are assigned when the variable display result is "jackpot" and when it is "miss", so that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D) is reached.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49(A), in the movable object prediction pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49(B), in the movable object prediction pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49(C), in the movable body prediction pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable body prediction pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", only the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined, so no judgment value is assigned to "non-execution", "small vibration", or "large vibration". Also, when the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss", if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the moving object prediction is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, the moving object announcement will not be executed, even when the number of reserved memories is "0".

In this embodiment, a form in which a movable object prediction is not executed when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a movable object prediction at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable object prediction when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, when the reserved memory number is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the movable object prediction is not executed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved memory number is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the movable object prediction may be executed.

When the execution of any of the performance patterns is determined in the above-mentioned button preview pattern determination process, character preview pattern determination process, or movable object preview pattern determination process, a period until the preview start is set in the various preview start waiting timers, and the corresponding preview starts when the various preview start waiting timers time out.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if the fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach in step 069SGS277, if the movable body operation pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS281B, or if the movable body preview pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS282, then in step 069SGS283 the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 069SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 069SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the processing ends.

(Variable display performance processing)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flow chart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process processing. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). In addition, when various performance start waiting timers are set (it is decided to perform a notice performance, etc.) or the notice performance execution flag is in an on state (a notice performance is being executed) (step 069SGS304; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes various performance processing (step 069SGS305). When both the performance start waiting timer and the notice performance execution flag are off, the performance processing of step 069SGS305 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 069SGS306.

In step 069SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 069SGS308). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the change of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

If the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it determines whether the confirmation command reception flag, which indicates that a pattern confirmation command has been received, is on (step 069SGS314). If the confirmation command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS314; No), the process ends.

If the variable display time timer has timed out in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the confirmation command reception flag is on in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), it is determined whether the right hit LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315). If the right hit LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right hit LED 069SG031 starts to light up, and right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start a right hit notification (step 069SGS316), and the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

Also, if the right-hit LED lighting start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317). If the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317; Yes), the right-hit LED 069SG031 is turned off, and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the like are not displayed to end the right-hit notification (step 069SGS318), and the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. Also, if the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is not on (step 069 SGS317; No), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069 SGS319), and the process ends.

Although not shown in detail, after the processing from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318 is executed, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) after the pattern determination period specified by the pattern determination command based on the determination command reception flag has elapsed.

In addition, even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern determination command is received, the control will switch to one that stops the variation. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern specification command indicating a long variation time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 069SGS306, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

(Examples of various actions depending on game state)
Next, various operation examples for the three game states of time-saving state B, probability-changing state, and time-saving state A will be described based on Fig. 11-50. Fig. 11-50 shows (A) an example of a variable operation for each game state, (B) an example of a presentation operation for each game state, and (C) a diagram for explaining the characteristics of time-saving state B.

First, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), we compare the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three game states of "Time-saving state B", "Probable bonus state", and "Time-saving state A".

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, the number is "2", namely "super-shortened non-reach" and "SP reach D". In the "certain variable state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number is a maximum of "4", namely "shortened non-reach A", "non-reach A", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number is a maximum of "3", namely "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., two) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., three), and is also less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., four).

The number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and high probability state, or the above number can be changed in various ways as long as the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}. Here, assuming that when time-saving state B begins, the first variable display has a pending memory number of 0, and that the 2nd to 1100th variable displays have a pending memory number of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 x 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A) and (B), in the "probable bonus state", when the reserved memory number is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is about 8.2 seconds {((7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and when the reserved memory number is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is about 4.8 seconds {((3s x 85) + (7s x 10) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}. Here, assuming that the reserved memory number is 0 for the first variable display when the probable bonus state starts and the reserved memory number is 1 to 3 for the 2nd to 110th variable displays, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined in the probable bonus state is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Fig. 11-7 (A) and (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is about 9.15 seconds {((7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is about 5.55 seconds {((3s x 90) + (7s x 5) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}. Here, assuming that the number of reserved memories is 0 for the first variable display when the time-saving state A starts and the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 for the 2nd to 110th variable displays, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined in the time-saving state A is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-saving state A," and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable bonus state."

In addition, the average time (e.g., about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 9.15 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state A," and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 8.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable change state."

In addition, the average time (e.g., about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern that can be determined in the "time-saving state B" when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.55 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern determined in the "probable bonus state."

According to items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state has fewer types of fluctuation patterns and a shorter average time for the variable display, and therefore the consumption speed of the variable display is faster than in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

The average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A, or the above time can be changed in various ways as long as time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is "1" of "SP reach D", and in the "certain variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is a maximum of "3" of "not via SP", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D", and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is a maximum of "2" of "not via SP" and "SP reach E".

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2), and is also less than the number of miss fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 3).

The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and high probability state, or the above numbers can be changed in various ways as long as the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the "high probability state," the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 80) + (40 s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

In "time-saving state A," as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., about 40 seconds) is shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., about 62.8 seconds), and is also shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., about 51.1 seconds).

According to items (A3) and (A4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to a jackpot game state has fewer types of fluctuation patterns and a shorter average time for the variable display, and therefore the consumption speed of the variable display is faster than in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

The average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A, or the above time can be changed in various ways as long as time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the ratio is 95% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, while in the "probable bonus state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), the ratio is 80% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), the ratio is 70% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3.

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 97%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "time-saving state B" is higher than the percentage (e.g., 95%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "time-saving state A," and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 95%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "probable win state."

According to item (A5), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to a jackpot game state, the state of the variable display is set to a reach state, which makes it less likely that the player will be unnecessarily provoked, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the percentage at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" is 97% for time-saving state B, and 95% for both the high probability state and time-saving state A, with the percentage decreasing in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage may decrease in the order of time-saving state B (e.g., 97%), high probability state (e.g., 95%), and time-saving state A (e.g., 94%), or the percentage can be changed in various ways as long as the percentage in the case of time-saving state B is higher than at least one of the time-saving state A and the high probability state.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" is 97%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" may be 100%, in other words, the reach fluctuation pattern may not be determined when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B".

In addition, the miss variation pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" when the variable display result is "miss" is the same as the miss variation pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state A" and the "probable win state", thereby reducing development costs and program capacity.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the miss variation pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" is the same as the miss variation pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D") that can be determined in the "probable win state", thereby reducing development costs and program capacity.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three game states of "Time-saving state B", "Probable bonus state", and "Time-saving state A" are compared.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" as jackpot suggestive effects in the variable display of the miss fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, in "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 0% (not executed), and as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 0% (not executed); in "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 40%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 30%; and in "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 30%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 20%.

In other words, when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state A," and when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable bonus state," suggestive effects such as "moving object preview" and "character preview" are executed in the variable display, whereas when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state B," suggestive effects such as "moving object preview" and "character preview" are not executed in the variable display.

According to item (B1), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display of a variable pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than the shortened non-reach), there is no unnecessary excitement due to the movable object preview or character preview, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

To explain in detail, when the control of the probability variable state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B starts, it is possible that the first reserved memory may have reserved memory stored therein, since the left-handed play was performed in the normal state up until that point, but there is no reserved memory stored in the second reserved memory. In other words, when the probability variable state or time-saving state A starts with the first hit, or when the control of time-saving state B starts with the execution of 900 variable displays, in order to buy time to store reserved memory in the second reserved memory, the probability of deciding a miss variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is high, which is a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variable time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). And when a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach is decided, a suggestive performance such as a "moving object announcement" or a "character announcement" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of time-saving state B begins, it is highly likely that various miss predictions have been executed over the long period of play up to now, and therefore if a "moving object prediction" or "character prediction" is also executed in time-saving state B, the player will feel annoyed. Therefore, when a variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" are not executed.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in "time-saving state B", a form has been exemplified in which suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" are not executed in the variable display. However, for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in "time-saving state B", it is preferable that the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" in the variable display is lower than the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" in the "probable change state" and "time-saving state A".

In addition, when a variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" are executed can be changed in various ways, so long as the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" in time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" in at least one of time-saving state A and the special state.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, if the fluctuation pattern is a miss, the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" may not be executed, and if the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot, the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" may be executed. By doing this, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects such as the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" are executed in the time-saving state B.

In addition, the suggestive effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state may include a "reach notice" or a "button notice" as a teasing effect that teases whether or not the variable display state will be a reach state (whether or not a reach will be achieved). By doing this, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not the "reach notice" or "button notice" will be executed in the time-saving state B.

In addition, based on the variable display results, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects, including a first suggestive effect (e.g., line A or small vibration) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., line B or large vibration) that has a higher probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, thereby drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect will be executed in time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

<Item B2>
Regarding the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss, in the "time-saving state B", none are determined, so the number is "0", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D); in the "certain bonus state", the number is "4", namely, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B); and in the "time-saving state A", the number is "3", namely, "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C).

In other words, the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0) is less than the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 3), and is also less than the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable win state" (e.g., 4).

In this embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as long as the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" is less than the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state", one or more types of pre-reading predictions may be executed.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" can be changed in various ways, as long as it is less than the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state."

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of the "pre-reading notice" when the variable display result is a miss, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D), none of them are executed, so it is "0%". In the "high probability state", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B), the total execution rate of the "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "chance pattern notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%". In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C), the total execution rate of the "hold change notice", "chance pattern notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

In other words, the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 30%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable win state" (e.g., 40%).

According to items (B2) and (B3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to a jackpot game state, the number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined is small, which can reduce development costs, and there is little risk of being unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performances, making it possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is 0%, in other words, a form in which the pre-reading prediction is not executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state", the pre-reading prediction may be executed.

In addition, if the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state," the above rate can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, as the pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, there are a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed. The percentage of the first pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state B (e.g., 0%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is lower than the percentage of the first pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state A and the special probability state (e.g., 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C)). Therefore, the first pre-reading notice performance is less likely to unnecessarily provoke the player in the time-saving state B, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

Furthermore, as the pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, there are a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed. The percentage of the second pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state B (e.g., 90%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is higher than the percentage of the second pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state A and the special probability state (e.g., 50-70%, see FIG. 11-43(C)). Therefore, the second pre-reading notice performance is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state B, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the special probability state are common to the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B (for example, "pattern chance eye preview"), and by not setting look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in at least one of the time-saving state A and the special state (for example, "pattern chance eye forecast"). By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state (for example, "pattern chance eye forecast"). By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution rate of the "button notice" as an action-promoting effect to encourage the player to take action, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Fig. 11-46(E), it is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss, while in the "probable chance state", as shown in Fig. 11-46(C), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "30%" in the case of a miss, while in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Fig. 11-46(D), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" in the case of a miss. Note that these execution rates are the rates when the "reach notice" is executed.

In other words, the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

According to item (B4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the number of times that the button preview, which is an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B in one variable display, is executed is small, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the button preview per variable display in "time-saving state B" is exemplified as being lower than the execution rate of the button preview per variable display in "time-saving state A" or "high probability state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be possible to not execute the button preview in "time-saving state B" (execution rate 0%).

In addition, the execution rate of the button announcement per variable display in "Time-saving state B" can be changed in various ways, so long as it is lower than the execution rate of the button announcement per variable display in "Time-saving state A" or "Probable bonus state."

<Item B5>
In the button preview, with regard to the execution rate of the "single hit pattern" as the first action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform a single action, and the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" as the second action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a specified period of time, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-46 (E), the execution rate of the "single hit pattern" is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss, and for the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "0% (not executed)" in the case of a jackpot or a miss.

In the "high probability state," as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), the execution rate of the "one-hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "10%" on average in the case of a miss, while in the case of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern," it is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" on average in the case of a miss.

In "time-saving state A," as shown in FIG. 11-46 (D), the execution rate of the "one-hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "7.5%" on average in the case of a miss, while in the case of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern," it is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "17.5%" on average in the case of a miss.

In other words, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the execution of either the "one hit pattern" or the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "high probability state" and "time-saving state A", and can determine the "one hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern".

In addition, the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% for a jackpot or miss) is lower than the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in the "high probability state" (e.g., 40% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 40% for a jackpot, 17.5% for a miss).

According to item (B5), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued in which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the player is less prompted to perform cumbersome operations such as "continuous tapping patterns, long press patterns" that require the player to continue operating the push button 31B throughout the effective operation period, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of determining a "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" but is not capable of determining the execution of a "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern". However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the determination rate of the "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the determination rate of the "one-hit pattern" in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state", the "one-hit pattern" may be executable.

In addition, in time-saving state B, the percentage (e.g., 10%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button announcement" when the variable display result is a jackpot is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button announcement" when the variable display result is a miss, thereby drawing attention to the fact that a "button announcement" is being executed in time-saving state B and increasing interest.

In addition, the "button preview" presentation patterns include a "hit" pattern and a "repeated tap" or "long press" pattern that has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "hit" pattern is executed. The probability that the "hit" pattern is executed in time-saving state B (e.g., 10%) is lower than the probability that the "repeated tap" or "long press" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in a highly variable state (e.g., 40%), but the probability that the "hit" pattern is executed in time-saving state B may be higher than the probability that the "repeated tap" or "long press" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in a highly variable state. By doing this, when an action promotion presentation is executed in time-saving state B, the "hit" pattern is often executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, the period during which the "button notice" is executed in time-saving state A and the special chance state is the same as the period during which the "button notice" is executed in time-saving state B (for example, the period during which the "reach notice" is executed), and by making the execution period of the "button notice" common between time-saving state A, the special chance state, and time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect (for example, not specifically shown, an effect in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect display is displayed before the effective operation period begins) before executing the "button notice", it is preferable that the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state is the same as the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state B. This can reduce development costs and can provide an appropriate notification that the "button notice" will be executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "moving object preview," which is a suggestive effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, in the "time-saving state B," as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), it is 0% (not executed) in the case of a jackpot or a miss, while in the "high probability state," as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 40% in the case of a miss, while in the "time-saving state A," as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 40% miss).

According to item (B6), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the movable object preview, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, is executed is reduced, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game has not been controlled to a jackpot game state, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this.) If the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state", the "movable object prediction" may be made executable in the "time-saving state B".

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 0%) at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (e.g., 90%) at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state A or in the special probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but the percentage at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state A or in the special probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this way, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention paid to the "movable object announcement" between time-saving state A, the special probability state, and time-saving state B.

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 0%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (e.g., 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in the high probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but the percentage at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage (e.g., 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in the high probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this way, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention paid to the "moving object announcement" between time-saving state A, the high probability state, and time-saving state B.

<Item B7>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "character announcement" as a teasing effect to incite as to whether or not the variable display mode is to be a reach mode, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), it is 10% in the case of a jackpot and 5% in the case of a miss, while in the "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), it is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss, and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), it is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 20% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), the execution rate per variable display of the "reach notice," which is a teasing effect to inspire whether the variable display mode will be a reach mode, is 20% in "time-saving state B," 50% in "probable win state," and 40% in "time-saving state A."

In other words, the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Time-saving State B" (e.g., 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Time-saving State A" (e.g., 40%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Probable Change State" (e.g., 50%).

According to item (B7), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of reach predictions and button predictions that indicate whether or not a reach will be achieved is reduced in consideration of the long period during which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game, and therefore an optimal time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time-saving state A" and the "movable object preview", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" may be 0%, that is, not executed. Also, as long as the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time-saving state A" and the "movable object preview", the above rate can be changed in various ways.

<Item B8>
The movable body operation patterns of "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" that can be executed by the presentation control CPU 120 in one variable display include "patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first presentation execution pattern)" which executes "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation", and "pattern A-1 (second presentation execution pattern)" which executes only "movable body presentation" without executing "movable body announcement". In this case, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a jackpot is 90% in "time-saving state B" as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), 20% in "probable bonus state" as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), and 10% in "time-saving state A" as shown in Figure 11-48 (C).

In other words, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" (e.g., 90%) is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state A" (e.g., 10%), and is also higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Probable hit state" (e.g., 20%).

According to item (B8), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control to the jackpot game state in consideration of the fact that a long period has continued during which the state is not controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B, since the movable body 32 is unlikely to be unnecessarily moved in the movable body announcement before the movable body performance in which the movable body 32 falls to notify of a jackpot is executed.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state A" or "Probable bonus state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" may be set to 0%, in other words, not to be executed.

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 80 to 90%) of patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, and B-3 (first performance execution pattern) being executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state A or in the high probability state is higher than the percentage (e.g., 10%) of patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, and B-3 (first performance execution pattern) being executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state B. This allows players to focus on whether or not the movable body 32 moves in time-saving state A or in the high probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state B (e.g., about 10%) is lower than the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state A or in the special probability state (e.g., 80-90%), and therefore the movable body 32 is less likely to be moved unnecessarily in time-saving state B, making it possible to provide a favorable time-saving state B.

<Item B9>
The presentation mode of the "post-performance" in which the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state after notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the SP reach performance is common to the "time-saving state B,""high probability state," and "time-saving state A," as shown in Figure 11-60.

According to item (B9), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to a jackpot game state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average variable display time, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B, since a common presentation can be used to liven things up in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state.

In addition, the "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state is the same as the "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (see Figure 11-59 (D1)), which allows development costs to be reduced.

In addition, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state is the same as the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B (e.g., light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, the vibration modes executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state are the same as the vibration modes executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), thereby reducing development costs.

<Item B10>
Regarding the "entry effect" as a special state start effect in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies the start of time-saving control by displaying an entry image 069SG470 (for example, the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!") as a special state start display when time-saving control is started, when the control of the special state starts, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the special state entry effect, and when the control of the time-saving state B starts, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect B, and images 069SG473A and 069SG473B for Yu-time (for example, the characters "Yu-1100") are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the special state or the time-saving state A starts (see Fig. 11-63 (D), Fig. 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to item (B10), in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has passed since the control was not controlled to the jackpot game state, the entry performance not only displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the high probability state begins, but also displays the Yu-time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when the control of the high probability state begins, thereby making it possible to liven up the start of the time-saving state B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the effects may also be capable of determining a special variation pattern having a variable display time that can execute a "break-in effect" during a rescue time-saving reaching variation. In this way, the "break-in effect" can be executed optimally.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (C), we will explain the differences between "Time-saving state B" and the "High probability state" and "Time-saving state A".

<Item C1>
As explained in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the number of miss fluctuation patterns and big win fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine is the smallest in the time-saving state B, and the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation patterns and big win fluctuation patterns is the shortest in the time-saving state B, and the determination ratio of non-reach misses is the highest in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the average consumption time per one variable display in each of the "time-saving state B", "probable variable state", and "time-saving state A" where the time-saving control is performed is the fastest in the time-saving state B, the medium speed in the probable variable state, and the slow speed in the time-saving state A.

In this way, of the time-saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state A, which have higher variable efficiency than the normal state due to the time-saving control, the probability variable state and the time-saving state A are controlled via a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, while the time-saving state B is controlled via the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) in a low probability state without the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, in the special bonus state and time-saving state A, the variable display number of times at which time-saving control is executed is a first number (e.g., 110 times), whereas in the time-saving state B, the variable display number of times at which time-saving control is executed is a second number (e.g., 1,100 times) that is greater than the first number.

In other words, in the case of time-saving states such as the probability variable state and time-saving state A, the player can enjoy the reach and various effects while waiting for the next big hit with less investment than in the normal state, whereas in the case of time-saving state B, the player is controlled after a long period of play in a state unfavorable to the player without a big hit, and the number of variable displays of the time-saving control is greater than in the probability variable state and time-saving state A. By taking into consideration this, the number of wasted shots is reduced by increasing the variable efficiency as described above, and investment is reduced, while the priority is given to efficiently consuming the losing variable displays and hitting a big hit in a short period of time rather than enjoying the effects, and a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

<Item C2>
In addition, as explained in each item B1 to B10 shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the execution rate of the various preview effects described above is lowest in the time-saving state B, highest in the special state, and medium in the time-saving state A.

In other words, during the long period of play before being controlled to time-saving state B, various preview effects are executed and then repeatedly fail, which is likely to make the player feel quite depressed. Therefore, by making the execution rate of preview effects in time-saving state B lower than in other play states, it is possible to ideally prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to failure effects.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time-saving state B is a game state characterized by having a higher variable efficiency and by having fewer opportunities to be enticed by advance notice performances, compared to other sure-variable states and the time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is similarly performed, thereby suppressing additional investment and a decrease in desire to play, while suitably consuming the variable display and waiting for a jackpot.

In more detail, while time-saving state B shares with other probability variable states and time-saving state A the average normal pattern change time (the period during which the normal pattern changes), the probability of hitting a "normal pattern" in a normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole (high opening control, high base control), it is a time-saving state that prioritizes change efficiency over presentation by shortening the average special pattern change time (the period during which the special pattern changes) more than other probability variable states and time-saving state A, thereby increasing the change efficiency while reducing the frequency of various presentations.

In addition, by making the miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the miss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the guaranteed bonus state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

In addition, by making the miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the miss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

It is also preferable that the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A. In this way, the average time of the control period in the time-saving state B is shorter than that in the high probability state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided, while the average time of the control period in the time-saving state A is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., two) is less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., three), and the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., three) is less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state (e.g., four). This reduces the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while increasing the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by making the jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., SP Reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., SP Reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the high probability state (e.g., the high probability state), it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

In addition, by making the jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B common to the jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both time-saving state A and the special probability state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in time-saving state B.

It is also preferable that the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A. In this way, the average time of the control period in the time-saving state B is shorter than that in the high probability state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided, while the average time of the control period in the time-saving state A is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state (e.g., 3). This reduces the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while increasing the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach miss that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach miss that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and the special state, so by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can only be determined in time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in time-saving state B is lower than in the probability variable state or time-saving state A. However, for example, when the number of remaining variable display times until control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving reaching change) in normal state (low probability/low base state) becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times or 50 times remaining) or less, the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute may be set to be lower than the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in the normal state. In this case, the execution rate of one effect may be lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but higher than the execution rate in time-saving state B (execution rate of one effect; normal state (101 times or more remaining times) > normal state (100 times or less remaining times) > time-saving state B).

In addition, when the number of remaining variable display times until control is made to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low probability/low base state) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 100 times or 50 times remaining) or less, the contents of the above items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may be changed to the contents corresponding to time-saving state B. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience of being controlled to time-saving state B.

In addition, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if the remaining number of variable display times until the time-saving state B is controlled (rescue time-saving reaching change) is less than a specific number (e.g., 50 times or 10 times remaining) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which a low expectation effect (e.g., SP reach effect A or a weak pattern preview effect) is executed may be increased.

(Variable display mode of the design)
Next, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern and the small pattern will be explained based on Fig. 11-51 to Fig. 11-55. Fig. 11-51 is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in (A) the probability variable state and the time-saving state A miss shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern, and (B) the time-saving state B miss shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-52 is an example of the performance operation of the probability variable state and the time-saving state A shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-53 is an example of the performance operation of the probability variable state and the time-saving state A shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-54 is an example of the performance operation of the time-saving state B shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-55 is an example of the performance operation of the SP reach E and the SP reach D.

In this embodiment, each decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R is composed of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. On the other hand, the left small pattern, medium small pattern, and right small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL in the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are each composed only of the numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative pattern. The decorative patterns and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns.

The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R of the decorative pattern (for example, non-reach type miss variable pattern, etc.) is different in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A, and the time-saving state B. Below, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the non-reach type miss variable pattern (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A will be explained based on the timing chart in Figure 11-51 (A) and with reference to Figures 11-52 and 11-53. Note that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern of the non-reach type miss in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A is the same, so in Figure 11-52, the miss variable display mode of the shortened non-reach in the high probability state will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach miss in the probability change state and time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative patterns and small patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-52(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative pattern is the same. Also, each decorative pattern starts variable display at "low speed" and becomes "medium speed" at timing ta2 when a predetermined time has elapsed, and then becomes the maximum speed "high speed" at timing ta3 when a further predetermined time has elapsed, and is then variably displayed at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed "high speed" from the start timing ta1 of the variable display. Incidentally, the maximum speed "high speed" of the decorative pattern and the maximum speed "high speed" of the small pattern may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns changes from "medium speed" to "slow speed" in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C. Then, at timing ta4 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52 (B)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (C)), and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at the timing when it returns to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (D)).

Next, at time ta5 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (see FIG. 11-52 (E)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (F)), and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R at the time when it returns to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-53 (H)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), and at timing ta6 when it returns to its original size, the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a temporary stop display mode (e.g., a swinging mode, etc.) from when they are temporarily displayed until they are stopped based on the reception of a pattern confirmation command.

Then, at time ta7 (the time when the pattern confirmation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from time ta6 when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, the left, middle, and right small patterns are simultaneously (all at once) displayed as stopped (see FIG. 11-53 (K)). In this way, the three small patterns are simultaneously displayed as stopped without any specific action being displayed. Also, at time ta7 when the small pattern is temporarily displayed, the three decorative patterns that were temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously displayed as stopped.

Then, at timing ta8, when the pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 ms) has elapsed since timing ta7 when the small pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display can begin.

Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols of non-reach-type losing symbols in the time-saving state B will be explained based on the timing chart of FIG. 11-51(B) and with reference to FIG. 11-54. Note that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols of non-reach-type losing symbols in the time-saving state B is common, so in FIG. 11-54, the variable display mode of the losing symbol of the shortened non-reach in the time-saving state B will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the super-reduced non-reach miss in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative patterns and small patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative pattern is the same. Also, each decorative pattern is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at timing tb2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing tb1 of the variable display. Incidentally, the maximum speed of the decorative pattern, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small pattern, "high speed", may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C simultaneously (all at once) becomes "medium speed", and at timing tb3 when the decorative patterns are simultaneously (all at once) temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-54 (B)). Note that the variable display speed of the decorative patterns may become "low speed" without passing through "medium speed" from "high speed". Next, a specific action display (stop display action) in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size is not performed, and at timing tb4 (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tb3 when each decorative pattern was temporarily stopped, the left, center, and right small patterns are simultaneously (all at once) stopped (see FIG. 11-54 (C)). In this way, the three small symbols are displayed simultaneously without any specific action being displayed. Also, at timing tb4 when the small symbols are displayed, the three decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed simultaneously.

Then, at timing tb5, which is the time when the pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 ms) has elapsed since timing tb4 when the small pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display can begin.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time-saving state B, the high probability state, and the time-saving state A, but it may be shorter in the time-saving state B than in the high probability state and the time-saving state A. Also, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the high probability state and the time-saving state A, but it may be common to the time-saving state B, the high probability state, and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is the same for the time-saving state B, the special probability state, and the time-saving state A (the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a horizontal line), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a horizontal line, while in the time-saving state B, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in different positions in the vertical direction. In this way, the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns in the time-saving state B may be different from the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns in the special probability state and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is exemplified as being common (variable display in the vertical direction) to the time-saving state B, the special probability state, and the time-saving state A, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be vertical in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, while the variable display may be horizontal in the time-saving state B, or the variable display of the decorative patterns may be displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by friendly characters, enemy characters, etc. may be continuously displayed on the display screen, and the variable display mode in the time-saving state B may be different from the variable display mode in the special probability state and the time-saving state A.

In this way, the start order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same for the non-reach miss variable pattern in the special probability state and time-saving state A, and the non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time it takes for the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach maximum speed is shorter in time-saving state B than in the special probability state and time-saving state A (tb1-tb2<ta1-ta3). Therefore, different impressions can be given for each state, increasing interest.

The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is left → right → middle in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, and left, middle, and right are stopped simultaneously in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B. This gives a different impression for each state, increasing interest.

The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time from when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be different for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. This makes it possible to give a different impression for each state and increase interest.

In addition, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in variable display 1 is three times in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability change state or time-saving state A, because the left, center, and right are displayed stopped at different times, and once in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in time-saving state B, because the left, center, and right are displayed stopped at the same time. This gives a different impression for each state, increasing interest.

In addition, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be the same for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and time-saving state A, and for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. This makes it possible to give a different impression for each state and increase interest.

In addition, in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, a specific action display (pattern stopping action) is performed, whereas in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B, a specific action display (pattern stopping action) is not performed. Therefore, while the special action display enhances the presentation effect in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, a smooth variable display can be achieved by not executing the special action display in time-saving state B.

In addition, the specific action display (pattern stopping action) is common to both the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the presentation effect with the specific action display, while commonizing the form of the specific action display between the high probability state and time-saving state A and time-saving state B can reduce development costs.

In addition, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped to when the small pattern is stopped is shorter in the non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B than in the non-reach miss variable pattern in the sure-win state and time-saving state A {t1 (ta6-ta7) > t2 (tb3-tb4)}. Therefore, a smooth variable display can be achieved in time-saving state B.

In addition, the pattern determination period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a variable display of 1 in the probability variable state and time-saving state A until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display, and the pattern determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a variable display of 1 in time-saving state B until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display, are the same. Therefore, by standardizing the control that takes into account the drawing process until the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce development costs.

In addition, the specific action display of each decorative pattern is exemplified as an action display in which the display is enlarged to a specified size and then returns to the original size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the action mode is not limited to the above and can be changed in various ways. In addition, in the specific action display, only the pedestal display unit 069SG052 displays the specific action, and the number display unit 069SG051 does not display the specific action, so that the special effect can be enhanced by the specific action display while ensuring the visibility of the identification information, but the number display unit 069SG051 may also display the specific action as well as the pedestal display unit 069SG052. In addition, the specific action mode may be different for each decorative pattern with a different number.

In addition, in the above, an example was given in which the variable display mode is common between the abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern and the non-abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display mode may be different between the abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern and the non-abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the display position of the decorative pattern in time-saving state B may be made different when the variable display starts and when the variable display stops, allowing the variable display to be displayed optimally even during the short variable display period.

In addition, instead of accelerating the speed at which the decorative pattern's variable display reaches its maximum speed as in this embodiment, the decorative pattern may be changed to a form that is difficult to see (e.g., a dark form) during the variable display, and then changed from the difficult to see form to a normal form when the decorative pattern stops, thereby realizing a variable display that gives a sense of speed.

Next, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display will be explained based on Figure 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP Reach E, the variable display starts (see Figure 11-55 (A)), and after the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 11-55 (B)), the decorative pattern is displayed decelerating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the reach notice and button notice are executed (see Figure 11-55 (C)). When the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed stationary in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the base display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a reach specific action display is performed (see Figure 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see Figure 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not shown, when a jackpot announcement is made after the SP reach performance, the determined decorative patterns that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 11-55(F)). After that, the base display portion 069SG052 of the decorative patterns that are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a jackpot specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55(G)), after which the determined decorative patterns are temporarily displayed (see FIG. 11-55(H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP Reach D, the variable display starts (see FIG. 11-55 (I)), and without displaying the reach mode, the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, the base display portion 069SG052 of the decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and then a jackpot specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (G)), and the determined decorative pattern is temporarily displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute a reach specific action display that causes the decorative symbols to perform a specific action when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and a second specific action display that causes the decorative symbols to perform a specific action when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination. In the SP reach E fluctuation pattern that goes through a reach, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display are executed, but in the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that does not go through a reach, the reach specific action display is not executed and the jackpot specific action display is executed. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time-saving state B, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B because it is less likely to be unnecessarily stirred up.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-55(I), after the variable display starts, no reach state is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-55(F), the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a "movable body presentation" in which the movable body 32 falls may be executed without any operation by the player between the start of the variable display and the temporary display of the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination.

(Display mode of non-reach out fluctuation pattern)
Next, compare non-reach failure variation patterns. Figure 11-56 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of non-reach failure variation patterns. Figure 11-57 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of non-reach failure variation patterns. Note that, in the following, the detailed operation example of the specific operation display that is executed when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is omitted.

As shown in Figure 11-56, comparing the non-reach missed fluctuation patterns of the shortened type, first, in the "ultra shortened non-reach" that can be determined in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (B1)). Next, a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)), and a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

As for the shortened non-reach variable pattern, in the sure-win state and time-saving state A, the variable display time is "3 seconds" in shortened non-reach A, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of left, right, and center, whereas in time-saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds" in super shortened non-reach, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of left, right, and center at the same time.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-57, comparing the non-reach missed fluctuation patterns, first, in "non-reach A" that can be determined in the high probability state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously. At this time, a "movable body announcement" in which the movable body 32 moves up and down may be executed (see Figure 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a "character announcement" may be executed in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of text such as "reach?" are displayed (see Figure 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-57(A3)), a "reach notice" in which the decorative pattern is displayed decelerating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a button image 069SG441 imitating the push button 31B, and an operation prompting display 069SG442 such as "Long press!" are displayed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B may be executed (see FIG. 11-57(A4)). After that, a decorative pattern different from the left pattern is displayed statically in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57(A5)), and the reach mode is not entered, and the decorative pattern is displayed statically in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, ending the variable display (see FIG. 11-57(A6)).

In addition, the "non-reach A" (see Figure 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) that can be determined in the time-saving state A has a similar flow to the non-reach missed fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the high probability state (see Figure 11-57 (A1) to (A6)), so a description will be omitted.

On the other hand, in "non-reach A" which can be determined in time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure C1), and then the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stops simultaneously, ending the variable display (see Figure 11-57 (C2)).

As described above, for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display time is the same at "7 seconds" for the special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, but in the special probability state and time-saving state A, the execution rate of various effects such as "moving object notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" is high, whereas in time-saving state B, the execution rate of various effects such as "moving object notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" is lower (or not executed) than in the special probability state or time-saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation pattern is compared. Figure 11-58 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. Figure 11-59 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. Figure 11-60 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the post-event performance in the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Comparing the Super Reach fluctuation patterns based on Figures 11-58 and 11-59 below, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP Reach E" that can be determined in time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a "character announcement" may be executed in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of, for example, the text "Maybe it's a reach!!" are displayed (see Figure 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). Although not specifically shown, when the reach mode is reached, a "reach notice" or "button notice" may be executed.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 consisting of a character image and text such as "SP reach performance E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). At this time, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle performance" begins in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character faces off against the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the battle presentation, and the final showdown begins (see FIG. 11-59 (A6) (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 that resembles the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Start charging!", and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed, and a "win/lose button presentation" is executed as an operation prompting display that prompts the player to press and hold the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). If a long press by the player is detected during the valid operation period in which the operation prompting display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

In addition, before displaying the button image 069SG451 that resembles the push button 31B during or immediately before the performance period of the win/lose button performance, a pre-performance (such as a light gathering performance in which light gathers at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) may be executed. In addition, it is preferable that such a pre-performance is not executed in the time-saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the operation prompting display 069SG452, the display of the operation prompting display 069SG452 changes to "RELEASE!!" to prompt the release of the push button 31B, and the operation time for releasing the operation is displayed by the gauge display 069SG453 (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, when the release of the push operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the release of the push operation being detected, an image 069SG455 indicating that an ally character has attacked is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a movable body presentation is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position, and a movable body presentation image 069SG456 consisting of an image indicating that the ally character's attack has hit the enemy character and an effect image for highlighting the movable body 32 is displayed. After the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), a notification image 069SG457 indicating that the enemy character has been defeated and the ally character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 11-59 (D2)). The fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

When a jackpot is announced, as shown in FIG. 11-60, the background image is switched to the fifth background image 069SG350, and a character image 069SG100C and a planned ball number counter display 069SG460 showing the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the post-event performance begins (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 069SG461 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 069SG453 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect is executed to prompt a single press of the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, when the pressing of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the friendly character attacks, and the counter value of the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is displayed variably (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "750", which is the scheduled number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed frozen (see FIG. 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 is not updated and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 is updated to a specified counter value (e.g., "1500") (see Figure 11-60 (D10)) and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss, although this is not shown in detail, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, the enemy character is not defeated, the ally character loses the battle, and a combination of miss patterns is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby informing the player that the variable display result is a miss (see FIG. 11-59 (D4)).

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP Reach C" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the probability change state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see FIG. 11-58 (B1)). Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, a blackout effect starts in which the display screen turns into a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-58, 50 (A3 to A7) is performed (see FIG. 11-58, 50 (B3 to B6)), and then the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the effects of FIG. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP Reach D" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see FIG. 11-58 (C1)). Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, a blackout effect starts in which the display screen turns into a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the effect of FIG. 11-58 (A4) is not performed, and after the same effect as FIG. 11-58 (A5) is performed (see FIG. 11-58 (C3)), the effect of FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (C4 to C5)). Then, the effects shown in Figure 11-59 (D1 to D3) and Figure 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

(Example of control operation of Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern)
Next, examples of control operations for the jackpot fluctuation patterns of SP Reach E, C, and D will be compared based on FIG. 11-61. FIG. 11-61 is a timing chart showing examples of control operations in SP Reach E, C, and D.

As shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to (C), SP Reach E, C, and D are composed of a variable display part that executes a variable display of decorative symbols, and a post-performance part that notifies the player of the expected number of balls that can be won in a jackpot game state after the variable display part ends. In the variable display part, when the variable display begins, the aforementioned "movable object preview," "character preview," "reach preview," "button preview," etc. are executed, and after the reach state is reached, a "battle performance" or "short battle performance" is executed as an SP reach performance. Then, after the "win/lose button performance" is started as an operation promotion performance in the "decisive performance" at timing ta1, the "movable object performance" is started at timing ta2. Then, after the results of the "battle performance" or "short battle performance" are announced, at timing ta3, the determined decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a specific jackpot action display (jackpot symbol stopping action; see FIG. 11-55 (G)) is performed, and then at timing ta4, the combination of symbols that will determine the jackpot is temporarily stopped and a jackpot is announced. After that, during the period from timing ta5 to ta6, a post-performance is executed.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP Reach E, which can be determined in time-saving state A, 40 seconds for SP Reach C, which can be determined in the special state, and 25 seconds for SP Reach D, which can be determined in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the time of the post-performance part (ta5 to ta6) is the same for SP Reach E, C, and D, at 15 seconds.

In other words, while the variable display times of the variable display parts in time-saving state A and the special probability state are different from the variable display time of the variable display part in time-saving state B (25 seconds) (50 seconds, 40 seconds), the variable display times of the post-performance parts in time-saving state A and the special probability state are the same as the variable display time of the post-performance parts in time-saving state B (15 seconds). This allows for differences in the various performances in the variable display parts between time-saving state A and the special probability state and time-saving state B, and enhances the performance effect, while reducing development costs by standardizing the post-performance parts.

In addition, while the variable display times of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) are different from the variable display time of the variable display part in the time-saving state B (25 seconds), the display times of the jackpot specific action displays in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state (ta3 to ta4) are the same as the display times of the jackpot specific action displays in the time-saving state B (ta3 to ta4). This allows for differences in the various effects in the variable display parts to be made, enhancing the effect of the effects, while reducing development costs by standardizing the display times of the jackpot specific action displays.

The execution period of the "win/lose button effect" (ta1 to ta2) is the same for SP Reach C and D, and is different only for SP Reach E.

In addition, when the display control unit 123 performs display processing to generate the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data (display data) for displaying on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area and outputting the image data (display data) of the display image creation area as a video signal, it generates extended commands (e.g., extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc., and extended commands (e.g., extended commands BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as lamp control information for turning on/off the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., and transmits them to the performance control CPU 120.

Based on receiving the above-mentioned extended commands DXXX and SXXX, the performance control CPU 120 starts operation control to operate the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B in an operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXX and SXXX, separately from the operation control based on the operation control execution data of the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B described in the process data.

In addition, based on receiving the above-mentioned extended command BXXX, etc., the performance control CPU 120 starts control to turn on/off the movable body LED 208 in a lighting pattern corresponding to the extended command BXXX, etc. (for example, see the lighting pattern shown in Figure 13-6 (B) in feature section 018SG), separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data.

In addition, control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B, and control data for turning on the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121.

Here, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body presentation" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the special probability state (e.g., control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) is the same as the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body presentation" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (e.g., control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200), thereby reducing development costs.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which extended commands (e.g., extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as control information for movable bodies for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc., and extended commands (e.g., extended command BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as control information for lamps for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., are generated separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in a "movable body performance" or the like, the on/off control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, and the like, and the control for movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and push button 31B may be executed based on extended command B000 as control information for lamps for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc. In other words, lighting control and operation control may be performed using common control information (extended commands).

In addition, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the special probability state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B, are common, which allows development costs to be reduced.

In addition, the control data (e.g., control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the special probability state is common to the control data (e.g., control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state B, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, by making the extension command B000 a common extension command for movable body operation control and LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extension commands for movable body operation control and the extension commands for LED lighting control, which reduces the program capacity for performance control. If the extension commands used for movable body performance were separated into extension commands for movable body operation control and extension commands for LED lighting control, there is a risk that one of the extension commands will be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to perform movable body performances optimally.

In addition, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "moving body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the special probability state (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) is the same as the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "moving body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). This allows development costs to be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach out fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to Fig. 11-62. Fig. 11-62 is a diagram comparing the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when it stops in the super reach miss variable pattern is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when it stops in the non-reach miss variable pattern.

In addition, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach miss variable pattern is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in the super reach miss variable pattern until the variable display state becomes a reach state, so the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the reach state is reached, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L starts to when it stops is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L starts to when it stops in the super-reach miss fluctuation pattern, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern in a specified row ends in a short period of time, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

(Rush-in performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the entry performance will be described based on Fig. 11-63 and Fig. 11-64. Fig. 11-63 shows an example of the performance of the entry introduction performance (A) to (C), and a time-saving entry performance (D) of the time-saving entry performance A. Fig. 11-64 shows an example of the performance of the probability variable entry performance (A1) to (A4), and a time-saving entry performance (B1) to (B4) of the time-saving entry performance B.

As shown in FIG. 11-63(A) to (C), in the "introduction performance", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and the message "BATTLE
A predetermined number (for example, one character) of character images 069SG470B making up "RUSH rush in!!" are framed in from the right side of the display screen of image display device 5 and moved to the center of the display screen.

Then, a "time-saving entry effect A" is performed in which an entry image 069SG470 consisting of an effect image 069SG470A that is displayed at its maximum and has a changed display color, and a text image 069SG470B consisting of the text "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!" gathered in the center of the display screen, is displayed, thereby announcing that control of time-saving state A has begun.

In the case of a "probability bonus entry performance," after the entry image 069SG470 in FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (A1), a probability bonus image 069SG471 with a predetermined transparency consisting of the character "極" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, and then is moved and displayed while gradually shrinking toward the bottom left of the display screen and with a decreasing transparency (see FIG. 11-64 (A2-A3)).

Then, a "probability bonus entry effect" is performed in which a probability bonus entry image 069SG472 consisting of an entry image 069SG470 and a probability bonus image 069SG471 displayed in the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen is displayed, thereby announcing that control of the probability bonus state has begun (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

In the case of "Time-saving entry effect B", the "entry introduction effect" described in Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed, and when the pattern determination period (e.g., 20 seconds) begins after the 900th variable display, when the start condition for the control of time-saving state B is met, the entry image 069SG470 in Fig. 11-63 (D) is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 11-64 (B1), a play-time image 069SG473A having a predetermined transparency and consisting of the characters "1100" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, and then is moved and displayed while gradually shrinking and decreasing in transparency toward the bottom left of the display screen (see Fig. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, a "time-saving entry effect B" is performed, which displays an entry image 069SG473 consisting of an entry image 069SG470, a Yu-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen, and a Yu-time image 069SG473B consisting of the character "Yu", thereby announcing that control of time-saving state B has begun (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when control of time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when control of the special probability state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the special probability state image 069SG471 is displayed in the special probability state entry performance, while when control of time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering time-saving state A and the special probability state is displayed in time-saving entry performance B, and the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the special probability state or time-saving state A is started.

Therefore, in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has passed during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the time-saving entry performance B not only displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the special probability state or the time-saving state A starts, but also displays the play-time image 069SG473B, which is not displayed when the control of the special probability state or the time-saving state A starts, thereby livening up the start of the time-saving state B.

[Embodiment 2]
Next, the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG will be described based on FIG. 11-65 to FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variable pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of a variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display performance pattern determination table. FIG. 11-68 is an example of the performance operation of SP Reach D. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the features according to the game state. In the second embodiment, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described.

Figure 11-65 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0, and (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-65 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 100 judgment values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach. Also, as shown in Figure 11-65 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 100 judgment values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP Reach E, and 90 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern is determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "short battle effect" described in the first embodiment as the variable display effect, while when the variable display of the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" described below as the variable display effect, rather than the "short battle effect".

The SP Reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A is a reach fluctuation pattern in which a "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display starts and the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, whereas the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which an "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" is executed without the variable display mode becoming a reach mode after the variable display starts.

Next, FIG. 11-66 is a part of a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-44. In this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting process, if the CPU 120 for performance control determines in step S069SGS277 that the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), it executes the processes of steps 069SGS277A to 069SGS277D before executing the reach notice execution decision process of step 069SGS278.

Specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and if it is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A; Yes), determines whether the game state is time-saving state B (step 069SGS277B). Then, if it is determined that the game state is time-saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), it executes a variable display presentation pattern determination process (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display performance pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the variable display performance pattern is extracted, and the variable display performance pattern is determined using the variable display performance pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-67, for each of the "instant hit effect" and "full spin effect", different judgment values are assigned for the jackpot type of "jackpot C (10R)" and "jackpot A, B (6R)" so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in FIG. 11-67.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the "instant hit effect", and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full spin effect". Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to the "instant hit effect", and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full spin effect".

In this way, when comparing the "instant win effect" and "full spin effect" in the three game states other than the normal state, they are not executed in the special probability state or time-saving state A, but are variable display effects that can only be executed in time-saving state B, and are executed by using the SP reach D variation pattern that can be determined in the special probability state and time-saving state A.

In addition, the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", while the execution rate of the "full spin effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "full spin effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", which has a higher expected number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state than "jackpot A, B (6R)" and is more advantageous for the player, the "full spin effect" is executed at a higher rate than the "instant hit effect".

Next, examples of the "instant win effect" and "full spin effect" will be described. When the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, the variable display starts, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and then a "short battle effect" is executed in which the friendly character wins against the enemy character in the battle effect, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 11-58 to 11-59). However, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in time-saving state B, the variable display starts, and then an "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" is executed in which the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the variable display result is announced to be a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, in the "instant hit effect", in the SP Reach D big win variation pattern, after the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see FIG. 11-68 (A1)), when a predetermined time has passed, the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined big win combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). After that, in the "decisive effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display such as "Press!!" and a gauge display are displayed to promote the operation of the push button 31B, and instead, a "movable body effect" is executed in which the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the middle position (see FIG. 11-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-performance part, a post-performance similar to the post-performance described in FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern, after a blackout effect in which the display screen is blacked out with the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 11-68 (B1)), the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is simultaneously started in the third background image 069SG330 (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a full rotation display is started in which the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state where they are aligned with the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination (see FIG. 11-68 (B3)). After that, the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-performance part (symbol determination period), a post-performance similar to that described in FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, an "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" is executed as a variable display effect that notifies the player that the variable display result is a jackpot after the variable display starts, without going through the reach mode, so the player can enjoy the SP reach effect with peace of mind without worrying about being provoked by the reach effect.

In addition, in the "instant win effect" or "full rotation effect", unlike the "button preview" and "win/lose button effect" described in the first embodiment, no operation promotion effect is executed that encourages the operation of the push button 31B by displaying a button image that resembles the push button 31B, operation promotion displays such as "Press!!", and gauge displays, or operation effects that require the player to operate the push button 31B, so that in the time-saving state B, the player can conveniently consume the variable display without having to perform any cumbersome operation promotions or operations.

(Examples of various actions depending on game state)
Next, various operation examples for the three game states of the time-saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state A in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples for each game state. Below, as shown in FIG. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three game states of "time-saving state B", "probability variable state", and "time-saving state A" will be compared.

<Item D1>
First, with regard to the rate at which the CPU 103 determines an SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern without going through a reach mode, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), the determination rate of "SP reach D (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3 is "90%", in the "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), the determination rate of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%", and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the determination rate of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%".

In addition, in the special probability state and time-saving state A, "SP Reach D" is a reach fluctuation pattern in which a "short battle performance" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 90%) of times that an "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) of times that an "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in time-saving state A, and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) of times that an "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in the probability variable state.

According to item (D1), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game has not been controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the game to a jackpot game state, the state of the variable display is set to a reach state, so that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without being unnecessarily provoked, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in time-saving state B is determined is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-through A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in time-saving state A or in the probability variable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result in time-saving state B is a jackpot, the "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through the reach mode may be determined 100% of the time.

<Item D2>
The presentation control CPU 120 can execute, for example, a "win/lose button presentation" in a SP reach presentation as an action-promoting presentation to encourage the player to take action, and can execute, for example, a "movable body presentation" in a SP reach presentation as a specific presentation to notify the player of the variable display result.

Then, in the probability variable state or time-saving state A, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the performance control CPU 120 executes a first performance execution pattern in which a "win/lose button performance" is executed and then a "movable body performance" is executed in the "decisive performance" in the variable display of the SP Reach D, while in the time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the performance control CPU 120 executes a second performance execution pattern in which a "win/lose button performance" is executed and then a "movable body performance" is executed in the "instant win performance" in the variable display of the SP Reach D.

Therefore, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" in which the "moving body effect" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button effect" is "90%" in the "time-saving state B" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-65 (C); in the "probable bonus state", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C); and in the "time-saving state A", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C).

In other words, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of an "instant hit effect" in which a "moving body effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of a "moving body effect" in which a "win/lose button effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A, and is also higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of a "moving body effect" in which a "win/lose button effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state.

According to item (D2), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is notified that it has been decided to control to the jackpot game state, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the game has not been controlled to the jackpot game state, the player is less likely to be prompted to operate the push button 31B, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state B is higher than the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state B may be 100%.

<Item D3>
The percentage at which the CPU 103 will determine a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, an "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or an "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds) when the number of reserved memories is 0 is "100%" in the "time-shortened state B" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-65 (A); in the "probable change state," it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-6 (A); and in the "time-shortened state A," it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the percentage at which the CPU 103 determines a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-shortened state B" as shown in FIG. 11-65 (A), "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable variation state" as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), and "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-shortened state A" as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A).

In other words, when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the sure-change state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) to buy time for reserved memories to be stored in the second reserved memory, while when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds) than a miss variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds).

According to item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, even if the number of reserved memories is 0, a miss fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, a non-reach with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is determined, and the consumption speed of the variable display does not decrease, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, the type of jackpot can be determined to be either "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B", which involves a 6R round of play, or "Jackpot C", which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" (e.g., has a greater number of rounds, i.e., a greater number of planned balls that can be won) (see Figure 11-3 (D)).

In addition, when the SP Reach D jackpot variable pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "full rotation performance" as a special variable display pattern in which the jackpot symbols are displayed variably for a predetermined period of time when they are aligned and then displayed stationary.

In addition, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, the percentage at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" is "90%" in the "time-saving state B" as shown in FIG. 11-67, "0%" (the "full spin presentation" is not executed) in the "probable bonus state" as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), and "0%" (the "full spin presentation" is not executed) in the "time-saving state A" as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C).

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 100%) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time-saving state A, and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state.

According to item (D4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to jackpot C, which has more rounds and is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A or jackpot B, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it becomes easier to execute the "full spin effect," a special variable display that is not executed (or has a low execution rate) in the normal state, the special variable state, or the time-saving state A, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B is 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B is higher than the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the "full spin performance" at a rate less than 100%. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state.

(Explanation of Variations and Applications of Feature 069SG)
In the feature section 069SG, a form in which a big win game state is applied is exemplified as an example of an "advantageous state advantageous to the player", but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a sure-win state, a small win game state, a reach state, a pseudo consecutive performance state, a reserved consecutive state, a chance-up performance, a foresight notice performance, a miss with time reduction, a ceiling time reduction control, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form is exemplified in which a so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it is controlled to the next jackpot when the jackpot type is a high probability jackpot, or a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it wins a high probability drop lottery. Also, a so-called type 1/2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small win in the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game may be applied, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, the time-saving state A, the probability bonus state, and the time-saving state B are exemplified as special states in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in a non-special state (for example, the normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of game states other than the above may be applied.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, a form is exemplified in which a low-probability, high-based time-saving state A (first special state) and a time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) are applied as a first special state that is controlled when a favorable state controlled from a non-special state (e.g., a normal state, a low-probability/low-base state) ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed in a non-special state without being controlled to an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high-probability, high-based probability change state (first special state) and a low-probability, high-based time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, a form in which a probability variable state is applied as a third special state that is controlled when an advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a type 1/type 2 pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving state different from the time-saving state as the first special state (for example, a time-saving state in which the time-saving state is executed more times (has a longer control period) than the first special state) may be applied.

In addition, in the feature 069SG, at least one of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state may have multiple types of special states that differ, for example, in the number of times the time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the variable display is executed, etc.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, an example is given of a form in which a normal state (low probability/low base state) is applied as a non-special state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the game state has a lower frequency of execution of the variable display than the special state, it is not limited to the low probability/low base state, and may be a high probability base state, a low probability/high base state, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) as the second special state is exemplified as being controlled on the condition that the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Also, it may be controlled when another condition is met in addition to the above-mentioned conditions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state A, and the probability of winning, the average normal pattern change time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control) are not changed, and the average special pattern change time (period for changing the special pattern) in the time-saving state B is shortened compared to the probability of winning and the time-saving state A, without changing the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B, at least one of the average normal pattern change time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control) may be made different from the probability of winning and the time-saving state A to further improve the change efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern).

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, an example has been given of a form in which the CPU 103 can determine, as a variable pattern, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A-E miss") in which the variable display mode is a specific mode (e.g., a reach mode) and then a miss display result, and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach miss") in which the variable display mode is not a specific mode and a miss display result is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include types of variable patterns other than those described above. In addition, as a variation pattern, a first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach A-C, E jackpot") that displays a miss display result with the variable display mode as a specific mode (for example, a reach mode) and a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach D (instant hit or full spin)", "not via SP", etc.) that displays a miss display result without setting the variable display mode as a specific mode have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include types of variation patterns other than those described above.

In addition, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", but may include various modes such as a "chance mode (e.g., 133)", a "pseudo consecutive mode (e.g., 122)", a "normal reach mode", and a "super reach mode".

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, examples have been given of the application of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" as indication effects that suggest that control will be made to a jackpot gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the indication is an indication that control will be made to a jackpot gaming state, it may include various indications such as, for example, a stop pattern prediction, a pseudo consecutive prediction, a dialogue prediction, an operation prediction, a reach prediction, and a look-ahead prediction effect.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, examples have been given of forms in which a "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance notice", and "effect display notice" are applied as pre-reading notice effects that suggest that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory will be controlled to an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to these, and may include various other pre-reading notices, such as "continuous effects" and "omen effects".

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form in which a "button preview" or a "win/lose button effect" is applied as an example of an action promotion effect to encourage the player to take action has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and may include various effects other than those described above. Furthermore, "player action" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but may be an effect that encourages the operation of other operating means (such as a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B, or an effect that encourages the player to take action (movement) rather than an operation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, "Patterns A-2 and A-3" are applied as an example of a first effect execution pattern in which a "movable object effect" is executed as a specific effect after the "win/lose button" is executed as a movement promotion effect, and "Pattern A-1" is applied as an example of a second effect execution pattern in which a specific effect is executed without executing a movement promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other operation promotion effects such as a "button preview" may be applied as a movement promotion effect, or an effect other than a "movable object effect" (for example, a battle result in a SP reach effect) may be applied as a specific effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which an operation promotion display for a "one-hit" operation is applied as the first action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform one action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be something that encourages the player to perform not only one push operation but also one pull operation, rotation operation, back and forth operation, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which an operation promotion display for "repeated taps" or "long press" operations was applied as a second action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also promote pull operations, rotation operations, back and forth operations, etc. over a predetermined action period. Furthermore, actions over a predetermined action period are not necessarily limited to actions detected continuously, and may include intermittent operations or operations according to a predetermined pattern, etc.

In addition, in the feature portion 069SG, a form in which a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement" is applied is exemplified as an effect including a teasing effect that teases whether or not the variable display state will be a specific state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various effects such as an effect that teases that it will be a "chance eye state (e.g., "133")," a "pseudo consecutive state (e.g., 122)," a "normal reach state," or a "super reach state."

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, in the post-performance, the expected number of balls to be dispensed is reported as the game value information that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that is notified of being controlled in the specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (e.g., 6R or 10R) may be reported. In addition, in a state where jackpots are consecutive, such as when a jackpot occurs in a probability variable state, the expected total number of balls to be dispensed, which is the sum of the expected number of balls to be dispensed in the current jackpot and the total number of balls to be dispensed during a specified consecutive jackpot period, may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state, and examples of the application of the entry introduction effect, the probability of entering a special state effect, the time-saving entry effect A, the time-saving entry effect B, and the shutter effect are given as examples of special state start effects, but the present invention is not limited to these, and various entry effects other than those described above may be executed. Also, the presentation form of each entry effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which the special bonus entry effect and the time-saving entry effect A are separate effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special bonus entry effect and the time-saving entry effect A may be a single common entry effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which the entry introduction effect is not executed when the time-saving entry effect B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry introduction effect may be executed instead of the shutter effect. Also, the entry introduction effect may be executed when the time-saving entry effect B is executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the hassle of the effects, it is preferable to have an entry introduction effect with a shorter effect period than when the special rate entry effect or the time-saving entry effect A is executed.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, as an example of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, a form in which jackpots A and B (first advantageous state) and jackpot C (second advantageous state) with different numbers of play rounds in the jackpot game state are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state may be not only a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state in terms of the number of play rounds or the number of expected balls that can be obtained, but also a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game state ends is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a long time-saving control after the jackpot game state, or a jackpot controlled in a "small jackpot rush" in which the frequency of execution of the small jackpot game state increases after the jackpot ends, etc.).

(Explanation regarding feature 099SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 099SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 12-1 to 12-22. Note that in this characteristic part 099SG, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 069SG will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described. Also, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 069SG.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 11-1, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area where game balls can flow down. In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, a game ball weakly shot out by the launching device because the game state is normal flows down the first path in the left game area, and a game ball strongly shot out by the launching device because the game state is either time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability variable state flows down the second path in the right game area. In addition, a part of the game ball flowing down the second path in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5), and a variable display of a normal pattern is executed based on the passing of the gate 41. Then, when the variable display result of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), the second start winning hole provided on the second path changes from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can win in the second start winning hole. Note that in this feature part 099SG, "variable display" may be written as "variable" or "variable display".

Figure 12-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side in this feature section 099SG. As shown in Figure 12-1 (A), in this feature section 099SG, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data is controlled so as to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and random number value MR5 for determining the MR4 initial value. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or other such in a special symbol game to a "jackpot" and to a jackpot game state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "299", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "99", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR4, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23".

Figure 12-1 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 099SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 099SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 099SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this feature part 099SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 099SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

FIG. 12-1 (C1) and FIG. 12-1 (C2) show examples of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. FIG. 12-1 (C1) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled during variable display of the first special pattern, and FIG. 12-1 (C2) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot B and jackpot C based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled during variable display of the second special pattern.

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 099SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 12-1 (D). In this feature section 099SG, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this feature part 099SG, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot A causes the variable V winning ball device to be in a short open state, and in the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot B and jackpot C cause the variable V winning ball device to be in a long open state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this feature 099SG, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be described as not having a V entry and not having the variable probability control executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be described as having a V entry and having the variable probability control executed.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

Figure 12-2 (A) is a normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced when the game state is normal and the variable display of a normal pattern is executed to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal hit), and Figure 12-2 (B) is a normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced when the game state is either time-saving state A, special state, or time-saving state B and the variable display of a normal pattern is executed to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal hit).

The time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG is the game state that is controlled when 900 variable displays are executed without being controlled to a jackpot game state in the normal game state (low probability/low base state where neither special probability control nor time-saving control is executed), and is time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) where time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(A), of the range of 3 to 13 for the random number value MR4 for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, 3 is assigned to a hit, and 4 to 13 are assigned to a miss. On the other hand, in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(B), of the range of 3 to 13 for the random number value MR4 for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, 3 to 12 are assigned to a hit, and 13 is assigned to a miss. In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the rate of normal hits when the game state is either the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B is set higher than the rate of normal hits when the game state is the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2(C), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds when the game state is normal, whereas the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds when the game state is either time-saving state A, special probability state, or time-saving state B. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal symbol hit occurs when the game state is normal is set to 0.1 seconds, whereas the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal symbol hit occurs when the game state is either time-saving state A, special probability state, or time-saving state B is set to 3 seconds.

In other words, in the time-saving state A, the probability of winning, and the time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG, compared to the normal state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning hole because "the probability of winning with a normal pattern is high," "the variable display time of the normal pattern is short," and "the opening time of the second start winning hole when a winning with a normal pattern occurs is long," so that the frequency of variable display of the second special pattern is set high, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state A, the probability of winning, and the time-saving state B may be set to have a high frequency of variable display of the second special pattern by satisfying at least one of the conditions "the probability of winning with a normal pattern is high," "the variable display time of the normal pattern is short," and "the opening time of the second start winning hole when a winning with a normal pattern occurs is long," compared to the normal state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, like the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 069SG (see FIG. 11-1), when the game state is normal, the player can shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L, which allows the game ball to enter the first start winning hole, but cannot enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole or pass through the gate 41, and when the game ball is in the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B, the player can shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, which allows the game ball to enter the second start winning hole and pass through the gate 41. Note that when the game state is the jackpot game state, the player can shoot the game ball toward the right game area, which allows the game ball to enter the second start winning hole and the large winning hole and pass through the gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(A), when the game state is normal, the game ball shot toward the left game area 2L is prevented from winning by multiple nails arranged on the game board 2, so the probability of the game ball winning in the first start winning hole is about 5.5% (condition is that the game ball is continuously shot into the left game area 2L by the player's operation of the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). In addition, when the game state is normal, even if the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal pattern due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is extremely long at 60 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal winning occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 12-2(C) and FIG. 12-2(D)), so the game ball almost never wins in the second start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(B), when the game state is either Time-saving State A, Chance Bonus State, or Time-saving State B, the game ball shot toward the right game area 2R can pass through the gate 41, and the variable display time of the normal pattern due to passing through the gate 41 is short at 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal pattern hit occurs is 3 seconds (see FIG. 12-2(C) and FIG. 12-2(D)). Therefore, the probability of the game ball winning the second start winning hole is about 55% (condition is that the game ball is continuously shot toward the right game area 2R by the player operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30).

Figure 12-3 shows the variable pattern used in the variable display of the special pattern of this feature part 099SG. In this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-3, as the variation patterns when the variable display result is a miss, there are provided the following variation patterns: super shortened non-reach miss with a special chart variation time of 1500 ms, shortened non-reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 3000 ms, shortened non-reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 5000 ms, non-reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 7000 ms, non-reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 12000 ms, super reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 45000 ms, super reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 80000 ms, super reach C miss with a special chart variation time of 4000 ms, super reach D miss with a special chart variation time of 25000 ms, and super reach E miss with a special chart variation time of 50000 ms. Furthermore, the variation pattern from Super Reach A Miss to Super Reach E Miss is also the variation pattern that executes the reach performance of the Super Reach during variable display.

In addition, the variation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot are as follows: a Super Reach non-via A jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 7,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is not executed (the special chart variation time is 7,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach non-via B jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 12,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is not executed (the special chart variation time is 12,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach A jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 45,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed (the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach B jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 80,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed (the special chart variation time is 15,000 ms + 15,000 ms); The following variation patterns are provided: a Super Reach B jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 0 ms (special chart fluctuation time is 80,000 ms+15,000 ms), a Super Reach C jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms+15,000 ms) after a variable display of 40,000 ms when the Super Reach reach performance is executed, a Super Reach D jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 25,000 ms when the Super Reach reach performance is executed (special chart fluctuation time is 25,000 ms+15,000 ms), and a Super Reach E jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 50,000 ms when the Super Reach reach performance is executed (special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms+15,000 ms). The Super Reach A variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a bowling effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character bowl together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won; the Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E variation patterns are a variation pattern that executes a battle effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character battle together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won; and the Super Reach D variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a short battle effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character battle together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won by a battle that is shorter than the battle effect in the Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E variation patterns.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 099SG is provided with a game control data holding area 099SG150 as shown in FIG. 12-4, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 099SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 099SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 099SG151C, a game control flag setting section 099SG152, a game control timer setting section 099SG153, a game control counter setting section 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 099SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and becomes reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

In other words, this feature unit 099SG can store up to four reserved memories as first special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A), and can store up to four reserved memories as second special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

When variable display is executed, the CPU 103 first reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B if there is a second special symbol reservation memory in the normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B. In other words, if the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as reservation memory for reservation number 1 in the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored as the reservation memory for reservation number 1, erases the reservation memory for reservation number 1, and re-stores the reservation memory for reservation number 2 as the reservation memory for reservation number 1, the reservation memory for reservation number 3 as the reservation memory for reservation number 2, and the reservation memory for reservation number 4 as the reservation memory for reservation number 3.

In addition, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special chart reserved memory exists. If the first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR3 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A. In other words, when the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory of reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 2 as reserved memory of reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 3 as reserved memory of reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 4 as reserved memory of reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 judges the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B (if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2), and then in the variable pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), it determines the variable pattern using a variable pattern judgment table that differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that perform the variable display.

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 099SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games that have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 099SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of multiple types of flags, including the ball output state flag described above.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

Next, we will explain the variation pattern determination table used when executing the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in Figures 12-5 to 12-11, this feature part 099SG can determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables depending on the game state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display of the special symbol.

Specifically, when the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B miss, Super reach A miss, and Super reach B miss using the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 12-5 (A). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table A, of the values that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take, 97 values are assigned to the non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the Super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach B miss fluctuation pattern 97% of the time, a super reach A miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach B miss fluctuation pattern 1% of the time.

Also, when the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss using the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 12-5 (B). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach B miss fluctuation pattern 97% of the time, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach A miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach B miss fluctuation pattern 1% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that execute the variable display (this also applies when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach Non-B Jackpot, the Super Reach A Jackpot, and the Super Reach B Jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach Non-B Jackpot, 40 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach A Jackpot, and 50 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach B Jackpot. In other words, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach non-through B jackpot fluctuation pattern 10% of the time, the Super Reach A jackpot fluctuation pattern 40% of the time, and the Super Reach B jackpot fluctuation pattern 50% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A miss, Super reach C miss, and Super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 12-6 (A). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory count for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table D. Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table D, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 80 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 15 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is one, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 80% of the time, a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 15% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in Figure 12-6 (C), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table E. Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table E, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 90% of the time, a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in Figure 12-6 (D), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A, Super reach C miss, and Super reach D miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach C miss fluctuation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super reach D miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability change state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in the probability variable state, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in the probability variable state in this feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, when the game state is a probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of a Super Reach Non-A jackpot, a Super Reach C jackpot, and a Super Reach D jackpot using jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, as shown in Figure 12-7. In addition, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach Non-A jackpot, 80 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach C jackpot, and 15 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach D jackpot. In other words, when the game state is in a probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, there is a 5% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach non-via A jackpot, an 80% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach C jackpot, and a 15% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach D jackpot.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the non-reach A miss and super reach E miss variation patterns using the miss variation pattern determination table G as shown in FIG. 12-8 (A). In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table G, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and the super reach E miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in Figure 12-8 (B), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table H. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table H, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 85 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 85% of the time, the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 10% of the time, and the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in Figure 12-8 (C), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table I. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table I, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 90% of the time, the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, and the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the shortened non-reach A miss and the super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table J. Note that, in the miss variation pattern determination table J, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and is determined to be the super reach D miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in time-saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state A in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151B).

In addition, when the game state is time-saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach Non-A jackpot and the Super Reach E jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C as shown in FIG. 12-9. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the Super Reach Non-A jackpot fluctuation pattern, and 95 values are assigned to the Super Reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game state is time-saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach Non-A jackpot fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, and the Super Reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern 95% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the non-reach B miss and the super reach D miss using the variation pattern determination table K for misses. Note that, in the variation pattern determination table I for misses, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach B miss, and 3 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach B miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super-shortened non-reach miss and the Super Reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table L, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B). In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table L, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-shortened non-reach miss, and 3 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, the variation pattern is determined to be the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of super-shortened non-reach miss and super-reach D miss using the variation pattern determination table M for miss. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table M for miss, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 99 values are assigned to the variation pattern of super-shortened non-reach miss, and one value is assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of super-shortened non-reach miss 99% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of super-reach D miss 1% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (D), the variation pattern is determined only from the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern using the miss variation pattern determination table N. In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table N, 100 values out of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined to be the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 100% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in time-saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151A for the variable display of the first special symbol, and the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151B for the variable display of the second special symbol).

In addition, when the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be only the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table D as shown in FIG. 12-11, regardless of the number of reserved memories. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table D, 100 values out of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern 100% of the time, regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Here, the period values in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG will be explained based on Figures 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in Figures 12-13 (A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state A is taken as period value α, said period value α is calculated by the value of A x a + B x b + C x c + D x d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state A, a is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A, and b is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, d is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A. Note that the change display period when the change display result in this feature part 099SG becomes a miss refers to the period from the start timing of the special pattern change display to the end timing of the change display.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-13(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state B is taken as period value β, said period value β is calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B, f is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B, and h is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B.

As shown in Figures 12-13(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the high probability state is taken as the period value γ, the period value γ is calculated by the value I x i + J x j + K x k + L x l. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state, i is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, J is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the miss, j is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, K is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the special chance state, k is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the special chance state out of 110 change displays in the special chance state, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state, and l is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state out of 110 change displays in the special chance state.

As described above, from Fig. 12-13(A) to Fig. 12-13(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A to L and a to l to calculate the period value α in the time-saving state A, the period value β in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ in the special state, the period value α will be greater than the period value β, and the period value γ will be greater than the period value β (α>β, γ>β).

In addition, attention is focused on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state each reach 1,100 times by controlling the game to be in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state multiple times. As shown in Figures 12-14(A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of 1,100 fluctuations when the game state is in time-saving state A is taken as period value α', the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d'. Here, A is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A.

As shown in Figures 12-14(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state B is taken as period value β', said period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B, f' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B, and h' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B.

As shown in Figures 12-14(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the high probability state is taken as the period value γ', the period value γ' is calculated by the value I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state, i' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, J is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the miss, j' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the variable state, k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the variable state out of 1100 variable displays in the variable state, H is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the variable state, and l' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the variable state out of 1100 variable displays in the variable state.

As described above, from Fig. 12-14(A) to Fig. 12-14(C) and Fig. 12-23, when the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A to L and a' to l' to calculate the period value α' in the time-saving state A, the period value β' in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ' in the special state, the period value α' is greater than the period value β', and the period value γ' is greater than the period value β (α'>β', γ'>β').

Next, let us look at the case where 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state. First, as shown in Figures 12-15(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., to execute 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of reserved second special symbols being three, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value δ, which is calculated as D x 110. Here, D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-15(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in time-saving state A with three second special reserved memories by the player continually shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the period value ε is calculated as H x 110. Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in time-saving state B, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-15(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability variable state with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ζ, which is calculated as L x 110. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the probability variable state, as described above.

As described above, from Figures 12-15(A) to 12-15(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra D, H, and L to calculate the period value δ in time-saving state A, the period value ε in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ in the special state, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is greater than the period value ε (δ>ε, ζ>ε).

Also, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state reaches 1100 times by controlling the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-16 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special pattern reserved memories being 3, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value δ', and the period value δ' is calculated as the value D x 1100. Here, D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-16(B) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and 1100 fluctuations are performed in time-saving state B with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ε', and the period value ε' is calculated as H x 1100. Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in time-saving state B, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-16(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special chance state with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ζ', which is calculated as L x 1100. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state, as described above.

As described above, from Figures 12-16(A) to 12-16(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra D, H, and L to calculate the period value δ' in time-saving state A, the period value ε' in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ' in the special state, the period value δ' will be greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' will be greater than the period value ε' (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

As shown in Figures 12-17(A) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state A with two second special reserved memory items, the period value η is the average fluctuation time. The period value η is calculated as C x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-17(B) and 12-23, when the player continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special pattern reserved memories being 2, if the average fluctuation time of the 110 fluctuation display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is always 2 when the fluctuation display is executed is taken as the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-17(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state with two second special reserved memory items, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ι, which is calculated as K x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-17(A) to 12-17(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra C, G, and K to calculate the period value η in time-saving state A, the period value θ in time-saving state B, and the period value ι in the special state, the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-18(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, the period value η' is taken as the average fluctuation time, and the period value η' is calculated by the value of C x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-18(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special chart reserved memories being 2, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value θ', and the period value θ' is calculated as the value of G x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-18(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1,100 fluctuations in the special probability state with two second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ι', which is calculated as K x 1,100.

As described above, from Figures 12-18(A) to 12-18(C), when the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra C, G, and K to calculate the period value η' in the time-saving state A, the period value θ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value ι' in the special state, the period value η' is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is greater than the period value θ' (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

As shown in Figures 12-19(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value κ, and the period value κ is calculated as B x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-19(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state B with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value λ, and the period value λ is calculated as F x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-19(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value μ, and the period value μ is calculated as J x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-19 (A) to 12-19 (C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra B, F, and J to calculate the period value κ in time-saving state A, the period value λ in time-saving state B, and the period value μ in the special state, the period value κ will be greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ will be greater than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-20 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state A with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value κ', which is calculated by the value of B x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-20(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value λ', and the period value λ' is calculated as F x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-20(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special probability state with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value μ', and the period value μ' is calculated as J x 1100.

As described above, from Fig. 12-20(A) to Fig. 12-20(C), when the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra B, F, and J to calculate the period value κ' in the time-saving state A, the period value λ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value μ' in the special state, the period value κ' is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ' is greater than the period value λ' (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

As shown in Figures 12-21(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ν, and the period value ν is calculated as A x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-21(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ξ. The period value ξ is calculated as E x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-21(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state, with the number of reserved second special patterns being 0, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value π, which is calculated as I x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-21(A) to 12-21(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A, E, and I to calculate the period value ν in the time-saving state A, the period value ξ in the time-saving state B, and the period value π in the special state, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-22(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of reserved second special charts is 0, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value v', which is calculated by the value of A x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-22(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ξ', and the period value ξ' is calculated as E x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-22(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the high probability state by the player constantly and continuously shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the number of reserved second special patterns is 0, the period value π' is calculated as I x 1100.

As described above, from Fig. 12-22(A) to Fig. 12-22(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A, E, and I to calculate the period value v' in the time-saving state A, the period value ξ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value π' in the special state, the period value v' will be greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π' will be greater than the period value ξ' (v'>ξ', π'>ξ').

Next, Figures 12-24(A) and 12-24(B) show the actual shooting values (number of game balls fired, number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is entered, number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is entered, number of times that the special chart 1 change display is displayed, number of times that the special chart 2 change display is displayed, total special chart 1 change time, total special chart 2 change time) in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state when a test firing test of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG was conducted for 10 hours, and the design values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtained from these actual shooting values. Note that, as shown in Figure 12-24(A), the reason the total test firing test time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is less than 10 hours is because the remaining time is in a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the actual shot value in the normal state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously shot into the left game area 2L by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, and the actual shot value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously shot into the right game area 2R by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30.

As shown in Figure 12-24 (A), in the normal state, the test firing time is 346.08 minutes, the number of balls fired is 34,580, the number of times that the special chart 1 start port wins is 1,939, the number of times that the special chart 2 start port wins is 0, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 1,883, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 0, the total special chart 1 change time is 23,840 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 0 seconds. Also, in the time-saving state A, the test firing time is 77.00 minutes, the number of balls fired is 7,676, the number of times that the special chart 1 start port wins is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start port wins is 4,371, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 658, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 3,548 seconds. In the time-saving state B, the test shot time is 14.96 minutes, the number of balls fired is 1494, the number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is won is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is won is 821, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 594, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 954 seconds. In the probability change state, the test shot time is 116.00 minutes, the number of balls fired is 11515, the number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is won is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is won is 6556, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 987, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, the design values for the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG are calculated as follows, as shown in Figure 12-24 (B): the number of game balls fired per minute in the normal state is 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 5.6 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 0 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 0 seconds. Also, the number of game balls fired per minute in time-saving state A is calculated as 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of balls fired per minute in time-saving state B is calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 54.8 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of balls fired per minute in the probability change state is calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 4.445 seconds.

When comparing the winning rates of Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and the Special Chance State, only the winning rate of Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State B is different in value, but this is due to an error caused by the number of game balls released in Time-Saving State B being less than the other two states.

Here, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in Figure 12-24.

First, as shown in Figure 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 0, the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 1, and the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 2 are calculated as 12,000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45,000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80,000 (ms) x 1/100 = 13,340 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the first special chart reserved memory number is 0 to 2 and the determination ratios of these change patterns (see Figure 12-5 (A)). In addition, the average change time at which the change display result is a miss when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80000 (ms) x 1/100 = 6550 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see Figure 12-5 (B)).

In addition, based on the normal state shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 12-25 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0 is 10%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 1 is 40%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 2 is 40%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 is 10%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is calculated as 13,340 (ms) x 10/100 + 13,340 (ms) x 40/100 + 13,340 (ms) x 40/100 + 6,550 (ms) x 10/100 = 12,661 (ms).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time A at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 is calculated as 7000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 9150 (ms) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-8(A)), and the average fluctuation time B at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 85/100 + 7000 (ms) x 10/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = The average change time C at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5550 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-8 (C)). The average change time D at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5350 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (D)).

In addition, based on the time-saving state A shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the time-saving state A, as shown in Figure 12-26 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 (a and a') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 (b and b') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 2 (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 (d and d') is 95.4545455%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α') for one fluctuation in time-saving state A is calculated as 9150 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 5550 (ms) x 2.7272727/100 + 5350 (ms) x 95.4545455/100 = 5393.636 (ms).

As shown in FIG. 12-27(A), in the time-saving state B, the average change time E at which the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special charts is 0 is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 5600 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special charts is 0 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10(A)), and the average change time F at which the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special charts is 1 is calculated as 1500 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special charts is 1 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10(B)). x 3/100 = 2205 (ms), and the average change time G at which the change display result becomes a miss when the second special chart reserved memory number is 2 is calculated from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special chart reserved memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (C)) as 1500 (ms) x 99/100 + 25000 (ms) x 1/100 = 1735 (ms), and the average change time H at which the change display result becomes a miss when the second special chart reserved memory number is 3 is calculated from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special chart reserved memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (D)) as 1500 (ms) x 100/100 = 1500 (ms).

In addition, based on the time-saving state B shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the time-saving state B, as shown in Figure 12-27 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 (e and e') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 (f and f') is 1.8181818%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 2 (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 (h and h') is 72.7272727%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in time-saving state B is calculated as 5600 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) x 1.8181818/100 + 1735 (ms) x 24.5454545/100 + 1500 (ms) x 72.7272727/100 = 1607.773 (ms).

As shown in Fig. 12-28(A), in the probability variable state, the average variable time I at which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 is calculated from the variable patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 and the determination ratio of these variable patterns (see Fig. 12-6(A)). The average change time J at which the change display result is a miss when the second special reserved memory number is 1 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 80/100 + 7000 (ms) x 15/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 50 from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special reserved memory number is 1 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (B)). The average change time K at which the change display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special charts is 2 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 40000 (ms) x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special charts is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see Figure 12-6 (C)). = 4600 (ms), and the average fluctuation time L at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 4400 (ms) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratios of these fluctuation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (D)).

In addition, based on the probability of a special chance state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the probability of a special chance state, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 (i and i') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 (j and j') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 (l and l') is 95.4545455%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the high probability state is calculated as 8200 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 4600 (ms) x 2.7272727/100 + 4400 (ms) x 95.4545455/100 = 4445.455 (ms).

In view of the above, when comparing the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-29, the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is shorter than the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A (α and α') (α>β and α'>β'), and the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is set shorter than the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the special probability state (γ and γ') (γ>β and γ'>β').

Next, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, and the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state are calculated.

12-30(A) and 12-35, if the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state A is taken as period value χ, then the period value χ is calculated as α (or α') x 110 = 5393.633 (ms) x 110 = 593299.63 (ms). If the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state B is taken as period value ψ, then the period value ψ is calculated as β (or β') x 110 = 1607.773 (ms) x 110 = 176855.03 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state is taken as the period value ω, the period value ω is calculated as γ (or γ') x 110 = 4445.455 (ms) x 110 = 489000.05 (ms).

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 110 is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the high probability state by 110 (χ>ψ and ω>ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-31(A) and 12-36, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state A is taken as period value χ', then the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α') x 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) x 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state B is taken as period value ψ', then the period value ψ' is calculated as β (or β') x 1100 = 1607.773 (ms) x 1100 = 1768550.3 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state is taken as the period value ω', the period value ω' is calculated as γ (or γ') x 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) x 1100 = 4890000.5 (ms).

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 1100 is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the high probability state by 110 (χ'>ψ' and ω'>ψ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 3 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), the period value δ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as D×110=5350 (ms)×110=588500 (ms). In addition, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as H×110=1500 (ms)×110=165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 3, is calculated as L x 110 = 4400 (ms) x 110 = 484000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is greater than the period value ε (δ > ε, ζ > ε).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special change state with 3 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), the period value δ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as D x 1100 = 5350 (ms) x 1100 = 5885000 (ms). In addition, the period value ε', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as H x 1100 = 1500 (ms) x 1100 = 1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 3, is calculated as L x 1100 = 4400 (ms) x 1100 = 4,840,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value δ' is a value larger than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is a value larger than the period value ε' (δ' > ε', ζ' > ε').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 2 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), the period value η, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as C×110=5550 (ms)×110=610500 (ms). In addition, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as G×110=1735 (ms)×110=190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, is calculated as K x 110 = 4600 (ms) x 110 = 506000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is a value greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value greater than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 2 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), the period value η', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as C x 1100 = 5550 (ms) x 1100 = 6105000 (ms). In addition, the period value θ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as G x 1100 = 1735 (ms) x 1100 = 1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, is calculated as K x 1100 = 4600 (ms) x 1100 = 5,060,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-18, the period value η' is a value greater than the period value θ', and the period value ι' is a value greater than the period value θ' (η' > θ', ι' > θ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with one second special reserved memory is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), the period value κ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as B x 110 = 5750 (ms) x 110 = 632500 (ms). In addition, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as F x 110 = 2205 (ms) x 110 = 242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 1, is calculated as J x 110 = 5000 (ms) x 110 = 550,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ is greater than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with one second special reserved memory is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), the period value κ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as B x 1100 = 5750 (ms) x 1100 = 6325000 (ms). In addition, the period value λ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as F x 1100 = 2205 (ms) x 1100 = 2425500 (ms). Then, the period value μ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 1, is calculated as J x 1100 = 5000 (ms) x 1100 = 5500000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ' is a value larger than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is a value larger than the period value λ' (κ' > λ', μ' > λ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 0 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), the period value ν, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as B×110=9150 (ms)×110=1006500 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as E×110=5600 (ms)×110=616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 0, is calculated as I x 110 = 8200 (ms) x 110 = 902000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state with 0 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), the period value ν', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as B x 1100 = 9150 (ms) x 1100 = 10,065,000 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as E x 1100 = 5,600 (ms) x 1100 = 6,160,000 (ms). Then, the period value π', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 0, is calculated as I x 1100 = 8200 (ms) x 1100 = 9020000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value v' is a value greater than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is a value greater than the period value ξ' (v' > ξ', π' > ξ').

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, when comparing the time required for 110 fluctuations to be displayed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the special probability state, as shown in FIG. 12-30(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuations to be displayed is set to be the shortest in time-saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). Also, when comparing the time required for 1100 fluctuations to be displayed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the special probability state, as shown in FIG. 12-30(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuations to be displayed is also set to be the shortest in time-saving state B (χ'>ψ', ω'>ψ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 12-34 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 12-34 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, and the number of second special reserved memories is one, as shown in Figure 12-33 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, and the number of second special reserved memories is one, as shown in Figure 12-33 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state, and the number of second special reserved memories is two, as shown in Figure 12-32 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state, and the number of second special reserved memories is two, as shown in Figure 12-32 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state, and the number of second special reserved memories is three, as shown in Figure 12-31 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state, and the number of second special reserved memories is three, as shown in Figure 12-31 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

In other words, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B and special probability state in this feature part 099SG, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2, and when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3, time-saving state B is set to have the highest special pattern fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is shortest). In addition, even when the player plays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or the special chance state without worrying about the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (when the display changes 110 or 1100 times at each reserved memory number at the ratios shown in Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B), and Figure 12-28 (B)), the time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average display time required for one change is the shortest).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 099SG, in addition to the time-saving state (time-saving state A) and the probability variable state of conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to control the time-saving state B, which has a higher fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern than the time-saving state A and the probability variable state, making it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko game machine, even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, which is about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)) after the jackpot is reached, the machine is not controlled to time-saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 099SG. At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability denominator, so the player continues playing for a long time without a jackpot, and investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG that can be controlled to the time-saving state B, after the end of the jackpot, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in the low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine is controlled to the time-saving state B, and the variable display is controlled to the time-saving state B for a specific number of times (e.g., 1100 times, or up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability, so the player has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and has invested a lot. However, by being controlled to the time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot occurring increases, so the decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed.

In particular, in feature 099SG, the player has already invested a great deal of time and money by the time the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, so time-saving state B functions as a game state that rescues the player, so to speak, by executing the variable display of a miss in as short a time as possible to shorten the period until the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in feature part 099SG, regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is fixed and consumed in any state between 0 and 3, in the case of time-saving state B, the fluctuation efficiency is the highest compared to time-saving state A or the special probability state, and in addition, the execution rate of the various effects (for example, pre-reading preview effects such as countdown preview, reserve change preview, pattern chance preview, effect display preview, and preview effects such as moving object preview, character preview, reach preview, button preview, etc.) described in Figure 11-36 of feature part 069SG (and the drawing showing the feature points related to said Figure 11-36) is lower than the execution rate of the various effects in time-saving state A or the special probability state (the execution rate of the various effects in feature part 099SG is the same as the execution rate of the various effects described in Figure 11-36 of feature part 069SG). Therefore, even if a player continues playing for a long time without hitting a jackpot and is feeling depressed due to increased investment, when controlled to time-saving state B, even if the number of reserved memories is fixed at any state between 0 and 3, or the fluctuation is absorbed at any state between 0 and 3, the fluctuation can be efficiently absorbed with little unnecessary excitement, so that an optimal time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Fig. 12-15, Fig. 12-17, Fig. 12-19, Fig. 12-21, the average fluctuation time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state is multiplied by 110 to calculate and compare the values. This indicates that the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays (total time of 110 fluctuation displays) out of the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is shorter than the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A and the high probability state. If the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is the same (or approximately the same) period as the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A and the high probability state, the consumption time of 1100 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B will take several times the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B, and it is considered that when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, the consumption time will be prolonged, causing discomfort and dissatisfaction to the player. Therefore, the present invention aims to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when controlled to time-saving state B by increasing the fluctuation efficiency in time-saving state B more than time-saving state A or the high probability state, and as a result, to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can conveniently control the gaming state to time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Fig. 12-16, Fig. 12-18, Fig. 12-20, Fig. 12-22, the average fluctuation time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state are multiplied by 1100 to calculate and compare the values. This is because, by controlling the time-saving state A or the high probability state multiple times, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the high probability state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time-saving state B, and by comparing the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the time-saving state B, and the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the high probability state, it is shown that the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency, and it is shown that the fluctuation display can be suitably controlled to the time-saving state B so as not to cause dissatisfaction to the player.

This shows that by controlling the time-saving state A or the high probability state multiple times, when the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the high probability state is executed 1,100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B is designed to have the highest fluctuation efficiency, and therefore the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency even when compared to the time-saving state A or the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid dissatisfaction with the fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and as a result, it is preferably controlled to the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the special probability state, by 110. Therefore, since the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state A and the special probability state, the period until control is exerted into the jackpot game state can be shortened, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction in the time-shortened state B, and as a result, a preferable time-shortened state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in the time-saving state A or the high probability state, the period until the game is controlled to the jackpot game state can be shortened, reducing the player's dissatisfaction, and in the time-saving state A or the high probability state controlled via the jackpot game (the time-saving state A or the high probability state in which a fluctuation display with a longer special chart fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than in the time-saving state B), a predetermined presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state during the fluctuation display can be executed for an appropriate period of time.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the special probability state, by 1100. Therefore, since the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state A and the special probability state, the period until control is exerted into the jackpot game state can be shortened, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction in the time-shortened state B, and as a result, a preferable time-shortened state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in the time-saving state A or the high probability state, the period until the game is controlled to the jackpot game state can be shortened, reducing the player's dissatisfaction, and in the time-saving state A or the high probability state controlled via the jackpot game (the time-saving state A or the high probability state in which a fluctuation display with a longer special chart fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than in the time-saving state B), a predetermined presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state during the fluctuation display can be executed for an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ξ' is set to be smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value λ' is set smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value θ' is set smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ε is set smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ε' is set smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG can display the normal symbol as well as the special symbol, and when the normal symbol display result is a win (normal symbol win), a game ball can enter the second start winning port that has changed from a closed state to an open state. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 has a first special symbol reservation memory part 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation memory part 099SG151B that can display the first special symbol based on the game ball entering the first start winning port, and can display the second special symbol based on the game ball entering the second start winning port, and can store information on the special symbol display that has not yet been executed as reservation memory. The maximum number of reserved memories is set to four for both the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved memories does not change depending on the game status.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 12-2 (B) and Fig. 12-2 (D), the probability of a normal winning pattern occurring in the variable display of the normal pattern is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal winning pattern occurs is set to 3 seconds, which is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and when the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, the game ball shot out by the launching device toward the second path in the right game area can win (enter) the gate 41 or the second start winning hole. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG, many of the gameplay characteristics can be made common whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to the large difference in gameplay between time-saving state A and time-saving state B.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, when the game state is either the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state, the average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation display to the end timing of the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display result is a miss, and each period value is calculated by multiplying the calculated average fluctuation time by "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation displays when the game state is either the special probability state, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average fluctuation time may be calculated as the period from the time when the game ball is shot out or the time when the shot game ball enters the start winning slot to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the start winning, and each period value may be calculated by multiplying the calculated average fluctuation time by "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation displays when the game state is either the special probability state, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state. By doing this, it is possible to obtain the period value for each game state more appropriately through measurement.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, and as shown in Figure 12-13, each period value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is calculated by the total value obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed by each reserved memory number out of 110 variable displays by the average variable time of each reserved memory number, so that an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the reserved memory number.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A is α, the period value α is calculated by the value of A×a+B×b+C×c+D×d. Here, A is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, and b is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A, c is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, and d is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α of the time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B is β, the period value β is calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h. Here, E is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, e is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, and f is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B. , G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state B, g is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and h is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β of the time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the probability variable state is γ, the period value γ is calculated by the value of I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l. Here, I is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state, i is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 100, and j is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state. , K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state, k is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state of the 110 variable displays of the variable state, L is the average time when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 110 variable displays of the variable state of the variable state of the 110 variable displays of the variable state of the variable state of the 110. By calculating the period value γ in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ of the variable state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, and as shown in Figure 12-14, each period value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is calculated by the total value obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed by each reserved memory number out of 1,100 variable displays by the average variable time of each reserved memory number, so that an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the reserved memory number.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A is α', the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d'. Here, A is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A, and b' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α' of the time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B is β', the period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h'. Here, E is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, e' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, and f' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B. , G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and h' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β' of the time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the probability variable state is γ', the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l'. Here, I is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state, i' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to become a miss, and j' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state. , K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state, k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state, L is the average time when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state, and l' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state. By calculating the period value γ' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ' of the variable state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

As described above, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B and special probability state in this feature part 099SG, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2, and when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3, time-saving state B is set to have the highest special pattern fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is shortest). In addition, even when the player plays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or the special chance state without worrying about the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (when the display changes 110 or 1100 times at each reserved memory number at the ratios shown in Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B), and Figure 12-28 (B)), the time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average display time required for one change is the shortest).

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state are multiplied by 110 or 1100 to compare the values obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the values multiplied by the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state may be values other than 110 or 1099, such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state by 109 or 1099 is that the first fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state almost always starts with the number of reserved memories at 0. In addition, if the final 5 fluctuations of the 3 states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and high probability state, or the 2 states of time-saving state A and high probability state are to be fluctuations with a higher percentage of longer special chart fluctuation times than other fluctuations, the value may be multiplied by 104 or 1094, etc., excluding the total of 6 fluctuations, the first fluctuation and the final 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the characteristic part 018SG will be described based on Fig. 13-1 to Fig. 13-23. Fig. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern in the characteristic part 018SG. Fig. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state (A), and a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state (B). Note that in this characteristic part 018SG, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069SG and 099SG are omitted, and differences are mainly described. In addition, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 069SG or the characteristic part 099SG.

Figure 13-1 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 018SG. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β variation pattern is set to be longer (80 seconds) than that of the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds). On the other hand, the super reach γ miss variation pattern is a miss variation pattern for a high base as described below, so the variable display period is set to be shorter (40 seconds) than that of the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 13-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the game state is normal (low base state). When the variable display result is "jackpot" in the normal state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, when the game state is low base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the determination rate increases in the order of normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern). Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

Also, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

Figure 13-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state (high base state). When the variable display result is a "jackpot" in the time-saving state (high base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot) and PB1-4 (the fluctuation pattern of a super reach gamma jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, when the game state is in a high base state and the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determination rate increases in the order of normal reach, followed by super reach gamma.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", then miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using that miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern). Specifically, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

(About the various performances)
Next, various effects executed in the super reach effect will be explained based on Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-5. Fig. 13-3 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, β, and γ. Fig. 13-4 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the miss fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, β, and γ. Fig. 13-5 (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the character types.

Although not specifically shown, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a normal reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "N reach performance") as a variable display performance based on the fact that the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode. After that, the CPU 120 ends the variable display of decorative symbols without progressing to a super reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP reach performance").

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the Super Reach variable pattern, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C during the period (ta0 to ta1) from the timing ta0 at which the variable display begins until a predetermined period has elapsed (see Figure 13-9 (N1)). Note that, as the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 during this period (ta0 to ta1), in the low base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of normal background effects, and in the high base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of music. By combining the light emission patterns corresponding to the multiple types of normal background effects and the light emission patterns corresponding to the multiple types of music with light emission patterns corresponding to various SP Reach effects, the performance effect can be enhanced by a variety of light emission patterns.

At timing ta1, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since timing ta0 when the variable display started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach display mode, and an "N reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for the predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super reach display mode, and an "SP reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for the predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

In this way, the "N reach performance" is a common performance that is executed in both the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it ends without progressing to the "SP reach performance", while in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, it progresses to the "SP reach performance". Therefore, even in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the player can expect the "N reach performance" to progress to the "SP reach performances A to E" described below by executing the "N reach performance".

As shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, "SP Reach Effects A to E" are effects that notify whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, that is, whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss", and during the SP Reach effect period, a "decisive effect" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in Figure 13-3, if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the end of "SP Reach Effects A to E", a "post-effect" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7), and then the variable display ends. In this way, the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern of SP Reach α, β, and γ is composed of a variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern, and a post-effect part (ta5 to ta7) that notifies the expected number of balls that can be won in the jackpot game state after the variable display part ends.

As shown in FIG. 13-4, if the variable display result is a miss, the variable display ends with the end of "SP Reach Effects A to E". After the miss notification ends (ta5 to ta5A), the screen returns to the normal background screen with the fixed decorative pattern of the specified reach combination that is not a jackpot combination temporarily stopped (shaking) and temporarily stopped until the pattern confirmation period begins.

Next, we will explain the various effects executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern. As shown in Figure 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect A" is executed as the SP reach effect, when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect B" or "SP reach effect C" is executed as the SP reach effect, and when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect D" or "SP reach effect E" is executed as the SP reach effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), in "SP reach performances B to E" other than "SP reach performance A", ally character A-1, ally character A-2 different from ally character A-1, enemy character X-1, and enemy character X-2 different from enemy character X-1 can appear. Note that the number of types of ally characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and ally characters and enemy characters other than those described above may also be allowed to appear. Also, even for the same character, the expectation level may differ depending on the display mode.

"SP Reach Presentation A" is executed when the SP Reach α fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a video image of a bowling challenge is displayed. When all the pins fall, a "jackpot" is announced, and when all the pins do not fall, a "miss" is announced. Note that friendly characters A-1, A-2 and enemy characters X-1, X-2 are not displayed in the bowling challenge video.

"SP Reach Presentation B" is executable when the SP Reach β fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the city is displayed. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Presentation C" is executable when the SP Reach β fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 face off in the city is displayed. When ally character A-2 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-2 fails to defeat enemy character X-2 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Presentation D" is executable when the SP Reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is either Time-saving State A, High-chance State, or Time-saving State B (high base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle B" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the wilderness is displayed. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach E" is executable when the SP Reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is either Time-saving state A, High probability state, or Time-saving state B (high base state), and is an effect that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 face off in the wilderness. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-2 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

In addition, since the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern has a higher chance of a jackpot than the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance C have a higher chance of a jackpot than SP Reach performance A (jackpot chance: SP Reach performance A < SP Reach performance B < SP Reach performance C).

The "decisive effect" is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., ta3 to ta5) from the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effects A to E (e.g., timing ta3 when the final bowling or battle showdown begins just before the end of the SP reach effect). Specifically, it includes a "win/lose button effect" that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective operation period when operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, and a "movable body effect" that is executed when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without operation of the push button 31B being detected.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is an effect in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. If the variable display result is a miss, it is not executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected.

In addition, in response to the execution of the movable body effect (the fall of the movable body 32), an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a light effect is performed in which the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 are illuminated in a predetermined light color (for example, in rainbow colors), a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B, and a sound effect is performed in which a predetermined sound effect is output.

In addition, in SP Reach performance A, friendly characters and enemy characters are not displayed in the bowling showdown, so no characters are displayed in the moving body performance, whereas in SP Reach performances B to E, friendly characters and enemy characters are displayed in the battle showdown, so the enemy characters displayed in the battle showdown are displayed in the moving body performance.

In this way, in the "decisive effect," if the variable display result is a jackpot, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the jackpot, and if the variable display result is a miss, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the miss effect is not executed, but instead the movable body effect is executed.

"Post-performance A" is executed after the SP reach performances A to C notify that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display result is a jackpot in the normal game state (low base state). Specifically, in the SP reach performances A to C, the determined decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify the determined jackpot, and then the determined decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed again in a re-selection variable part (ta5 to ta6), and the display result is notified by the determined decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the re-variable display is executed in the re-selection variable part (ta6 to ta7). The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-performance A is set to "10 seconds".

In this embodiment, in the SP reach performances A to C, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers (such as 666) is temporarily displayed, and after the re-variable display begins in the re-draw variable part, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers or a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd numbers is displayed in the re-draw result part. If a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers is displayed in the re-draw result part, it is announced that there is a "jackpot A" that will be controlled to the time-saving state A after the jackpot game state ends, and if a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd numbers is displayed (pattern promotion), it is announced that there is a "jackpot B" that will be controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in the post-performance A of the SP reach performance A, since no characters appear in the SP reach performance A, no characters appear in the post-performance A either. In addition, in the post-performance A of the SP reach performances B and C, characters appear in the SP reach performances B and C, but no characters appear in the post-performance A. By doing this, even when the SP reach performance A in which no characters appear is executed, the post-performance A is executed in a manner in which no characters appear, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

"Post-performance B" is executed after it is notified that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state in the SP reach performances D and E when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B (high base state). Specifically, in the SP reach performances D and E, the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify the confirmed jackpot, and then the planned ball output addition part (ta5 to ta6) in which the number of planned balls is added and displayed as the ally character that appeared in the SP reach performances D and E attacks the enemy character, and the planned ball output notification part (ta6 to ta7) in which the planned ball output number is displayed and notified after the ally character delivers a final blow to the enemy character, and then the fixed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combination are displayed and notified, and the variable display ends. Furthermore, the execution period of post-performance B (ta5 to ta7) is set to 15 seconds, which is longer than the execution period of post-performance A.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach α is 45 seconds, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach β is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. In other words, the variable display part periods are shorter in the order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β > SP reach α > SP reach γ).

In addition, the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs is different for SP Reach α, β, and γ, and the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs for SP Reach γ is shorter than the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs for SP Reach α and β (ta0 to ta1; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

In addition, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach α, β, and γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach γ is shorter than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach α and β (ta1 to ta2; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

In addition, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP reach effects A to E in SP Reach α, β, and γ are different, with the execution periods being longer in the order of SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E), SP reach α (SP reach effect A), and SP reach β (SP reach effects B, C) {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach effect D, E) < SP reach α (SP reach effect A) < SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C)}.

In addition, the variable display part period of SP Reach γ (40 seconds) is shorter than the variable display part period of SP Reach α (45 seconds) and the variable display part period of SP Reach β (80 seconds) (variable display period; SP Reach β > SP Reach α > SP Reach γ), while in SP Reach γ (SP Reach performances D and E), after the final performance ends, the fixed decoration patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combinations are displayed in each decoration pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-event performance B until the winning combination is reached is longer than the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-event performance A from the end of the deciding performance in SP reach α (SP reach performance A) and SP reach β (SP reach performance B, C) until the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined winning combination are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5 to ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds) > SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

In addition, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decisive performance" in SP reach performances A to E is common to SP reach performances A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach performance A = SP reach performance B = SP reach performance C = SP reach performance D = SP reach performance E). Therefore, the control data of the movable body 32, movable body LED 208, etc. in SP reach performances A to E can be common, which reduces manufacturing costs. Furthermore, the execution period of the "win/lose button performance" in the "decisive performance" and the execution period of the "movable body performance" are also common to SP reach performances A to E.

The execution period of "Post-performance A, B" in SP Reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, from timing ta5 when the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP Reach performances A to E, to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7). This makes it easier to recognize the timing when the post-performance is executed, and an example of a form that can increase attention to post-performance A and B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "Post-performance A, B" may be executed during the pattern determination period that begins after the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, or during the jackpot fanfare period.

The variable display period of the SP Reach γ for a high base is shorter than that of the SP Reach β for a low base (ta0 to ta7: SP Reach γ < SP Reach β), and the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP Reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP Reach β to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (ta4 to ta7; SP Reach γ > SP Reach β). In this way, in the SP Reach γ that is executed in a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced by lengthening the period after the end of the "movable body performance".

In addition, the execution periods (ta5-ta7) of the "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C are all the same, and the execution periods (ta5-ta7) of the "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E are all the same. By doing this, it is easier to reuse the control data for post-performances A and B, and especially the character movement control data for post-performance B, which helps reduce manufacturing costs.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C is all the same, and the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E is all the same, but the execution period of "post-performance A" (10 seconds) is different from the execution period of "post-performance B" (15 seconds). By making the execution period of post-performance A corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C common, it is easier to standardize the performance content and control, which reduces manufacturing costs, and by executing post-performance B, which has a different execution period, it is possible to prevent post-performances A and B from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the post-performances.

(SP Reach Effects A to E and Post Effects A and B Operation Modes)
Next, the operation of the SP reach performances A to E and the post-performances A and B when the variable display result is a jackpot will be explained with reference to Fig. 13-6. Fig. 13-6 shows (A) the display mode of the characters in the SP reach performances A to E, (B) the lighting patterns of the LEDs in the SP reach performances A to E, and (C) the output patterns of the background music and sound effects in the SP reach performances A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), the display mode of characters in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling competition or battle competition in the SP reach performance, no characters are displayed in SP reach performance A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance B, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance E. In this way, SP reach performance A is a performance in which no characters are displayed, whereas SP reach performances B to E are performances in which characters are displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/lose button effect" of the deciding effect in the SP reach effect, no characters are displayed in any of the SP reach effects A to E, while during the execution period of the "moving body effect", no characters are displayed in SP reach effect A, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect B, the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect C, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect D, and the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect E.

In addition, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the jackpot confirmation notification in the SP reach performance, no characters are displayed in SP reach performance A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance B, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance E.

In addition, in the re-drawing variable part (ta5-ta6) and the re-drawing result part (ta6-ta7) in the post-performance A corresponding to the SP reach performances A-C, in the SP reach performance A, no characters are displayed, in the SP reach performance B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in the SP reach performance C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

In addition, in the planned ball output addition part (ta5-ta6) and the planned ball output notification part (ta6-ta7) in the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performances D and E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed in the SP reach performance D, and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed in the SP reach performance E.

In this way, in SP Reach Performance A, no characters are displayed in the bowling showdown, so no characters are displayed in the moving body performance or post-performance A, whereas in SP Reach Performances B to E, enemy characters who face off against friendly characters in the battle showdown are displayed in the moving body performance and post-performances A and B.

In other words, in SP reach performance A, an image related to the bowling competition (an image in which no character is displayed) is displayed in the moving body performance before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, and in SP reach performances B to E, an image related to the battle competition (an image of the enemy character being faced off against) is displayed in the moving body performance before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, thereby enhancing the correlation between SP reach performances A to E and the moving body performances executed during the performance period of the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in SP reach performance A, an image of a mode related to SP reach performance A (an image in which characters are not displayed) is displayed in post-performance A, and in SP reach performances D and E, an image of a mode related to SP reach performances D and E (images of the friendly character and enemy character that were facing off) is displayed in post-performance B, thereby enhancing the correlation between SP reach performances A, D, and E and post-performances A and B which are executed after the end of SP reach performances A, D, and E.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6 (B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in SP reach performances A-E will be explained. The numbers in parentheses for each pattern (e.g. B100, etc.) indicate the extended commands explained in feature section 069SG. Furthermore, the various light emission patterns explained below differ from the other light emission patterns in at least one of multiple elements, such as light color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting duration, lighting timing, lighting duration, blinking cycle, etc., and each light emission pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach performance, in SP reach performance A, lighting is performed in lighting pattern LP1-1 based on extension command B100, in SP reach performance B and C, lighting is performed in lighting pattern LP1-2 based on extension command B101, and in SP reach performance D and E, lighting is performed in lighting pattern LP1-3 based on extension command B102.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach effect, one of the light emission patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4 common to the SP reach effects A to E is lit based on the extended commands B200 to B203. Note that one of the light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expected results increasing in the order of light emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable body performance" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit up with the common lighting pattern LP3-1 based on the extension command B000.In addition, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit up with the common lighting pattern LP3-1 based on the extension command B300.

In addition, in the re-drawing variation part in post-performance A and the planned ball addition part in post-performance B (ta5 to ta6), in SP reach performances A to C, the lights are lit with the common lighting pattern LP4-1 based on the extension command BA00, and in SP reach performances D and E, the lights are lit with the common lighting pattern LP4-4 based on the extension command BB00.

In addition, in the re-draw result part in post-performance A and the planned ball release notification part in post-performance B (ta6 to ta7), in SP reach performances A to C, the lights are lit in the common lighting pattern LP4-2 based on the extension command BA01, or the common lighting pattern LP4-3 based on the extension command BA02, and in SP reach performances D and E, the lights are lit in the common lighting pattern LP4-5 based on the extension command BB01, or the common lighting pattern LP4-6 based on the extension command BB02.

The above-mentioned light emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on the light emission control data described below, and an overview of each light emission pattern is given below. Note that the parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern indicate the extended commands.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(A), in the "Bowling/Battle" game, the illumination pattern LP1-1 (B100) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs (frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12) and the LEDs on the game board (movable body LED 208) illuminate in accordance with the introduction of the reach title and the moving image of the bowling battle (see FIG. 13-10). The illumination pattern LP1-2 (B101) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board illuminate in colors based on the colors of the town background when the reach title is introduced, and further in accordance with the colors of the allies A-1/A-2 , the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions (attack moves, etc.) of enemies X-1/X-2 (see Figs. 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and lighting pattern LP1-3 (B102) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in colors based on the title introduction and the colors of the wilderness background, and further the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions (attack moves, etc.) of ally A-1 and enemies X-1/X-2 (see Figs. 13-12 (A4) and (A5)).

In the "Win/lose button presentation," lighting pattern LP2-1 (B200) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the message "Keep pressing the button to build up power!", and then the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in the default white color (see Figure 13-13), lighting pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for powering up when the button is pressed (first stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "blue" (see Figure 13-13), lighting pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for powering up when the button is pressed (second stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "green" (see Figure 13-13), and lighting pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for powering up when the button is pressed (third stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "red" (see Figure 13-13). The light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 change in stages from blue to green to red (MAX) depending on the player's long press operation (the amount of fill in the gauge display).

In the "Miss Notification" mode, the light-emitting pattern LP3-1 (B300) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board emit a low-luminance white light when a "Miss" is notified in the result notification, and continues until the next variation starts even after the display screen returns to the normal background (see Figure 13-16).

In the "movable body presentation & jackpot notification", the light-emitting pattern LP3-2 (B000) is a pattern in which, when a "jackpot" is notified in the result notification, in the movable body presentation (first period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in a color that matches the background during the movable body presentation, and in the movable body presentation (second period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in a rainbow color during the jackpot notification (see Figures 13-14 and 13-15). Note that the extended command (B000), unlike other extended commands, has both operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor drive) for operating the movable body 32 and gradation control data for lighting the frame LED and the LED on the game board.

In addition, by making the extension command B000 a common extension command for movable body operation control and LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extension commands for movable body operation control and the extension commands for LED lighting control, which reduces the program capacity for performance control. If the extension commands used for movable body performance were separated into extension commands for movable body operation control and extension commands for LED lighting control, there is a risk that one of the extension commands will be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to perform movable body performances optimally.

In addition, by controlling the movement of the moving body and the lighting of the LEDs with a single extended command rather than separating the extended commands for "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification", it is no longer necessary to separate the extended commands according to the performance, and the program capacity for performance control can be reduced. If the extended commands for "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification" were separate, there would be a risk that one of the extended commands would be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to optimally perform "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification".

In "redraw variation/planned ball addition," lighting pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the moving image in the background (round and round) (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and lighting pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the KED on the game board light up in a color based on the color of the space background, and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions of ally A-1 (such as an attacking move) (see Figure 13-18).

In the "Redraw Result/Scheduled Ball Release Notification", the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up when an even number symbol combination (e.g., 666, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), the light-emitting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up with a higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 when an odd number symbol combination (e.g., 333, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the light-emitting pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled ball release notification "750", The frame LED and LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the display of "750", and until "750" is displayed, this is a pattern in which the same gradation control data as "1500" is used (see Figure 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)). The light-emitting pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the expected ball release notification "1500", and the frame LED and LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the display of "1500" with a higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than when "750" is displayed, and until "1500" is displayed, this is a pattern in which the same gradation control data as "750" is used (see Figure 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, during the execution of SP reach performances A to E, in the later period after the movable body performance, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation notification as a later period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is common (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, so that the jackpot confirmation notification is executed with a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, further reducing manufacturing costs.

The light emission pattern may be different depending on the type of SP reach performance A to E. For example, the light emission pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance A may be the rainbow lighting pattern (smooth rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-21, the light emission pattern LP3-2 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance B and C may be the rainbow blinking pattern (flash rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-22, and the light emission pattern LP3-3 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance D and E may change from the rainbow blinking pattern (flash rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-22 to the rainbow lighting pattern (smooth rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-21.

In addition, the lighting patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball output addition part of post-performance B are common to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E (lighting pattern LP4-4), so the lighting patterns can also be standardized, further reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball release notification part of post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E are the same, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-performance A corresponding to SP reach performance A are different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E. This further reduces manufacturing costs, and by executing post-performance A with a different light emission pattern, the performance effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the illumination pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the same illumination pattern LP3-2 even when the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 may be made to illuminate in different illumination patterns depending on the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed. In this way, the illumination state can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach performance is shared between SP reach performances B and C, with lighting pattern LP1-2 being used in common. For example, SP reach performance B uses lighting pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-1, lights up in accordance with the action) and SP reach C uses lighting pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-2, lights up in accordance with the action). By using the same brightness data for part of the LED lighting pattern (city background color part) for SP reach performances B and C to reduce development costs, while using dedicated brightness data for the parts relating to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, it is possible to create a difference in appearance at a minimum cost.

SP Reach performances D and E share the same lighting pattern LP1-3, but for example, SP Reach performance D uses lighting pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-1's image color, lights up in accordance with the action) and SP Reach E uses lighting pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-2's image color, lights up in accordance with the action). By using the same brightness data for part of the LED lighting patterns for SP Reach performances D and E (town background color part) to keep development costs down, while using dedicated brightness data for the parts related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, it is possible to create a difference in appearance at the lowest possible cost.

In addition, one of the SP reach performances B and C in the low base state and the SP reach performances D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach performances D and E) may be a common lighting pattern, and the other (for example, SP reach performances B and C) may be a different lighting pattern. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing costs of one while favorably showing the difference in the performances in the other.

(Gradation control data)
Here, we will briefly explain the control data for realizing the light emission performance. Figure 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. Figure 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, the "RGB" data output to each LED in the frame LED is sparsely specified with various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 40 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on a data table for smooth rainbow light emission, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in the colors of the rainbow.

As shown in FIG. 13-22, the "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED is specified as brightness data corresponding to a 20 msec off period between various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on a data table of flash rainbow light emission, causing the frame lamps to light up intensely in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a light emission control table that the performance control CPU 120 uses to control the light emission of each LED. The light emission control table defines, for example, the correspondence between light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), driver IDs, output terminal numbers, electrical components, and light emission control generation data.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emission pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitter driver, the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitter driver output terminal, the electrical component stores the light emitter driver and the electrical component corresponding to the output terminal number (e.g., frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, movable body LED 208, etc.), and the light emission control generation data stores data for controlling a serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and data used to generate light emission control data based on a control data format.

Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission period, a unit light emission time, a light emission control period, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table, the format type stores identification information ("basic" or "extended") indicating which format is to be applied between the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1), the address stores an address to be set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit to be applied to the light emitter driver, the data transmission period stores the period for transmitting light emission control data from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emission time stores the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. In this embodiment, the data transmission period is described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

The light emission control period stores the time that is the control unit for one period of light emission (hereinafter, this period will be referred to as the "light emission control period"). This light emission control period differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, if the light emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and if the light emission type is "switching" (such as light emission of a special light color (rainbow color) with multiple color changes), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The format data stores time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, the format data defines a correspondence between the light emission sequence and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission sequence.

In this embodiment, the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In color hexadecimal, RGB is expressed as two digits each for a total of six hexadecimal digits (0-F) to represent "16 x 16 = 256 gradations." However, in this specification, the two digits for each of RGB are the same value, and the notation is abbreviated to one digit each for a total of three digits, and is illustrated and explained. For simplicity, the notation "0x" that represents hexadecimal is omitted in the illustrations and explanations.

The Q data includes Q data for group 1, Q data for group 2, and Q data for group 3, which are output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver corresponding to the address. The Q data corresponding to each group stores the RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in that group.

A more specific explanation will be given. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is stipulated that data is transmitted from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Also, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is stipulated that the target LED emits light for a unit light emission time of 100 ms. Also, if the light emission control cycle is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and in order to cause continuous light emission of a specific color, the same time as the unit light emission time is stipulated as the light emission control cycle.

For example, in the format data, the light emission sequence is set to "1" through "N," and if the Q data (RGB values) for each group is set to "0, 0, F" for each of the light emission sequences "1" through "N," then the R and G values of the Q data are set to "0," and the B value is set to "F" for all light emission sequences, achieving continuous blue light emission.

Next, we will explain the control data for controlling the gradation of the LED to achieve light emission by mixing colors. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data explained here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the light emission control generation data described above.

Figure 13-22 shows an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow blinking in the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.). Note that the gradation control data for the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is not shown because it is the same as the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit emission time Δtn, and the right column shows the Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 (9L4), ...) expressed in hexadecimal.

In addition, in the light emission sequence 2 of the gradation control data shown in Figure 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 20 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 to 12 (9L1 to 9L12) is set to "0, 0, 0", thereby turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In addition, in the light emission sequence 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 30 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 and 2 are "0, 4, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 3 is "0, 8, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 4 is "0, C, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 5 is "0, F, D", the Q data (RGB values) of group 6 is "0, F, 9", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 7 is "0 , F, 5", the Q data (RGB values) of group 8 is "0, F, 1", the Q data (RGB values) of group 9 is "2, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 10 is "6, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 11 is "A, F, 0", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 12 is "F, F, 0", thereby achieving emission of different emission colors (different from the emission color of emission order 3) from frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to switch between multiple colors in sequence over a short switching unit light emission time Δts, and by interposing control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, the colors can be visually perceived as flashing in rainbow colors by humans. Note that the interposing mode is not limited to turning off the lights, and can be, for example, white, which does not constitute a rainbow color. When emitting white light, low luminance RGB values such as "1, 1, 1" can be set so as not to impede the recognition of the colors that constitute the rainbow.

Figure 13-21 illustrates an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow lighting of frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.).

The gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 differs from the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 in that the control for turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 is not inserted in between. This allows the human eye to visually perceive the lights as if they were lit in rainbow colors. In the light emission sequence 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the same light emission colors as those of the light emission sequence 2 of the gradation control data are achieved. Also, with the gradation control data, the light emission colors emitted by the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are controlled to be switched between multiple colors in sequence in the short switching unit light emission time Δts, allowing the human eye to visually perceive the lights as if they were lit in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6 (C), the output patterns of background music and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. Furthermore, the various sound patterns explained below differ from other sound patterns in at least one of multiple elements such as volume, sound quality, rhythm, tempo, and music, and each sound pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach performance, in SP reach performance A, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-1, in SP reach performance B, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-2, in SP reach performance C, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-3, in SP reach performance D, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-4, and in SP reach performance E, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-5.

In addition, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" in the SP Reach Presentation, common sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output for SP Reach Presentations A to E. Note that one of sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expected results increasing in the order of sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4.

In addition, during the execution period of the "moving body effect" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, background music and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3-3 in the SP reach performances A to E. In addition, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach performance, the common sound patterns BP3-1 to BP3-3 are lit up in the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in the re-drawing variation part in post-performance A and the planned ball addition part in post-performance B (ta5 to ta6), sound pattern BP4-1 is output in SP reach performances A to C, and background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-4 in SP reach performances D and E.

In addition, in the re-draw result part in post-performance A and the planned ball release notification part in post-performance B (ta6 to ta7), background music and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-2 or sound pattern BP4-3 in SP reach performances A to C, and background music and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6 in SP reach performances D and E.

The above sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 are patterns that output sounds in different ways based on the sound control data, and an overview of each sound pattern is provided below.

As shown in Figure 13-7 (B), in "Bowling/Battle", sound pattern BP1-1 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance A is introduced, the voice "Knock down the pins!", and the background music for SP reach performance A are output (see Figure 13-10), sound pattern BP1-2 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance B is introduced, the voice "Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next time!", the background music for SP reach performance B, and battle sound effects are output (see Figure 13-11 (A2)), and sound pattern BP1-3 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance C is introduced, the voice "Fight!", and the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next time!" sound pattern BP1-4 is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-2 at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach performance D, the voice of ally A-1 saying "Fight!", the BGM for SP reach performance D, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A4)), and sound pattern BP1-5 is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-2 at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach performance E, the voice of ally A-1 saying "Fight!", the BGM for SP reach performance E, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A5)).

In the "win/lose button effect," sound pattern BP2-1 is a pattern in which the voice "keep pressing the button to build up power" and a sound effect of power level 0 are output (see Figure 13-13), sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 1 is output, sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 2 is output, and sound pattern BP2-4 is a pattern in which the voice of power level 3 (MAX) and a sound effect of power level 3 (MAX) are output.

In the "miss notification," sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which a sound effect of failure is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H1)), sound pattern BP3-2 is a pattern in which a defeat (unfortunate) voice of ally A-1 and background music for a battle defeat are output (see FIG. 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 is a pattern in which a defeat (unfortunate) voice of ally A-2 and background music for a battle defeat are output (see FIG. 13-16 (H3)).

In the "moving object effect & jackpot notification", sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the sound effects of success, and the background music of success are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E1)), sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the victory voice of ally A-1, and the background music of battle victory are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)), and sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the victory voice of ally A-2, and the background music of battle victory are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E3)).

In "redraw variation/planned ball output addition," sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the background music for the redraw variation is output (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and sound pattern BP4-4 is a pattern in which the background music for the planned ball output addition, the sound effect (attack) for the planned ball output addition, teammate A-1's voice for the planned ball output addition, and the voice "Push!" are output (see Figure 13-18).

In the "redraw result/planned ball release notification", sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect for even-numbered symbols and background music for the redraw result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), sound pattern BP4-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect for odd-numbered symbols and background music for the redraw result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), sound pattern BP4-5 is a pattern in which background music for the planned ball release notification and the sound effect of 750 are output (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and sound pattern BP4-6 is a pattern in which background music for the planned ball release notification, the sound effect of 1500, and the voice of MAX are output (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, the sound patterns during the execution period of the movable body performance are the same for all types of SP reach performances A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3), which further reduces manufacturing costs.

In this embodiment, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the same sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4 even when the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or when the effective operation period ends without detection of operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and sound effects may be output in different sound patterns depending on the timing when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed. In this way, it becomes possible to change the sound effects depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(SP Reach Production A to E Flow)
Next, the flow of the SP reach effects A to E will be described with reference to Fig. 13-8. Fig. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, in the SP Reach α, β, and γ, when the SP Reach performance develops from the N Reach performance, in the case of SP Reach performance A, the start image of bowling is displayed as shown in (A1), in the case of SP Reach performance B, the start image of battle A between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2), in the case of SP Reach performance C, the start image of battle A between ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3), in the case of SP Reach performance D, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A4), and in the case of SP Reach performance E, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A5). In this way, the performance style of the first half in each of the SP Reach performances A to E is different for each of the SP Reach performances A to E.

Then, at a predetermined timing towards the end of the SP reach performance, the win/lose button performance begins. Specifically, as shown in (B1), a first operation prompting performance is started to prompt the player to press and hold the push button 31B, and then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first operation prompting performance, a second operation prompting performance is started to prompt the player to release the long press of the push button 31B, as shown in (B2). In this way, the performance format of the win/lose button performance is the same for SP reach performances A to E.

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, an image showing the final throw in bowling or the final blow in battle is displayed as shown in (C) when the release operation of the long press of push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the hit/miss button presentation, or when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long press of push button 31B being detected.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that the ball has hit the pin; in the case of SP reach performance B, as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked; in the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked; in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in (D4), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked; and in the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in (D5), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked. In this way, the presentation style of the movable body presentation differs between SP reach presentation A, SP reach presentation B and D, and SP reach presentation C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (E1), a result image indicating that the pins have fallen is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance B, as shown in (E2), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in (E3), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in (E4), and in the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in (E5), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed. Note that the presentation mode of the result announcement differs for each of the SP reach performances A to E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to C, post-effect A begins, and in the re-draw variable part shown in (F1), an image is displayed in which the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in (E1 to E3) are re-variably displayed, and then in the re-draw result part shown in (F2) and (F3), the fixed decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the case of SP Reach performance D, post-performance B is started, and in the planned ball output addition part shown in (G1), an image is displayed of ally character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacking enemy character X-1 and adding up the planned balls, and in the case of SP Reach performance E, post-performance B is started, and in the planned ball output addition part shown in (G2), an image is displayed of ally character A-1 displayed in (A5) attacking enemy character X-2 and adding up the planned balls. Next, in the case of SP Reach performance D and E, the planned number of balls is displayed in the planned ball output notification part shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, then at the timing when the release operation of the long press of push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the win/lose button effect, or at the timing when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long press of push button 31B being detected, the images shown in (C) (D1 to D5) are not displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, a result image indicating a failed strike is displayed as shown in (H1), in the case of SP reach effect B, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H2), in the case of SP reach effect C, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H3), in the case of SP reach effect D, a result image indicating a loss in battle B is displayed as shown in (H4), and in the case of SP reach effect E, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H5). The presentation style of the result announcement differs between SP reach presentation A, SP reach presentation B and D, and SP reach presentation C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to E, as shown in (I1), the fixed decorative pattern of a specified reach combination that is not a jackpot combination (also called a "missed reach") is displayed stopped.

(Examples of SP reach effects A to E)
Next, an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performances A to E executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 13-9 to 13-20. Fig. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation from the start of the variable display of the SP reach α, β, and γ to the development into the SP reach performance. Fig. 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performance A. Fig. 13-11 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performances B and C. Fig. 13-12 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the SP reach performances D and E. Fig. 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the hit/miss button performance. Fig. 13-14 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the movable body performance. Fig. 13-15 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the big hit notification of the SP reach performances A to E. Fig. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the miss notification of the SP reach performances A to E. Fig. 13-17 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the post-event performance A. 13-18 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of the post-event performance B. FIG. 13-19 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of the post-event performance B.

In the following explanation, the commonly executed SP reach effects A to E will be explained together, and the different effects will be explained separately. Also, some of the numbers (e.g. A to I) given to each frame will correspond to the numbers given to the frames shown in Figure 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the decorative symbols begins in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the determination of one of the SP Reach α, β, or γ as the variable pattern.

In the following, active display area 018SG013 corresponding to active display area 069SG013 of feature part 069SG displays active display 018SG003 corresponding to active display 069SG003, first hold display area 018SG011 corresponding to first hold display area 069SG011 displays hold display 018SG001 corresponding to hold display 069SG001, and second hold display area 018SG012 corresponding to second hold display area 069SG012 displays hold display 018SG002 corresponding to hold display 069SG002.

After the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), if the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, a normal reach performance is started as a variable display performance of the decorative symbols. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach mode was entered, a decorative symbol with a number different from the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5C is resumed, progressing to an SP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1), when the SP reach performance A is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01A is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance A has started. The reach title image 018SG01A has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance A) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating the expectation of a jackpot, and a content display 018SG102 representing bowling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 is displayed, indicating that pins are lined up on the bowling lane and the challenge is about to begin, and as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2), an image 018SG104 is displayed of the ball hitting a pin and knocking it down, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-3), an image 018SG105 is displayed, indicating that the next throw will be the last one, with an image of one pin remaining on the bowling lane and the words "One left!". In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), when the SP reach performance B is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01B is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance B is about to start. The reach title image 018SG01B has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance B) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-2, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), an image 018SG202 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG201 showing a town, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-2), an image 018SG203 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), when the SP reach performance C is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01C is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance C is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01C has a title display 018SG100 (e.g., SP reach performance C) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (e.g., the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-2. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-2, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), an image 018SG212 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG201 showing a town, a character image 018SGA2 showing friendly character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-2), an image 018SG213 showing friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA2 and character image 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4), when the SP reach performance D is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01D is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance D is starting. The reach title image 018SG01D has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance D) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-3, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), an image 018SG222 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG221 showing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-2), an image 018SG223 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5), when the SP reach performance E is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01E is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance E is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01E has a title display 018SG100 (e.g., SP reach performance E) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (e.g., the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big win, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-3, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), an image 018SG232 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG221 showing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-2), an image 018SG233 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-2 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the win/lose button presentation starts, a button image 018SG241 that resembles the push button 31B and an operation prompting display 018SG242 such as "Keep pressing the button to build up power!" are displayed, and the operation prompting presentation that encourages the long press of the push button 31B starts. In addition, as a light emission presentation, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP2-1, and as a sound presentation, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation prompt display 018SG242 switches to "Start charging!", the gauge display 018SG243 indicating the power level and the effect image 018SG244 are displayed, and when a long press operation is detected, the display state of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 changes. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light emission patterns LP2-2-4, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP2-2-4.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation prompting display 018SG242 switches to "Power MAX!" and is displayed. Even when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 may not become MAX depending on the variable display result. Also, the manner in which the power level changes may differ depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the hit/lose button presentation, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-3), the operation prompting display 018SG242 switches to "Let go!", prompting the player to release the long press of the push button 31B, and the gauge display 018SG243 switches to a gauge showing the remaining valid operation period. Also, the presentation operations in FIG. 13-13 (B1) to FIG. 13-13 (B1-3) are common to SP reach presentations A to E.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-13 (B1) to Fig. 13-13 (B1-2), an example is given of a form in which a prompt to operate to accumulate power is displayed during the win/lose button presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prompt to operate does not have to be displayed.

Then, when the release of the long press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the hit/miss button presentation, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without the release of the long press of the push button 31B being detected, if the variable display result is a hit, the movable body presentation shown in Figures 13-14 will start.

During the first period from when the movable body performance begins until a predetermined time (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) has elapsed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position, and an attack image 018SG250 showing the final throw or final blow is displayed, as shown in Fig. 13-14 (C). Note that the attack image 018SG250 is made up of an object image 018SG250A that imitates the spherical operating part of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows the object moving toward the back of the screen. In addition, as the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in a color that matches the background based on the light emission pattern LP3-2 as a light effect, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1-3 as a sound effect, and the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As described above, during the first period of the movable body performance, a common performance is executed for SP reach performances A to E, but during the second period after the first period ends, different performances are executed for SP reach performances A to E, as follows:

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of SP reach performance A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG251 showing an object hitting something is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A and an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 does not display the object (e.g., pins) that the object (ball) hits, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image showing bowling pins may be displayed in the impact image 018SG251.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG252 is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX1 indicating enemy character X1, and indicates that an attack has hit enemy character X-1.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of SP reach performance C and SP reach performance E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG253 is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX2 indicating enemy character X2, and indicates that an attack has hit enemy character X-2.

In addition, during the second period of the movable body performance shown in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), common display performance, light emission performance, sound performance, and vibration performance are performed. In detail, the effect image 018SG250B is alternately displayed and hidden in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 (hide when the movable body 32 moves upward, display when the movable body 32 moves downward, etc.), and as a light emission effect, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 basically emit light in a light emission pattern in which orange and red light flows outward from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in that order, in accordance with the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed, light is emitted in a light emission pattern in which it flashes intensely white, and as a sound effect, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3, and as a vibration effect, the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61. In addition, in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), displays may be performed using a light guide plate display device.

In addition, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color). By doing so, the relationship between the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 showing enemy characters and the effect image 018SG250B can be improved, thereby improving the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 13-15, a jackpot is announced. Specifically, in the case of SP Reach performance A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), a result image 018SG260A is displayed, which includes an image 018SG261 showing a fallen bowling pin, a text display 018SG262 showing "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263, and indicates that the bowling challenge has been successful, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-1, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach performance B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1Z showing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260B showing that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible. By displaying character image 018SGX1Z in this way, the end of the series of effects can be conveniently notified.

In the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260C showing that ally character A-2 has won the battle against enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-3, and the vibration performance ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 fades out and becomes invisible. By displaying character image 018SGX2Z in this way, the end of the series of effects can be conveniently notified.

In the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), a result image 018SG260D is displayed, which includes a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263, and indicates that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260E showing that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the result images 018SG260A-018SG260E, the result images 018SG260A-018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E6), a fixed decorative pattern (such as 666) that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the word "jackpot" is displayed, thereby issuing a confirmed jackpot notification indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed.

On the other hand, when the release of the long press of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the win/lose button presentation shown in Figures 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release of the long press of the push button 31B being detected, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body presentation is not executed, and a miss confirmation notification is executed to indicate that a miss has been confirmed, as shown in Figure 13-16.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of SP reach performance A, the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270A is displayed that has an image 018SG271 showing the bowling pins that remain unfallen and a text display 018SG272 showing "Failed...", indicating that the bowling challenge has failed. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-1, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H2) (H4), the movable body 32 is maintained at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270B is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle against the enemy character X-1. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

In the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270C is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that ally character A-2 has been defeated in the battle against enemy character X-2. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-3, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270E is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle against the enemy character X-2. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in a low-luminance white color based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the result images 018SG270A-018SG270E, the result images 018SG270A-018SG270E are no longer displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H6), a confirmed decorative pattern (such as 676) of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "missed reach") that is not a jackpot combination is statically displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby issuing a confirmed miss notification indicating that a miss has been confirmed.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach effects A to C, the post-event effect A shown in Figure 13-17 will be executed.

Specifically, after the determined decorative symbols (such as 666) that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the jackpot confirmation notification, the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the re-lottery variation part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F1). In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 are lit up based on the light emission pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, background music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1.

In the re-draw result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable jackpot), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the re-variable display, a combination of even numbers (such as 666) is displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2.

In addition, in the re-draw result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is jackpot B (probable win), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the re-variable display, a combination of odd numbers (such as 333) is displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach performances D and E, the post-event performance B shown in Figure 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the big win confirmation notification, after the fixed decorative pattern (for example, 666, etc.) that is a predetermined big win combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the planned ball output addition part shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-1) displays a background image 018SG280 representing space, a character image 018SGA1 representing the ally character A-1, and a planned ball output counter display 018SG281 representing the planned ball output number that will be awarded in the big win game state that displays the planned ball output number, and the post-event performance B begins. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-4, and as a sound performance, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1 are displayed, an image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-1 is displayed, and an additional ball count display 018SG282 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 018SG281.

In the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G2), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2 are displayed, an image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-2 is displayed, and an additional ball count display 018SG282 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 018SG283 that resembles the push button 31B, an operation prompt display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt display that encourages a single press of the push button 31B is executed.

Next, in the case of SP Reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-3), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX1 are displayed, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, while the counter value of the expected number of balls to be played counter display 018SG281 is variably displayed. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-5, and as a sound performance, background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5.

On the other hand, in the case of SP Reach performance E, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-4), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX2 are displayed, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, while the counter value of the expected ball number counter display 018SG281 is variably displayed. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-6, and as a sound performance, background music, sound effects, and voices are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), a character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ of the attacked enemy character X-2 disappearing and becoming a star after being blown away are displayed, and a planned ball number counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed frozen.

As shown in Figure 13-19 (G3), in the case of a jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 is not updated and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G4), in the case of a jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the expected ball count counter display 018SG281 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"), and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach performance type determination table)
Next, the SP reach performance type determination table used in determining the SP reach performance type in the SP reach performance type determination process executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 7 will be described. Fig. 13-20 shows (A) the SP reach performance type determination table A, (B) the SP reach performance type determination table B, and (C) the SP reach performance type determination table C.

In the SP reach performance type determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach performance type is extracted, and the SP reach performance type is determined using one of the SP reach performance type determination tables A to C shown in Figure 13-20.

In the SP reach performance type determination table, as shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C), different judgment values are assigned to each of the SP reach performance types for "jackpot C (10R)", "jackpot B (6R)", "jackpot A (6R)", and "miss", so that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C) is the number.

When the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach α, the SP Reach performance type determination table A shown in Figure 13-20 (A) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach β, the SP Reach performance type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20 (B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Big Hit B (6R)", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "Big Hit A (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "Miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-2", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-2".

In other words, when the SP Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot B (6R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)," SP Reach presentation C is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach presentation B.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach γ, the SP Reach performance type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20 (C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot C (10R)", 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-2", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-2".

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)," SP Reach performance E is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach performance D.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a first specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) that displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-1, and a second specific performance (for example, SP reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state without displaying an enemy character, and when a jackpot is notified in the SP reach performance, it can execute a "movable body performance" as a special performance during the execution period of the SP reach performance, and the execution of the movable body performance in the SP reach performance B can be executed. During this period, a character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with an effect image 018SG250B related to the movement of the movable body 32, and during the period in which the movable body performance in SP reach performance A is executed, an effect image 018SG250B in a manner common to SP reach performance B is displayed while the character image 018SGX1 is not displayed, and the lighting pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance is lighting pattern LP3-2 which is common to both the case in which the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance B and the case in which the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance A.

By doing this, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 are made common between SP reach performance B, in which an enemy character is displayed, and SP reach performance A, in which an enemy character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while increasing the correlation between the SP reach performance and the movable body performance depending on whether or not an enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

More specifically, in the SP reach performance B and SP reach performance A, which have different performance modes, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 for the movable body performance performed during the SP reach performance are common, while the display mode for the effect image 018SG250B corresponds to each SP reach performance, thereby preventing the flow of the SP reach performance from being interrupted by the movable body performance.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which SP reach performance B is applied as the first specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to any of SP reach performances C to E.

The period during which the movable body performance is performed includes a first period and a second period that follows the first period, and while the performance mode in the first period is common to SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14(C) is common), the performance mode in the second period is different between SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D1) is different from the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D2 to D5)). By doing this, the performance mode is common up until the first period, which further reduces manufacturing costs, while it is unclear until the first period whether it is SP reach performance B to E or SP reach performance A, which increases the performance interest of the SP reach performance.

In addition, as an SP reach performance, it is possible to execute an SP reach performance E in which an enemy X-2 different from enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the rate at which it is controlled to the jackpot state differs when SP reach performance B is executed and when SP reach performance E is executed. In other words, when the variable display result is a jackpot in a low base state, the determination rate of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach performance B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in a high base state, the determination rate of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach performance E is 800/997. In the SP reach performance C, during the execution period of the movable body performance executed when a jackpot is announced, an effect image 018SG250B common to the SP reach performance B according to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance C is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance B.

By doing this, the operating mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 can be standardized to reduce manufacturing costs, while increasing the number of SP reach performances with different rates of control to the jackpot state, allowing players to focus on which SP reach performance will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, thereby enhancing the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the movable body performance.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which an enemy character is displayed and whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot using the enemy character in a first mode (e.g., SP reach presentation B) and a second mode (e.g., SP reach presentation D), and can execute a movable body presentation during the execution period of the SP reach presentations B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), and during the execution period of the movable body presentation, in both the SP reach presentation B and the SP reach presentation D, a common event related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed. Character image 018SGX1 is displayed along with the usual effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B), and in the case of SP reach performance B, post performance A in which no enemy character is displayed is executed instead of post performance B using enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP reach performance (see Figure 13-17), while in the case of SP reach performance D, post performance B using enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP reach performance (see Figures 13-18 and 13-19) is executed.

By doing this, the enemy characters and the movable body 32 in the movable body performance are made common between SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while displaying the common enemy character X-1 in different performances increases the correlation between the SP reach performances B, D and the movable body performance, and between the SP reach performances B, D and the post-performances A, B, improving the performance effect.

More specifically, even in the post-performance after the SP reach performance notifies the player of a confirmed jackpot, the character displayed in the SP reach performance is used to notify the player of the results of the re-change of the decorative pattern and the planned number of balls to be dispensed. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach performance, notifications such as the re-change result notification and the planned number of balls to be dispensed are made in common, while the display content corresponds to the type of SP reach performance, making it possible to show the SP reach performance to the post-performance as a continuous performance.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a special performance (for example, a performance in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special form after the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance. In the SP reach performance B, in the jackpot announcement before the post-performance A, a character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). In the SP reach performance D, in the post-performance B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being blown away (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). In this way, the timing at which the special performance is executed changes depending on the type of SP reach performance, improving the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the special effects are exemplified as those in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible, and those in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being thrown away, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be those in which the enemy character is hidden by framing out, or those in which an image indicating that the character has been hidden (for example, a star or effect image) is displayed. Also, various modifications are possible as long as the effect does not make the character invisible, but rather increases transparency, decreases brightness, or changes the image, or otherwise changes the appearance.

In addition, if SP reach performance B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the probability that it will be controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 30%, and if SP reach performance D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the probability that it will be controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to whether SP reach performance B or D will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing a first specific presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation D) that displays an enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 and notifies the player whether or not the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1, and a second specific presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation E) that displays an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 and notifies the player whether or not the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1, and when a movable body presentation is executed in the SP reach presentation D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach presentation D are displayed and operated. By this, it is possible to execute a post-performance B which announces the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state which has been notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance D, and when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance E, it is possible to execute a post-performance B which announces the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state which has been notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance E by displaying and moving the enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach performance E, and at least the movement mode of the ally character A-1 is common between the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing this, the same ally character is used in the SP reach performance and the post-performance, which reduces manufacturing costs while making it easier to understand the relationship between the SP reach performance and the post-performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, the background image 018SG280 representing space is common to the post-performance B of SP reach performance D and the post-performance B of SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), so the background image can also be made common, further reducing manufacturing costs.

Also, ally character A-1 is common to both post-show B of SP reach show D and post-show B of SP reach show E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), which allows the special characters to be common as well, further reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D, images of enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously, and in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance E, images of enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19). As each character is displayed simultaneously, the impression of post-performance B is enhanced and the performance effect is improved.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute, as post-performances, a first post-performance (e.g., post-performance B) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance D when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance D, a second post-performance (e.g., post-performance B) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance E when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance E, and a third post-performance (e.g., post-performance A) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance A when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance A, and the proportion controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether the SP reach performance D, SP reach performance E, or SP reach performance A is executed.

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the percentage of the player being controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40% when SP Reach performance D is executed, and 60% when SP Reach performance E is executed, and when the SP Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the percentage of the player being controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 100% when SP Reach performance A is executed.

By doing this, not only is a jackpot notified by the SP reach performance, but the proportion of the player being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP reach performance is executed, so that the player's attention to the SP reach performance can be appropriately increased, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the ally character and enemy character displayed in the SP reach performance D are displayed as the first post-performance of the performance aspect related to the first specific performance, so that the first post-performance is related to the first specific performance, the ally character and enemy character displayed in the SP reach performance E are displayed as the second post-performance of the performance aspect related to the second specific performance, so that the second post-performance is related to the second specific performance, and the ally character and enemy character are not displayed in the SP reach performance A and the third post-performance is related to the third specific performance, so that the third post-performance is related to the third specific performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third post-performance may be related to the third specific performance by displaying the characters displayed in the SP reach performance as the third post-performance of the performance aspect related to the third specific performance.

In other words, a post-performance related to a specific performance is a performance that has at least some of the display aspects in common with the specific performance, and the common performance aspects are that a character is displayed or not displayed, and the type of character displayed in the specific performance and the post-performance may be different. Also, there may be four or more types of specific performance and post-performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the first and second specific effects are executable in a low base state, and the third specific effect is executable in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first, second, and third specific effects may all be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may all be effects that can be executed in a high base state. In other words, the first, second, and third specific effects may be effects that can be determined regardless of the game state.

In addition, as the third specific effect, it may be possible to execute an SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with an enemy character X-3 different from enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state, in which case the proportion controlled to a jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%) > SP reach effect E (35%) > SP reach effect D (15%). Furthermore, the post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when a jackpot is announced in the SP reach effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned SP reach performance F, for example, it is preferable that the light emission pattern of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the SP reach performances A to E, and the sound pattern of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 13-6 (C) is the sound pattern BP0-1 to BP3 common to the SP reach performances A to E.

In the above embodiment, as a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, for example, an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a 10R jackpot C with a larger number of balls expected to be dispensed) or an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot B or jackpot C that is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot ends) is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state may include a state in which the number of balls dispensed, the number of game rounds, the control period of the high probability state, the time-saving state, or the small jackpot state, the fall rate of the probability fluctuation, etc. are more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It may also be an advantageous state in which the presentation mode of the jackpot game state or the end of the jackpot game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when applying a pachinko gaming machine 1 with feature portion 018SG to a pachinko gaming machine 1 with feature portions 069G and 099G, for example, it is possible to apply the SP reach performance A in feature portion 018SG to the SP reaches A and B in feature portions 069G and 099G, apply the SP reach performances B and C in feature portion 018SG to the SP reach C in feature portions 069G and 099G, and apply the SP reach performances D and E in feature portion 018SG to the SP reach D in feature portions 069G and 099G.

(Explanation of Variations and Applications of Feature 018SG)
In the above-mentioned characteristic section 018SG, an example is given of a form in which a big win game state is applied as an advantageous state for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small win game state, a time-saving state (high base state), a special state, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied is exemplified as an example of a movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board, a movable body provided on the game machine frame 3, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a specific effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, the SP reach effects A to E that notify whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot game state are applied as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and normal reach effects, post-event effects, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example was given of a form in which enemy characters X-1 and X-2, who confront friendly characters A-1 and A-2, are used as specific characters or special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and enemy characters other than those mentioned above, or other characters that do not confront friendly characters, etc. may also be applicable. Also, characters made up of images of real people may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given in which ally characters A-1 and A-2 who face off against enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are used as special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and ally characters other than those mentioned above, other characters that do not face off against enemy characters, etc. may also be applicable. Also, characters made up of live-action images of people may also be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a specific effect in which a character is displayed, an example is given of a form in which SP reach effects A to E are applied in which a special character (ally character) faces off against a specific character or special character (enemy character), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character, specific character, or special character may be multiple ally characters or enemy characters that cooperate with each other without facing each other, or multiple characters that do not face off against each other.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given of a form in which a movable body effect is applied as a special effect in which a movable body is moved and an illuminating body is illuminated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect in which a movable body other than the movable body 32 is moved may be applied. Also, the operating mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the timing of the movable body performance was set to be before the big win confirmation notification in the latter stages of the SP reach performances A to E, but this can be changed in various ways, such as to the middle stages of the SP reach performances A to E. Also, the movable body performance could be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, but it may also be started at a predetermined timing regardless of operation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the movable body performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 emit light, sound effects are output, and the push button 31B vibrates in response to the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a light guide plate light emitting performance using a light guide plate device in response to the movement of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate device is common to the SP reach performances A-E, like the light emitting pattern of the LEDs.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given in which the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied as an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an effect image in a manner related to the movement mode (e.g., vibration) of the movable body 32 (e.g., an effect image representing an impact) or an effect image in a manner emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a post-effect executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, a post-effect A that executes a re-variable display of the confirmed decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a post-effect B that notifies the number of balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified using the friendly characters and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach effect are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed after the special effect is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect, and for example, a jackpot mid-effect executed in the jackpot game state or a small jackpot mid-effect executed in the small jackpot game state may be applied.

Specifically, in the above embodiment, before the variable display ends, a post-event effect B is executed to announce the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the notified jackpot game state, but it may be possible to execute a post-event effect to announce the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the notified jackpot game state during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the round interval between game rounds.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the post-performance B, the expected number of balls to be awarded in a jackpot is reported in an identifiable manner as the game value information that can identify the amount of game value to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified to be controlled by the SP reach performances D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds, etc. may also be reported.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, a form was exemplified in which the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state that was notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E in the post-performance B was notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot is consecutively won a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times) or more, the total number of balls won from the first jackpot game state to the current time may be notified instead of or in addition to the planned number of balls. Furthermore, when the total number of balls is added in the planned ball addition part in the post-performance B or when the planned number of balls is notified in the planned ball notification part, it may be possible to notify that the total number of balls has exceeded a predetermined number (e.g., 2500 balls, 5000 balls, 7500 balls, 10000 balls, etc.).

In addition, in the characteristic section 018SG, an example was given of a form in which the types of friendly and enemy characters faced in the SP reach performances A to E are different, but the movement mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the SP reach performances A to E, the type and execution rate of various preview performances such as chance up, the battle showdown period, the movement mode and display mode of the characters, etc. may be varied depending on the variable display result, and even in this case, it is preferable that the movement mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example was given in which the execution period of the planned ball output addition part and the planned ball output notification part in the post-event performance B is common to the SP reach performances D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the planned ball output addition part and the planned ball output notification part may be made different depending on the type of jackpot, that is, the size of the planned number of balls to be output.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C are executable in a low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E are executable in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the various specific effects (SP reach effects) described above may all be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may all be effects that can be executed in a high base state. In other words, they may be executable in any type of game state.

The characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiment of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The other embodiments described below have the same configuration as those shown in Figures 1, 3 to 5, and 9 of the above-mentioned embodiments, and are controlled in the same manner.

Figure 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

Figure 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 15, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S90174 is a process executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 120IW)
Next, the characteristic part 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 120IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "normal chart winning" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart winning probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart winning probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the game is controlled to the time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

In addition, in this example, even if the next jackpot or time-saving error does not occur even after the variable display has finished a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after a jackpot occurs, or after the time-saving error occurs, the machine may be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time that the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time that the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state may be different or the same.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time-saving operations)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving periods N is 120 to 1140.

In this example, the second special symbol is more likely to change display during the time-saving state, but as described below, the probability of a small win is higher when the second special symbol is changed display, so the time-saving state is more likely to be controlled to a small win game state.

(Board configuration)
16-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 120IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in the game area, a first path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down, which is different from the first path, is mainly provided in an area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A that constitutes the first starting winning hole is provided as a structure through which game balls that are hit into the left game area of the game area can enter.

The structures through which game balls that are hit into the right game area can enter include a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes the second start winning port, a special variable winning ball device 120IW17 that constitutes the special winning port, and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes the large winning port.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 6A, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the right game area to have the potential to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the left game area entering them. Conversely, it is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining whether a game ball has entered the V-shaped area, which is a condition for generating a big win, when a small win occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a right-hit LED 120IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in FIG. 16-1. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-1, a right-hit notification LED 120IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 16-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the present characteristic part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 16-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, and in a small win game state, the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward from a closed state in which it is moved forward to the rear, and the special winning port, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has entered the special winning port is detected by the special winning port switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are awarded, whereas when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) and is detected by the special winning hole switch 120IW24, 3 prize balls are awarded.

The bottom member 120IW17a is also controlled to change from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW83.

As shown in FIG. 16-2, in this characteristic part 120IW, a game ball that enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) is further guided to the guide path 120IW01 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. The guide path 120IW01 further branches into two paths 120IW02, 03, and a game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 is guided to the left path 120IW02 or the right path 120IW03. The left path 120IW02 is a V winning port, and a game ball that enters the V winning port is detected by the V winning port switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 16-2, a V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening), and when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is open, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening) and becomes the V prize opening. Also, when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is closed, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the right side path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening plate 120IW20 is controlled from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW84.

In addition, when this feature unit 120IW is controlled to a small win game state, it is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game ends, provided that a game ball enters the V winning hole 120IW02 during the small win game state and is detected by the V winning hole switch 120IW20A.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a number of regulating pieces that slow down the speed at which the game ball flows down the bottom member 120IW17a. In this example, the provision of the regulating pieces in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 changes the flow direction of the game ball as it flows down from the upper right to the lower left, causing it to snake with a forward-backward component of motion, and the time it takes for the game ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there are no regulating pieces.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) has a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the upstream side, and the device branches into a V winning port and a discharge port on the downstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) may be configured so that the device branches into a V winning port side and a general winning port side on the upstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, and a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the general winning port side.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 16-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards in the characteristic part 120IW. As shown in Fig. 16-3, in this characteristic part 120IW, the switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), the count switch 23, the special winning port switch 120IW24, and the V winning port switch 120IW20a, and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 120IW83, and solenoid 120IW84) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device, the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (special variable prize ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable prize ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20.

(Probability of winning big, probability of winning small, probability of losing)
FIG. 16-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a big win and a small win for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 16-4(A) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 16-4(B) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, the setting can be set to one of a number of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed, making it possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed to six levels, from "1" to "6." Note that the setting is not limited to being changeable to six levels, and it may be changed to, for example, two to five levels, or seven or more levels.

As shown in FIG. 16-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 16-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400), regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6."

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-4 (A), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 16-4 (A), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "64,839/65,536", while the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "6", at "6".

As shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 16-4 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "9362/65536" (approximately 1/7) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

In addition, for a miss with time reduction, as shown in Figure 16-4 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 16-4 (B), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "55,805/65,536", while the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "55,682/65,536" for setting value "6".

As shown in FIG. 16-4, in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is approximately 1/400, whereas when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is approximately 1/7, which is higher.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
16-5(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 16-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 16-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either "6R time-saving jackpot A" or "6R time-saving jackpot B" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-limited jackpot" based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

A "6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. A "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Note that "6R time-saving jackpot A" and "6R time-saving jackpot B" have different stopping patterns for the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern that is derived and displayed. A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(A), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 70% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot A," and a 30% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot B." Also, as shown in FIG. 16-5(B), in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 100% probability that it will be a "10R time-saving jackpot."

Figures 16-5(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 16-5(C) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, Figure 16-5(D) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-5 (C), the small win type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-5 (D), the small win type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

A "small hit A" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the sixth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. A "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the tenth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(C), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-5(D), in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 30% probability, and a "small win B" with a 70% probability.

(Time-saving type determination table)
16-6(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing time-saving type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 16-6(A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 16-6(B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(A), the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(B), the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 16-6(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C." Also, as shown in FIG. 16-6(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C."

(Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 16-7 and FIG. 16-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 16-7(A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving big win A. Also, FIG. 16-7(B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving big win B. Also, FIG. 16-7(C) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 10R time-saving big win. Also, FIG. 16-7(D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small win A. Also, FIG. 16-7(E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small win B. Also, FIG. 16-8(F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss A. Also, FIG. 16-8(G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss B. Also, FIG. 16-8(H) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss C. Also, FIG. 16-8 (I) shows a specific example of a pattern determination table for a miss (no time reduction).

As shown in Figure 16-8, the pattern determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the special pattern to be stopped based on the random numbers used for pattern determination, depending on the type of big win, small win, time-saving type, etc.

As shown in Figure 16-7(A), if a "6R time-saving big win A" occurs, the pattern "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 16-7(B), if a "6R time-saving big win B" occurs, the pattern "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 16-7(C), if a "10R time-saving big win" occurs, the pattern "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 16-7(D), if a "small win A" occurs, the pattern "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 16-7(E), if a "small win B" occurs, the pattern "9" is determined with a 100% probability.

As shown in Figure 16-8 (F), if "Time-saving Miss A" occurs, there is a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "6," and a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "8." As shown in Figure 16-8 (G), if "Time-saving Miss B" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "4." As shown in Figure 16-8 (H), if "Time-saving Miss C" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "9." As shown in Figure 16-8 (I), if it is a miss (no time-saving), there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "-."

Specific examples of the special symbol stopping patterns are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, in this example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each configured with one 7-segment LED, and the special symbol stopping pattern is represented by a single digit number, but they may be configured with two 7-segment LEDs, and the special symbol stopping pattern may be represented by a two-digit number. In this case, for example, even if the result is "6R time-saving big win A", "6R time-saving big win B", "10R time-saving big win", "small win A", "small win B", "time-saving miss B", "time-saving miss C", or "miss (no time-saving)", the stopping patterns of multiple types of special symbols may be determined.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 16-7 and 16-8, the case where the stopping symbols of the special symbols are determined using the symbol determination random number is shown, but this is not limited to the above, and for example, the stopping symbols of the special symbols may be determined by using the type determination random number in combination. When the type determination random number is used in combination, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time-saving jackpot A", the value of the type determination random number is 0 to 125 (see Figure 16-5 (A)), so the symbol determination value in Figure 16-7 (A) is assigned 0 to 125 to configure a symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot A. Also, for example, if the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving Miss A," the value of the type determination random number is between 0 and 59 (see FIG. 16-6), so in FIG. 16-8 (F), the pattern determination value is assigned from 0 to 29 to the pattern "6" and from 30 to 59 to the pattern "8," thereby constructing a pattern determination table for time-saving Miss A.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be explained. Figure 16-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 16-9, after the small win game is started at timing S1, when 8 seconds have passed (timing S2), the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in an open state, and the open state of the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is continued until 8 seconds have passed (see Figure 16-9 (C)).

When a small win (small win A, small win B) occurs, 8 seconds is set as the time before the special winning hole is opened (fanfare time) from the start of the small win game until the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state, and the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state at the same time that the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-9 (A), during the period when the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B), the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds during the period when a V win is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B) is extremely short at 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, multiple regulating pieces are formed in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and about 2 to 3 game balls flow down in a serpentine manner on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Therefore, even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled to the open state, the game balls on the bottom member 120IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 and win a prize.

If a game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the sixth or tenth round, as shown in Figure 16-9 (B).

In this example, when the final opening of the special winning port in a small winning game is completed, the small winning game ends based on the lapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small winning end time (ending time), but this is not limited to the above. For example, detection switches capable of detecting game balls are provided in two locations, upstream and downstream, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port), and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the device waits until the detection numbers of the upstream detection switch and the downstream detection switch match (all game balls that have entered the special winning port are discharged), and then transitions to the small winning end time (ending time), and ends the small winning game when the small winning end time (ending time) has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, a configuration is shown in which a V win is possible during small win play in both small win A and small win B, but it may also be configured to provide a type of small win in which a V win is difficult or impossible during small win play.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 16-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature part 120IW. Among these, FIG. 16-10(A) and (B) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 16-10(C) and (D) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Also, FIG. 16-10(E) and (F) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for time-saving failure (for non-time-saving state). Also, FIG. 16-10(G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for rescue time-saving.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Fig. 16-10 (A) and (B). As shown in Fig. 16-10 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-1 (normal variation), PT1-2 (shortened variation), PT1-3 (normal reach), and PT1-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-5 (normal reach) and PT1-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-7 (normal reach) and PT1-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 16-10 (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-1 (high-speed miss fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a small jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small jackpot fluctuation).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using Fig. 16-10 (C) and (D). As shown in Fig. 16-10 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-1 (normal variation), PT4-2 (shortened variation), PT4-3 (normal reach), and PT4-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-5 (normal reach) and PT4-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-7 (normal reach) and PT4-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 16-10 (D), in this example, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PT5-1 (shortened variable), variable pattern PT5-2 (ultra-shortened variable), variable pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), or variable pattern PT5-4 (super reach). Also, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PT5-5 (normal reach) or variable pattern PT5-6 (super reach). In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if a small win occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PT5-7 (normal reach) or variation pattern PT5-8 (super reach).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving failure (for non-time-saving state) will be explained using Fig. 16-10 (E) and (F). As shown in Fig. 16-10 (E), in this example, when the time-saving failure occurs in the non-time-saving state as A to C (patterns "2", "4", "6"), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PT6-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (time-saving teaser effect).

As shown in FIG. 16-10 (F), in this example, when the time-saving feature is not activated and time-saving feature A (symbol "8") occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (time-saving teaser effect), or fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (time-saving feature revival effect).

In this example, if the time-saving state is in a state where the time-saving effect is lost (A to C), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the same as when the time-saving effect is lost (no time-saving effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the rescue time reduction will be explained using FIG. 16-10 (G). As shown in FIG. 16-10 (G), in this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, if there is a small win or a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (rescue time reduction entry effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol change display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol change display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

(Performance control command)
16-11 and 16-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 16-11 and FIG. 16-12, the command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a non-time-saving miss. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "8"). Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "6"). Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss B (pattern "4"). Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a time-saving miss C (pattern "2").

Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot A. Command 9007 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot B. Command 9008 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 8 designation command (10R time-saving jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R time-saving jackpot.

Command 9009 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 9 designation command (small win A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win A. Command 900A (H) is a presentation control command (display result 10 designation command (small win B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win B.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B300 (H) is a presentation control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of small win play. Command B301 (H) is a presentation control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of small win play.

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the large prize opening. Command B401 (H) is a presentation control command (special prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the special prize opening. Command B402 (H) is a presentation control command (V prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the V prize opening inside the special prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of a right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of a right hit notification.

Command E2XX(H) is a performance control command (setting value command) that specifies the currently set setting value. The setting value set to "XX" is set. For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E201(H) is sent, and if the setting value is set to "6", command E206(H) is sent.

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 16-11 and 16-12, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 16-11 and 16-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
16-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 120IW. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S2, S3 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, once the initial settings are made in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change/confirmation process (step 120IWS11). The setting change/confirmation process makes it possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value. Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command corresponding to the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only possible configuration, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be made so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is executed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed.

(Special pattern processing)
FIG. 16-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) is generally similar to the start winning judgment process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14. In addition, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are generally similar to the special symbol normal process (step S110) to the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 14. However, in this example, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS114). In addition, when a big winning symbol is derived and displayed (when a so-called direct hit occurs), the process proceeds to the big winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS117).

Small win pre-opening processing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes processing to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to an open state, and updates the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 120IWS115).

Small winning opening process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is 5. If the opening time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and if the closing time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and there are still opening times remaining, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state. Also, when it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, and when it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Also, it is confirmed whether the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, the V winning flag is set. When all openings of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 have been completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special pattern process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116).

Processing after closing of small win (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the processing before opening of the big win (step 120IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the normal processing of special symbols (step 120IWS110).

The process before the jackpot opening (step 120IWS117) to the process after the jackpot ending (step 120IWS120) is generally similar to the process before the jackpot opening (step S114) to the process after the jackpot ending (step S117) shown in FIG. 14.

In this example, the game immediately transitions to the big win game after a big win is determined and the big win/small win symbols are derived and displayed, or after a V win occurs during a small win game and the small win game ends, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the big win game, the game may be configured to transition to the big win game on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also serve as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 16-15 and FIG. 16-16 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 120IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this characteristic section 120IW, the processing of steps 120IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 120IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command capable of identifying the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent at the start of each change in the display, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the setting value command may be sent at the end of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides to determine a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 decides to determine a jackpot for the special pattern. If it is decided to determine a jackpot (Y in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to be a jackpot (N in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. Note that deciding whether or not to be a jackpot means deciding whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also deciding whether or not to set the stopped pattern on the special pattern display as a jackpot pattern.

In step 120IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. The CPU 103 also selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 16-5 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 16-5 (B) is selected. Then, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 determines the type (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of jackpot in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

Meanwhile, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small win judgment table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win judgment table for the second special symbol is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small win judgment table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for winning judgment, and determines whether or not a small win has been determined (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in Figures 16-4 (A) and (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is approximately 1/400, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is approximately 1/7.

If it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small win type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 16-5 (C) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 16-5 (D) is selected. After the small win type determination table is selected, the process proceeds to step 120IWS71.

If it has not been decided that a small win will occur (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter, which counts the number of times controlled to a small hit during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the small hit counter by 1 (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small win counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 checks whether any time-saving flags are set (step 120IWS76). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the CPU 103 decrements the total time-saving counter by 1 (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if so, proceeds to step 120IWS82. If the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 120IWS79). Note that whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is not time to start the variable display of the second special symbol, proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time-saving counter (step 120IWS80) and checks whether the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS81). If the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83, whereas if the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS82.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS82).

In this example, steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "900" (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by one extra, so the value of the time-saving counter may be added by one again after the subtraction process in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is one more than the time-saving counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84). In this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. In this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS86). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

In this example, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of a miss variation but also in the case of a small win variation, so the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 and the variation display that causes a rescue time reduction may be a small win variation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot variation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed, so if the variation display that would cause a rescue time reduction is a jackpot variation, the rescue time reduction control is not performed and normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS70 to determine the type of small hit (small hit A or small hit B) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of small hit. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of small hit in the small hit type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment using a time-saving loss judgment table for determining whether or not to make the time-saving loss, and determines whether or not to make the time-saving loss (step 120IWS88). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/200 (see FIG. 16-4(A)). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 16-4(B)). If it is not determined that the time-saving loss is to be made (if it is determined that the time-saving loss is not to be made), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to be determined (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time-saving type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 16-6 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 16-6 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of time-saving miss to be the type (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. Then proceed to step 120IWS92.

When the processing of step 120IWS91 is completed, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see Figures 16-7 (A) to 16-8 (H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). In the case of a miss without time reduction, the symbol determination table shown in Figure 16-7 (I) is selected and the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines the pattern corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for pattern determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
16-17 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step 120IWS111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) checks whether the story has been set (step 120IWS1701). The story refers to the variable pattern and variable time according to the number of times the symbol changes, and whether the story has been set is checked by whether the flag or data set according to the story when a big win occurs is set.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a rescue time reduction variation pattern table (see FIG. 16-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set or the rescue time-saving determination flag has not been set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time-saving effect has failed (step 120IWS1704). If the time-saving effect has not failed, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 16-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is a rescue time-saving effect, if the story has not been set, the variation pattern is uniformly determined to be the normal variation pattern, not the rescue time-saving variation pattern.

If the time-saving effect is not achieved, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving effect flag (see steps 120IWS150, 120IWS160, and 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). If the time-saving effect flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see Figures 16-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving effect is not achieved, if the time-saving effect is in progress, a variation pattern similar to that of a miss (no time-saving effect) is determined.

If the time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the pattern has been determined to be "8" in the pattern determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the pattern is not "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern other than "8") (see FIG. 16-10 (E)) (step 120IWS1707) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. If the pattern is "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern "8") (see FIG. 16-10 (F)) (step 120IWS1708) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 16-10 to use based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, and S1709 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the reserved memory buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS1710). In this example, the variation pattern is determined to determine the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. After the variation time is determined, the variation pattern to which the determined variation time is set may be selected from among multiple variation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 120IWS1712), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 120IWS1714).

(Special pattern variation processing)
16-18 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls to transmit, if not yet transmitted, any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a big win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a small win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a time-saving miss, the decision result of the big win type, the decision result of the small win type, and the decision result of the time-saving miss type (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), it checks whether the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1126 is executed and a rescue time reduction occurs, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1127). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS1129). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1131 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then proceed to step 120IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, or time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If it is not determined that the time reduction is to be missed (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", it controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", it controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
16-19 to 16-21 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 120IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 120IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag (time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C) and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 120IWS134).

The time-saving counters include a special 2 time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a combined time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When simply referred to as a "time-saving counter," it refers to both the special 2 time-saving counter and the combined time-saving counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 120IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that are set (any of time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the values are set, the CPU 103 resets the small win counter, the combined time-saving counter, and the special 2 time-saving counter (step 120IWS144), and controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to stop lighting (step 120IWS145). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148.

In this example, the process of steps 120IWS141 to S147 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS149). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if there is a small win fluctuation, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing when the pattern determination period ends, step 120IWS150 is executed, and the small win game state thereafter is controlled to time-saving state C.

If the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS152). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether any of the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) are set (step 120IWS153). If none of the time-saving flags are set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "100" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 120IWS154). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 120IWS156), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "50" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS157). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not B (N in step 120IWS156), that is, if the time-saving miss is C, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "30" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag B and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a time-saving miss, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

The CPU 103 also subtracts 1 from the small win counter (step 120IWS162) and transmits a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

Also, if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process proceeds to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving has been removed, if the time-saving state is in effect, no new time-saving state is set based on the time-saving removal, and the current time-saving state continues (therefore, the values of the special 2 time-saving count counter and the combined time-saving count counter remain at their current values).

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win flag is set (step 120IWS164). If the small win flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS165). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a small win start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before the special winning opening (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Pre-opening processing for small hits)
16-22 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (step 120IWS114) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the special winning opening pre-opening timer has not timed out (i.e., the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends.

If the timer for the time before the special winning opening has timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS402). The CPU 10103 also sets the opening time timer to a value equivalent to the first opening time of the special winning opening (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Small hit open processing)
16-23 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (i.e., if the winning of a game ball into the special winning hole is detected), the CPU 103 controls to send a special winning hole winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (step 120IWS423). If the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (i.e., if the entry of a game ball into the V winning port is detected), the CPU 103 performs control to send a V winning port winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS424). The CPU 103 also sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has occurred (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS426). Whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the small win game starts and checking whether the time from the start of the small win game has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to the open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS428). Whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the V winning opening plate 120IW20 starts to open, and checking whether the time since the V winning opening plate 120IW20 started to open has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to a closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the open time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (i.e., if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431) and checks whether the value of the open time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to a closed state (step 120IWS433). The CPU 103 also sets a value equivalent to a predetermined closing time (interval time) to the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after the opening of the special winning opening (step 120IWS434). Then, the process ends.

If the open time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (i.e., if the special prize opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the close time timer (step 120IWS435) and checks whether the value of the close time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the close time timer is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether all of the special prize openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special prize openings have already been opened four times, the answer is Y in step 120IWS437 and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all of the special winning holes have not been opened (i.e., if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS438). The CPU 103 also sets the closing time timer to a value equivalent to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all special winning slots have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win post-closing processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440).

(Processing after closing small hit)
FIG. 16-24 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special pattern process. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 120IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 120IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

If it is confirmed in the processing of step 120IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 120IWS461). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). If the flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463) and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 16-25 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step 120IWS121) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag (step 120IWS532) and performs control to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 120IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and checks whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). If the rescue time-saving flag is set, the rescue time-saving display is a small jackpot change, and a V win occurs during the small jackpot play, ending the jackpot play to which the rescue time-saving display has been switched. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 120IWS539), sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small jackpot count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state (step S120IWS541). Whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state can be determined, for example, by checking whether the time-saving flag is set at the start of the jackpot game before the processing of steps S120IWS134 and S120IWS456 is executed and the time-saving flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set, a jackpot time-saving flag is set, indicating that the time-saving state was in effect when the jackpot occurred, and in step S120IWS541, it is checked whether the jackpot time-saving flag is set.

If the jackpot occurred during the time-saving state, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the jackpot did not occur in the time-saving state (if it occurred in the normal state), it is checked whether the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). Whether the jackpot was based on the variation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the completed jackpot game state is not based on the variation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the variation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "99", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In this example, when the above process is performed and the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to one time (see step 120IWS544), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to seven times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state than if a jackpot occurs during the normal state.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times (see step 120IWS545), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to 7 times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the normal state than if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one with a lower advantage (in this example, the time reduction state is one time, which is small).

For example, if the change display that caused the rescue time-saving function to occur was a small win change, and a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to a big win game is terminated, if the V win occurs due to a small win change based on the change display of the second special pattern, the function may be configured to control the game to a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times (hence, a time-saving state with a high degree of advantage).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 120IW will be described. FIG. 16-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 16-26, in the normal state, when a jackpot is hit, the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). In addition, even in the normal state, when a miss occurs, when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) is controlled (see step 120IWS160). Furthermore, even in the case of a miss, when a rescue time-saving state occurs (after RAM clear processing, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) is controlled (see step 120IWS150).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-26, in the case of a jackpot in time-saving state A, the state is controlled again to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see step 120IWS537). Also, as shown in FIG. 16-26, in the case of a small jackpot in time-saving state A, the state is controlled to a small jackpot (see step 120IWS69), and in the case of a V-winning in the small jackpot state, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) via a jackpot (see step 120IWS537). Also, in the case of a miss in time-saving state A, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In addition, in the time-saving state A, even if no small win occurs, if the variable display of the second special pattern ends 1, 7, or 99 times without a big win occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In addition, in the time-saving state A, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-26, in the time-saving state B, if a big win occurs, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (the time-saving state via the big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs, the state is controlled to the small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the time-saving state B, even if a small win does not occur, if the variable display of the second special pattern is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a big win, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In the time-saving state B, even if a miss occurs, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (the time-saving state via the time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-26, in the case of a big win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the case of a small win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to a small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the case of time-saving state C, if the 900 fluctuation displays end without a big win, the state is controlled to time-saving state C again (see step 120IWS150). In the case of time-saving state C, if the number of fluctuations reaches 900, the state is controlled to time-saving state C again (see steps 120IWS149, 150). In the case of time-saving state C, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

In addition, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state A but does not result in a V win, time-saving state A will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state B but does not result in a V win, time-saving state B will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state C but does not result in a V win, time-saving state C will continue as is after the small hit play ends.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 16-27 to 16-28 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading out, the read pointer value is incremented by +2 (step 120IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 120IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 120IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 120IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination B designation command is received, a second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination C designation command is received, a second determination C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 120IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 120IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a large prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 sets the large prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received performance control command is a special prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 sets the special prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received performance control command is a V prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 sets the V prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 120IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 120IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 120IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 120IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 120IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a time-saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a special effect mode flag is set, indicating that the effect mode is set to the special effect mode (step 120IWS638). If the special effect mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, if the special effect mode flag is set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the special effect mode (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a setting value command (step 120IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to store the setting value in the setting value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 120IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to start lighting up (step 120IWS644). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 120IWS1126, S1131), so the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 120IWS645), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to stop lighting (step 120IWS646) and starts the execution of the left-hit notification performance (step 120IWS647).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 120IWS648). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 16-29 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 120IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 120IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 120IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 120IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 120IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "big win" or if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns (big win pattern, small win pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as the stopping symbols. Note that, although this example shows a case in which a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned as the same pattern for both the big win pattern and the small win pattern is determined, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to determine a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbol as the small win pattern.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, a stopping pattern that evokes a jackpot (a pattern combination in which the left, center, and right are all the same) is called a jackpot pattern. A stopping pattern that evokes a loss is called a loss pattern.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 16-10 (G)) that specifies a rescue time short entry performance (step 120IWS803). If it is fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the setting value is one of the settings "4" to "6" based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)) (step 120IWS804). If the setting value is not one of the settings "4" to "6", it proceeds to step 120IWS808.

If the setting value is any of settings "4" to "6", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a rescue setting performance and the type of performance depending on whether the setting value is "4" to "6" (step 120IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance (step 120IWS806). If it has been decided not to perform a rescue setting performance, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. If it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance, the performance control CPU 120 sets the special performance mode flag (step 120IWS807) and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to execute a rescue time short period entry effect or a rescue time setting suggestion effect, it selects a process table that includes the rescue time setting suggestion effect (step 120IWS808). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is not fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 16-10(E)) that specifies a time-saving stimulation performance or fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 16-10(F)) that specifies a time-saving stimulation performance (step 120IWS809). If it is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 or fluctuation pattern PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving stimulation performance (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not PT6-2 or PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (see FIG. 16-10 (F)) that specifies a time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS811). If it is fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS812). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814. If it is not fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a normal process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, or step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS815). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 120IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 120IWS816).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 120IWS817).

(Rescue setting suggestion performance determination table)
FIG. 16-30 is an explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS805 of FIG. 16-29 when the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 16-10 (G)).

As shown in Figure 16-30, in the rescue setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 50%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 40%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 5%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 30%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 50%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 10%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 15%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 15%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, if rescue setting suggestion effect A is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "4", if rescue setting suggestion effect B is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "5", and if rescue setting suggestion effect C is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "6".

The rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed when the rescue time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5.

In this example, the rescue setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6," so the rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting is set to a relatively high value.

(Variable display performance processing)
16-31 and 16-32 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 120IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 120IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 120IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (a performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 120IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern determination B designation command nor the second pattern determination B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command has been received (step 120IWS861). Specifically, it checks whether the first determination C command reception flag or the second determination C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 120IWS863). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS865). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS867.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process proceeds to step 120IWS862 and onwards, and the pattern determination period begins. However, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 120IWS862 will normally be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 120IWS862 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting for special drawing)
16-33 and 16-34 are flow charts showing the waiting process for a special drawing (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15. In the waiting process for a special drawing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the determined performance period timer (step 120IWS871), and checks whether the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 120IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS873), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 120IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern (step 120IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern, the processing ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not being displayed as a finalized pattern, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the determined stopping pattern (non-time-saving losing pattern, time-saving losing pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) as a stopped pattern (step 120IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the processing ends.

When the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a small win stop flag indicating that the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the execution of a V winning promotion presentation that encourages the game ball to win the V winning hole (step 120IWS883B), and ends the processing.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 120IWS885A). Note that whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not to display a setting suggestion presentation at the time of the jackpot and the type of presentation (step 120IWS886).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for the performance during the jackpot depending on whether or not there is a setting suggestion performance at the time of the jackpot and its type (step 120IWS887). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS889).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 120IWS890).

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small win stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a small win start command has been received (step 120IWS892). Whether a small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that a small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If a small win start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a small win start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small win stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small win performance (step 120IWS894). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS895), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS896).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 120IWS897).

If the small win stop flag is also not set (i.e., if a non-time-saving losing pattern or a time-saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Table for deciding the setting suggestion effect when the jackpot occurs)
FIG. 16-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120 IWS886.

As shown in Figure 16-35, in the setting suggestion effect determination table when the setting value is set to "1", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "2", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 15%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 15%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, if the jackpot setting suggestion performance A is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "1", if the jackpot setting suggestion performance B is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "2", if the jackpot setting suggestion performance C is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "3", if the jackpot setting suggestion performance D is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "4", if the jackpot setting suggestion performance E is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "5", and if the jackpot setting suggestion performance F is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "6".

The setting suggestion effect at the time of a jackpot is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when a jackpot symbol is displayed.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation of the rescue time-saving entry presentation and the rescue setting suggestion presentation when transitioning to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 16-36 to 16-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation up to the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 16-36 to 16-37, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) ... (G).

As shown in FIG. 16-36 (A), the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 begins to change one change before the transition to the rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 16-36 (B), when the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 starts to change, the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. In the rescue time-saving entry effect, first, while the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 changes, the entry suggestion display 120IW105, which suggests entry into the rescue time-saving mode and reads "Super hot!", is displayed, and the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. Note that from then on, in the rescue time-saving entry effect, the decorative pattern 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-36(C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 16-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 120IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the user to press the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 16-36(D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, and the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, a right-hit instruction display 120IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Furthermore, if it has been decided that a rescue setting suggestion effect should be executed, the rescue setting suggestion effect is executed, and a setting value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting a setting value is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. This suggests that the setting value is one of settings "4" to "6."

For example, when rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in blue, when rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in green, and when rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in red, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display can be configured to differ depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, a triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, when rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, a diamond-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, a star-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and the display shape of the setting value suggestion display may be changed depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 16-36 (D). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a presentation (so-called reserved consecutive presentation) in the same manner as in FIG. 16-36 (D) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short change display time of 0.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 16-10(B)). Therefore, the change display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the change display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 16-36(D) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 16-36(D) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a presentation similar to that of FIG. 16-36 may be executed to produce a presentation that appears to be a rescue time reduction, and then a presentation that notifies of a jackpot may be executed.

Although the example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 120IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1", the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 120IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the previous stopping pattern, and various modes are possible.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion effect is executed when a rescue time reduction occurs and a pseudo consecutive hold effect is executed, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, or it may be configured not to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed. Also, when executing a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different from when a rescue time reduction occurs, or the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-37(E), a mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode during rescue time reduction. For example, a screen is displayed to select one of modes A to D. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. If a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 120IW101. Also, the rescue setting suggestion presentation continues to be executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on this screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-37(F), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 120IW110 is displayed to notify that the rescue time reduction will start. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction started" are displayed. At this time, the small symbols 120IW101 stop.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-37(G), when the next change starts, the game transitions to time-saving state C, and the rescue time-saving mode starts. At this time, the background image changes to the background image (red) for the special performance mode.

In this example, the rescue time-saving entry effect is executed one change before entering the rescue time-saving mode, but it is also possible to display the number of spins remaining until the rescue time-saving mode, explain the effects during the rescue time-saving mode, and display a countdown before that change.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the time-saving state continues until a small hit occurs uniformly in the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving. Below, a modified example 1 in which the time-saving state continues until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is described.

Figure 16-38 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in modified example 1. In modified example 1, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 16-19 and 16-20. In modified example 1, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "2" (step 120IWS149X). In addition, the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 16-20.

By executing the above process, in variant 1, in the case of time-saving state A via a big win and time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until one small win occurs, whereas in the case of time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until two small wins occur.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small wins occur between time-saving state A via a big win and time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to continue until two small wins occur in time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, but the time-saving state may be configured to continue until another number of small wins occur, such as three.

(Variation 2)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the start of the small hit fluctuation (see steps 120IWS71 to S75), but the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the small hit counter may be executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation. Below, we will explain the modified example 2 in which the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation.

Figure 16-39 is a flow chart showing the process after the small hit is closed in variant 2. In variant 2, the processes in steps 120IWS451 to S463 are the same as those shown in Figure 16-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small win counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) that have been set and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in Figure 16-24.

(Variation 3)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the rescue time reduction is to be performed, the time reduction state is uniformly controlled at the end of the pattern determination period, but it is not limited to such a form, and when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable, it may be configured to be controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the small win game. Below, we will explain a modified example 3 in which the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the small win game when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable.

Figure 16-40 is a flowchart showing the process after the small win is closed in variant 3. Note that in variant 3, even if the rescue time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148 during the special symbol stop process, if the small win flag is set, the process in steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed.

In the third modification, the processing of steps S120IWS451 to S462 is the same as those shown in FIG. 16-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step S120IWS462A). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set rescue time-saving determination flag (step S120IWS462B). The CPU 103 also sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step S120IWS462C). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls it to the time-saving state (step S120IWS462D). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in Figure 16-24.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the case of controlling to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (time reduction state with one time reduction) has been shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, it may be configured to control to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (for example, a time reduction state with seven time reductions). Below, a description will be given of a modified example 4 in which, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state with a higher advantage (time reduction state with seven time reductions) is controlled.

Figure 16-41 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end processing in variant 4. In variant 4, the processing of steps 120IWS531 to S539 in the jackpot end processing is the same as those shown in Figure 16-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540X). Note that the processing of steps 120IWS541 to S541 is the same as those shown in Figure 16-25.

In the fourth modified example, by executing the above process, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, when considering the case where the change display of the first special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a higher advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is more than 1 time). On the other hand, when considering the case where the change display of the second special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a lower advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is less than 99 times).

(Variation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, after the rescue time reduction is started, if the 900 variable display times are completed without a big win or a small win occurring during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction is started again (the rescue time reduction loops), but this is not limited to such a case, and the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction may be configured to end temporarily. Below, a description is given of a modified example 5 in which the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction is configured to end temporarily.

Figure 16-42 is a flow chart showing the normal processing of special symbols in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S85 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 16-15 and 16-16. In the modified example 5, if the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or a small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS85B). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 16-16.

Figure 16-43 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS to S148 in the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 16-19 and 16-20. In the modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time reduction counter to "900", the combined time reduction counter to "900", and the small win counter to "1" (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the modified example 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred. Note that the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figures 16-20 and 16-21.

By executing the above process, in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and then the rescue time reduction counter is set if 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Therefore, in variant 5, even if 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time reduction state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 6)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, so during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, in the normal processing of the special symbol, Y is determined in step 120IWS83, and the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS84 is not executed. Note that the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter may be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Below, a description is given of modified example 6, which allows the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter to be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction.

Figure 16-44 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of special symbols in variant 6. In variant 6, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S82 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 16-15 and 16-16. In variant 6, there is no process of determining the value of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 simply subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0 (i.e., a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "0" (step 120IWS84B). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS84E). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as that shown in Figure 16-16.

By executing the above process, in variant 6, as in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and the rescue time reduction counter is set when 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Therefore, in variant 6, even if 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time reduction state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 7)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5 and modified example 6, it may be further configured to be able to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance. And, it may be configured to limit the pre-reading advance notice performance in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended. Below, we will explain modified example 7, which limits the pre-reading advance notice performance in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended.

In the seventh variant, in the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment of whether or not a big win or a small win will occur, whether or not the time-saving feature will be missed, the big win type, the small win type, the time-saving feature type, the variation pattern type, and the like. Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a look-ahead judgment result designation command capable of identifying the look-ahead judgment result to the performance control CPU 120. In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of a look-ahead notice performance based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received, and performs control to execute the look-ahead notice performance for one or more variation displays before the variation display of the predicted target is executed.

Figure 16-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant 7. As shown in Figure 16-45, when 900 variable display cycles have been completed without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss since the rescue time-saving count counter was set, rescue time-saving occurs and control is exercised in time-saving state C. Next, when another 900 variable display cycles have been completed without a big win or small win during time-saving state C via rescue time-saving (i.e., when the 1800th variable display cycle has been completed since the rescue time-saving count counter was set), time-saving state C ends.

The performance control CPU 120 also restricts the execution of the look-ahead preview performance during a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C ends. In this example, since the upper limit of the combined reserved memory number is 8, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends until the rescue time-saving state starts, and during a specific period from the rescue time-saving state starts until the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16-45, when counting after the rescue time-saving count counter is set, it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed from the 1792nd change display to the 1808th change display.

The "restriction on look-ahead preview performance" may be controlled so that look-ahead preview performance is not executed at all, or the probability of execution of the look-ahead preview performance may be reduced, or only some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be executed.

(Variation 8)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each modification, the control of a plurality of time-saving states may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Fig. 16-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of the control of various time-saving states in modification 8. In the example shown in Fig. 16-46, when the big win game state is ended (timing T1), a transition to time-saving state A with the time-saving number of times being 99 is shown.

Next, at timing T2 while the time-saving state A continues, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving failure) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 16-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, 30 times of time-saving) based on the new time-saving failure is started. Then, when the 30 times of the fluctuation display are completed (timing T3), the control of the time-saving state B is terminated. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 16-46, the control of the time-saving state A continues because the 99 times of the fluctuation display have not yet been completed at the stage of timing T3. Note that, during the period from timing T2 to T3, the control of the time-saving state A and the control of the time-saving state B are executed in parallel internally, but it appears that the time-saving state continues as it is.

Next, at timing T4 while the time-saving state A is continuing, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving miss) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 16-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, the number of time-saving times is 30) based on the new time-saving miss is started. Then, at timing T5 before the end of the 30-time variable display, the 99th variable display after the control to the time-saving state A is ended, and the control to the time-saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 16-46, the control of the time-saving state B continues because the 30-time variable display has not yet been ended at the stage of timing T5. Then, when the 30-time variable display is ended (timing T6), the control to the time-saving state B is ended. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time-saving state A is ended at timing T5 after the end of the jackpot game, but the control of the time-saving state B is also executed in parallel, so it appears that the control to the time-saving state has been continued for more than 99 times after the end of the jackpot game.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, by judging Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, a common fluctuation pattern can be determined when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved, a different fluctuation pattern can be determined.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, by switching to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode, the setting suggestion performance can be executed even after the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, in the variable display before the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established, a provocative performance such as "special performance mode??" can be executed to execute the setting suggestion performance.

As explained above, the characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples have the inventive configurations shown below in (Means A1) to (Means A10), (Means B1) to (Means B6), (Means C1) to (Means C5), and (Means D1) to (Means D5).

(Means A1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (e.g., a special state control means for controlling the game to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, when a rescue time reduction is established) by setting the value of the first special symbol to "0" (for example, "0") (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150); an updating means for updating numerical information when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, regardless of whether a variable display of the first special symbol is executed or a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly); and a special state control means for controlling the game to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from an advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small win symbol) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, a part for executing steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100); and a counting means for counting the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state. and special state terminating means for terminating the special state (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100). The special state terminating means is capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means has occurred reaching a specific number of times (for example, once) (for example, when Y is determined in step 120IWS74, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75, and determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143). The special state control means is capable of controlling to the special state during the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed when a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established. (for example, even in the case of a small win variation, if the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the pattern determination period, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, and in the subsequent small win game state, it is controlled to time-shortening state C), and the special counting means does not count a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the variation to subtract 1 from the small win number counter, and executes step 120IWS149 at the end of the variation in the case of rescue time-shortening to set the small win number counter, so in the small win variation in which rescue time-shortening is established, after the small win number counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win number counter is not immediately subtracted in the variable display). Such a configuration allows for optimal control in situations where both special and special states occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, preventing disadvantages to the player.

In this example, regarding "controllable to a special state during a special state," when the change display that is the time-saving relief is a small win change, the time-saving state C is changed at the end of the pattern determination period, and then the time-saving state C is controlled during the small win game, but the timing of the change to the time-saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the time-saving state C may be changed from the start of the small win change that is the time-saving relief, or the time-saving state C may be changed halfway through the small win game. In this way, it is sufficient if there is a period during the small win game that is controlled to the time-saving state C in some form. In addition, when the time-saving state C is changed from the start of the small win change, the small win count counter may also be decremented at the start of the small win change.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the "specific number of times" is one time, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to end based on the occurrence of multiple small wins, such as two or three, during the time-saving state, and multiple times may be set as the specific number of times.

(Means A2) In means A1, the special state ending means may be configured to end the special state when the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number (e.g., 1 time) and when a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 1 time, 7 times, 99 times, 900 times) in the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when Y is determined in step 120IWS74, sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS82 when Y is determined in step 120IWS78 and when Y is determined in step 120IWS81, and executes step 120IWS143 by determining Y in step 120IWS141). Such a configuration allows for suitable control in situations where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, thereby preventing disadvantages to the player.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the special state control means can control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes the same (for example, 1 time) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "1" in step 120IWS149). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the special state control means may be configured to control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means is different (for example, 2 times) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, in variant 1, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

In addition, it may be difficult for a player to immediately notice the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving function, but in variant 1, while in the normal time-saving state the time-saving state ends with one small win, the time-saving state ends with two small wins only when the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving function, so that even if the first small win misses a win in the second start winning hole (misses the charge of the second reserved memory), another chance to win a win in the second start winning hole can be given.

In addition, in variant 1, in the normal time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is often as small as 1 or 7, and there are relatively few cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs, whereas in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is as high as 900, and there are many cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs. Therefore, by reliably ending the time-saving state when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent players from playing in a strategic manner.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the special state control means may be configured to count the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is met (for example, in variant 2, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation where the rescue time reduction is met, after the small win count counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win count counter is immediately decremented in the variable display). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, if a strategy element remains by controlling to the special state in a special state where a special condition is met, it becomes a strategy element for the player, and the risk of it becoming a disadvantage to the game center can be reduced.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to A5, the special state control means may be configured such that, when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display in which a special condition is established, the special state can be controlled to a special state after a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result (for example, in variant example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation in which rescue time reduction is established, the time reduction state C is controlled at the end of the small win game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation in which both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is established and control is established to a special state, it is possible to wait until the control of the special state starts, making it easier to perform various controls.

(Means A7) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time-saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time-saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), derive and display a special display result in a variable display where a special condition is met, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, and the game medium passes through a specific area, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control the game to a first special state after the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous to the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous to the game facility).

(Means A8) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time-saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time-saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A9) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) that is less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S54 2), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the advantageous state is controlled based on the game medium passing through a specific area, and the advantageous state can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S542, if a V win occurs due to a small win fluctuation based on the variable display of the second special pattern, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of the special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A10) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) that is less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means B1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CP) that can execute a presentation corresponding to the variable display. and a part for executing steps S170 to S173 in U120), the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time-saving is established) by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), the update means updates the numerical information when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, regardless of whether a variable display of the first special pattern is executed or a variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the value of the rescue time-saving number counter is updated uniformly), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result (for example, a pattern that does not cause a time-saving) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed. (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), controls to a special state when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, and there are a plurality of types of special display results including a first special display result (e.g., the pattern "6" in the time-saving miss A) and a second special display result (e.g., the pattern "8" in the time-saving miss A), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160 regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed), and the performance execution means controls to a special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is not satisfied in a normal state, The present invention is characterized in that different presentations are executed when the first special display result is displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when step 120IWS1706 is N, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710, and when step 120IWS1706 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710, and can determine different variation patterns), and when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied in the normal state is executed, a common presentation is executed when the first special display result is displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time-saving misses but a rescue time-saving occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and can determine a common variation pattern). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to a derived display of a special display result occur. For example, it is possible to provide an appropriate presentation when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, the "same special state" is controlled to the time-saving state B of 100 times the same number of times when the time-saving miss A occurs (see step 120IWS155, S160), regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. However, this is not limited to such a case. For example, the "same special state" may be configured to execute one or more of the following: (1) controlling to the same number of times the time-saving, (2) determining the variation pattern of the special pattern using the same variation pattern table, (3) determining the variation pattern of the normal pattern using the same variation pattern table, and (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to the open state using the same opening pattern, or may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

In this example, a case where a different variation pattern is determined as "executing a different presentation" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a different added time may be added to the variation time indicated by the variation pattern when the pattern "6" is derived and displayed and when the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. Also, for example, a configuration may be made to execute either (1) a process to determine a different variation pattern or (2) a process to add a different added time, or a configuration may be made to execute both.

In addition to differentiating the change time, the pattern determination period at the end of the change may also be different.

(Means B2) In means B1, the effect execution means may be configured to be capable of executing a common effect when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed in a special state (for example, if Y is determined in step 120IWS1704 and Y is determined in step 120IWS1705, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 to determine a common variation pattern). With such a configuration, control can be performed appropriately even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, an appropriate effect can be performed when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, when the first special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/200 that the time-saving feature has failed, and when the second special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/400 that the time-saving feature has failed. However, this is not the only possible embodiment, and for example, the probability of the time-saving feature failing when the second special pattern change display is executed may be further lowered (for example, to 1/800) to make it less likely that the time-saving feature will fail during the time-saving mode.

Also, for example, the probability of the time-saving feature missing when the second special symbol change display is executed may be increased so that if there is a second reserved memory when the time-saving feature ends, the revival effect is more likely to be executed by the change display of the second special symbol after the time-saving feature ends.

(Means B3) Means B1 or B2 may be provided with a display result determination means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the display result, and the display result determination means may be configured to execute a common process for determining the type of display result that will be controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state, and for determining the type of special display result when a special display result is obtained (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS93 in common when determining a jackpot pattern and when determining a time-saving miss pattern). With such a configuration, the common process can be used to suppress an increase in program capacity.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to B3, a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that executes control of the variable display, and the variable display control means determines a variable display period during which the variable display is executed according to the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern), and when a variable display is executed in which a special condition is met in the normal state, determines a different variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed, in step 12 When 0IWS1706 is N, steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 are executed, and when 120IWS1706 is Y, steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 are executed, and different variation patterns can be determined), when variable display is executed in a special state, a common variable display period is determined for the case where the first special display result is derived and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time reduction is missed but the time reduction is rescued, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and a common variation pattern can be determined). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted according to the situation.

(Means B5) In any of means B1 to B4, the effect execution means may be configured to execute different effects when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed when a variable display is executed for which a special condition is met in the normal state (for example, in variant example 9, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to determine different variation patterns even when the time-saving misses and a rescue time-saving occurs). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be optimized according to the situation.

(Means B6) Any of means B1 to B5 may be provided with a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that controls the variable display, and the variable display control means may be configured to determine a fixed display period for the display result, and the fixed display period may be changed depending on the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted depending on the situation.

In this example, the pattern determination period is varied depending on whether a rescue time reduction has occurred and the display result, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pattern determination period may be constant (e.g., 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether a rescue time reduction has occurred or the display result.

(Means C1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and a numerical information (e.g., a rescue and a setting means (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can set the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) so that a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time reduction is established). The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and a notification effect execution means (for example, an execution means) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a rescue time reduction entry effect) that notifies that the special state is controlled by the special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition. The display control CPU 120 further includes a part for executing steps 120IWS808, S845 in the output control CPU 120) and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 120IWS808, S845 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect) that suggests the setting value set by the setting means, and the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect when a notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS808, S845, and is capable of executing a rescue time setting suggestion effect when a rescue time short entry effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control even in a situation where both a case where a special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition and a case where a special state is controlled by the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when a special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition. In addition, the probability that the special condition will be met changes depending on the set value, so by executing suggestive effects depending on the probability that the special condition will be met, it is possible to increase the player's interest when the special state is reached.

In this example, the probability of a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, and as a result, the likelihood of a rescue time reduction occurring also differs, with rescue time reduction occurring more easily when the setting value is set low. Therefore, when a rescue time reduction occurs, there is a possibility that the setting value may be set low. Therefore, in this example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect is executed during the rescue time reduction, which gives the player some sense that the setting value is high, making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease. Therefore, in this example, the rescue time setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed when the setting value is set to a relatively high value of "4" to "6," and the execution rate is set differently from the setting suggestion effect executed at other times, such as the jackpot setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In means C1, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect when the variable display where a special condition is met is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not process rescue time reduction in the event of a jackpot fluctuation). With such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed without interfering with other effects.

In this example, we show a case where rescue time reduction processing is not performed for large hit fluctuations, while rescue time reduction processing is performed for small hit fluctuations, but this is not limited to such a case, and the configuration may be such that rescue time reduction processing is not performed for small hit fluctuations either.

(Means C3) In means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute the suggestion effect even after a special condition is met (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when step 120IWS638 is Y). Such a configuration allows for suggestion of setting values over a long period of time, which can increase interest.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect before a special condition is met (for example, in variant 10, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect in a variable display prior to a variable display in which the rescue time reduction is met, based on the results of a look-ahead determination). Such a configuration allows for suggestions of setting values over a long period of time, thereby increasing interest.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute other suggestion effects (e.g., a setting suggestion effect at the time of a big win) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion effect when a special condition is established (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and S176), and suggestion effects that suggest favorable setting values are more likely to be executed when a special condition is established than other suggestion effects (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-30, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6", so that the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that a relatively high setting is set). With such a configuration, the more favorable the setting value, the lower the probability of the special condition being established, so by executing the suggestion effect, the player's interest when the special condition is established can be increased.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the jackpot is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed during the round period or the ending period of the jackpot game.

(Means D1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a controller that controls the game machine to perform a variable display. and updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can subtract and update numerical information (for example, a rescue time shortening counter) from a set initial value (for example, "900") based on the fact that the numerical information is updated by subtracting it from the set initial value (for example, "900"), and the special state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information that the update means subtracts and updates becomes a specific value (for example, "0") (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), and the update means controls the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated by subtracting it when a variable display is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time shortening counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it is set to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the fifth and sixth modified examples, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S120IWS85B and S84E), and the special state control means changes the state from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it by the update means has become a specific value. After the control, during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set, the update means does not control again from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information updated by subtraction has become a specific value (for example, in the modified example 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS83. In the modified example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS84A or when N is determined in step 120IWS84C). With such a configuration, when controlling the transition to the special state according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update processing can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, so that an increase in the capacity of the program can be prevented and suitable control can be achieved. For example, if the transition to the special state is not performed when the numerical information becomes a specific value, a reduction in capacity due to the preparation of a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached can be prevented.

The specified conditions include the case where the rescue time reduction counter is set when the time reduction state via rescue time reduction ends by executing steps 120IWS85B and S84E, as well as the case where step 120IWS13 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs.

When the rescue time reduction counter is set when a jackpot occurs, it may be set at the start of the jackpot game, during a round of the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, when setting the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the current value of the rescue time reduction counter may be maintained when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting. Conversely, the rescue time reduction counter may be configured to be maintained when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting.

(Means D2) In means D1, the update means may be configured to be capable of subtractively updating the numerical information in cases where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value and where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is a specific value (for example, in variant example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when N is in step 120IWS84A), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is less than the specific value, the numerical information is updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84B when Y is in step 120IWS84A). With this configuration, when controlling the transition to a special state according to the number of times the variable display is made, the subtraction update process can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, which prevents the program capacity from increasing and enables suitable control. For example, if the transition to a special state is not made when the numerical information becomes a specific value, it is possible to prevent a reduction in capacity due to the need to prepare a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached.

(Means D3) Means D1 or D2 may be configured to include an operating means (e.g., a clear switch) for performing an operation, and an initial value setting means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100) for setting the numerical information updated by the update means to an initial value in response to the operation of the operating means. With such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the numerical information to the initial value by operating the operating means, thereby improving convenience in terms of operation.

In addition, a dedicated operating means (button or switch) other than the clear switch may be provided as an operating means for changing settings or setting the rescue time reduction counter.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, the special state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving missing pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even when the numerical information updated by the update means is a specific value, and to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even after the numerical information updated by the update means has become a specific value (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 can execute step 120IWS88 regardless of whether or not the game is in time-saving state C via rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to control to a special state after the numerical information updated by subtraction becomes a specific value again, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means D5) In any of means D1 to D4, a decision means for deciding whether or not to control to an advantageous state (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100), a judgment means for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state before the decision of the decision means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a pre-reading preview performance execution means capable of executing a pre-reading preview performance based on the judgment result of the judgment means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS102 in the performance control CPU 120). The system may be configured to include a portion for executing step S161, and a pre-reading notice performance limiting means for limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice performance during a predetermined period before the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value and during a specific period after the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, in modified example 7, as shown in FIG. 16-45, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is limited during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends to the time-saving relief state, and during a specific period from the time-saving relief state C ends to the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game because there is a possibility that the numerical information updated by the subtraction will be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again.

In the above characteristic part 120IW and each modified example, the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is triggered is uniformly 900 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction may be configured to be triggered based on the execution of the variable display a different number of times depending on the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" to "5", the rescue time reduction may be triggered based on the execution of 900 variable displays without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, while when the set value is "6", the rescue time reduction may be triggered based on the execution of 600 variable displays without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss. Alternatively, the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different only for specific set values.

Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different for each setting value for all of the setting values "1" to "6". In this case, for example, the ratio of the denominator of the jackpot probability to the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be configured to be approximately 3 times. Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different within the range of 2.5P≦n≦3.0P (P=denominator of the jackpot probability, n=number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered).

In addition, even if the time-saving state is reached via rescue time-saving, the time-saving state may not necessarily continue until the next big win occurs. In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end when a small win occurs as shown in characteristic part 120IW above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end when the variable display has ended a specified number of times (900 times in this example) as shown in variant 5 and variant 6.

Also, as shown in variants 5 and 6, after the variable display ends a specified number of times (900 times in this example) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving and transitions to the normal state, if the variable display ends a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss, the time-saving state may be changed to rescue time-saving again and transitions to the time-saving state, or it may be configured not to enter rescue time-saving again. In this case, if it is configured not to enter rescue time-saving again, for example, if the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0, the process of decrementing the rescue time-saving counter may be controlled not to be performed from the next processing, or the process of decrementing the rescue time-saving counter from the next processing and resetting it to 0 if it becomes a negative value may be configured.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1A) to (Means 10A) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. ), and the state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means may be configured to update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing the player's motivation to play.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player is rescued when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed consecutively, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 3A) In means 1A or means 2A, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, or a guaranteed bonus state). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state once, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to 3A, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS13, S135, S149, and S161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5A) Means 4A may be configured so that the predetermined condition is to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling from becoming more than necessary.

(Means 6A) In means 4A, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7A) In means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of salvation for the player.

(Means 8A) Means 4A may be provided with a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., a portion that executes steps S8 and 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a portion executing steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (for example, a portion executing steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (for example, a portion executing steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to add changes to the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 10A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, the player is not made more aware than necessary that the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1B-1), (Means 1B-2) to (Means 5B) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1B-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of the variable display. The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating information (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a process execution means (e.g., a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion for executing step S120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; and a portion for executing step S120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion for executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion for executing steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes a second process relating to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value. The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third value different from the first and second values (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process). In the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path to play a game, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play a game, and a firing promotion notification means may be provided to issue a firing promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be fired to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a firing promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, it is possible to execute a performance related to the firing promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. and a processing execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes processing corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special count (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S120IWS85 and S86; and a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS150; an updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS84), a processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S110 to S113), When the data value is a second value different from the first value, a second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a third value different from the first value and the second value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a presentation execution means that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In means 1B-1 and 1B-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met. With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player, and a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, 1B-2 or 2B, the update means updates the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the process execution means may be configured to change the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value, and to change the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls to a special state, and to execute different processes when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information. With such a configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed preferably by managing the special information.

(Means 4B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 6C) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in a gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in a presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means executes a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a portion executing steps S120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling numerical information based on execution of a variable display (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (e.g., The update means can control the game to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, the portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a first numerical value in a normal state, set the state information to a second numerical value when the state is controlled to a special state after the state is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and set the state information to a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values when the state is controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, and the game control means may be configured to transmit specific information to the presentation control means and to transmit specific information corresponding to the case where the state information is the second numerical value and the case where the state information is the third numerical value when the state is in a special state. With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be performed when the presentation control means performs a different presentation.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition. Such a configuration allows for suitable control even when new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier as different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4C) In any of means 1C to 3C, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result, and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. Such a configuration makes it possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since new presentations are not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 4D) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., steps S170 to S17 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display when the power supply is stopped. and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., a portion executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). The game control means is capable of transmitting predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started, and the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation relating to the number of times the variable display is executed for a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, this will motivate players to start playing from the opening of the amusement arcade, which can increase the utilization rate of gaming machines.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information stored in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started. Such a configuration makes it possible to provide suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, increasing the operating rate of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in the processing burden.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information, and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and second specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than the predetermined value. Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced and processing related to the specific information can be suitably realized.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to 3D, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number, and to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1E-1) and (Means 1E-2) below may be applied to the above characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is met; an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display has been executed when power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means including information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is met. The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS85 and 120IWS86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing set values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display has been executed when power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) which stores numerical information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing set values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 090IW)
Next, the characteristic part 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 090IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time-saving state via the small win game state based on the derivation and display of the small win pattern. In addition, the display result of the small win includes the display result of the small win A or the small win B that can be controlled in the time-saving state, and the display result of the small win C that cannot be controlled in the time-saving state. And, the ratio of the display result of the small win A or the small win B being derived and displayed is different between the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the first special pattern and the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the second special pattern.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
17-1(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 17-1(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 17-1(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 17-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on a random number for determining the type of jackpot when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

As shown in FIG. 17-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Once the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 17-1(A), in this example, if the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in FIG. 17-1(B), in this example, if the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability.

The type of jackpot is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-saving times (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) or multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds or 4 rounds) may be provided. In addition, this example shows a case where only time-saving jackpots that transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends are provided, but it is also possible to configure it so that there are non-time-saving jackpots (normal jackpots) that do not transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, this example shows a case where a 100R time-saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but it is also possible to configure it so that multiple types of jackpot types are determined even when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Figure 17-1 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. As shown in Figure 17-1 (C), the small win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as either "small win A", "small win B", or "small win C" based on a random number for determining the type of win when a decision is made to make the variable display result a small win pattern.

A "small win A" is a small win that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small win game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small win game (first round) did not win a V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 10 variable displays are completed. Note that a "small win A" is a small win that controls the game to a big win game state for the second to fourth rounds, on the condition that a V win has occurred, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big win game state ends. However, when a "small win A" occurs, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that a V win does not occur.

A "small win B" is a small win that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small win game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small win game (first round) did not make a V win (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the end of the five variable displays. Note that a "small win B" is a small win that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big win game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big win game state ends. However, when a "small win B" occurs, the opening pattern is first controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit C" is a small hit that does not transition to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, even if the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) does not enter the V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Also, a "small hit C" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. And when a "small hit C" occurs, the opening pattern is controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win occurs in most cases.

As shown in Figure 17-1 (C), in this example, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 50% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

As shown in Figure 17-1 (D), in this example, when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 90% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

The types of small wins are not limited to the ones shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving big wins with different times of time saving (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) may be provided. Also, it may be configured to provide a small win without V winning, in which a V win is practically impossible during small win play and there is no transition to a big win play after a small win play.

In addition, since the probability of a small win is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the rate of small win A or small win B (i.e., a small win with time reduction) is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the rate of a small win with time reduction may be 100%.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be described. Figure 17-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 17-2, after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2.

As shown in Figure 17-2 (A), in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning port opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning port) is opened for 0.05 seconds, then after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning port is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning port is opened and closed twice in the same manner.

Also, as shown in Figure 17-2 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state, so that the special winning hole is opened for 0.05 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened again for 0.05 seconds, repeating this action, so that the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

The operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction), and in either case it is open for 8 seconds.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the event of a small win is extremely short at 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device is formed with multiple regulating pieces, and about 2 to 3 game balls snake down the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, so even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member is controlled to be in the open state, the game balls on the bottom member can fall and enter the special variable winning ball device.

And, in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is open, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is possible for the game ball to enter the V prize opening. Also, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is closed, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the V prize opening.

In the case of a small win C (no time reduction), if the game ball that enters the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is not controlled to the time reduction state, but in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), if the game ball that enters the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is controlled to the time reduction state. As a result, in the case of a small win C (no time reduction), it is highly likely that the game ball will pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it will not be controlled to the time reduction state, and in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), it is highly unlikely that the game ball will not pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it is highly likely that it will be controlled to the time reduction state.

If the game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period starts from timing S3 to S4, but the ending period t3 in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of small hit C (without time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. This makes it possible to ensure time to display the start screen for the time-saving state (see Figure 17-9 (N)) in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction).

In the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning hole (i.e., whether or not the game transitions to the time reduction state). Specifically, when the game ball has not entered the V winning hole, the game is controlled to the time reduction state, so in this case the ending period is lengthened.

In this way, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using different patterns (in this example, the number of openings) when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the device to a time-saving state.

Specifically, in this example, a V winning hole opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that blocks the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that does not block the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 17-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. Among these, FIG. 17-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 17-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Figure 17-3. As shown in Figure 17-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the following: variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). Also, when executing the change display of the first special symbol, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the following: change pattern PA1-5 (shortened change), change pattern PA1-6 (shortened change with no reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), change pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), or change pattern PA2-4 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β). In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-3, in this example, when the first special symbol is changed to a variable display, if a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).Also, when the first special symbol is changed to a variable display, if a small hit C occurs during the time reduction state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-3, in this example, when the first special symbol change display is executed, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the change patterns PC1-4 (non-reach with normal change → development effect), PC1-5 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), and PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect). Also, when the first special symbol change display is executed, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the change patterns PC1-6 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), and PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIG. 17-4. As shown in FIG. 17-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-1 or variation pattern PA3-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA3-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 17-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-5 (normal reach). Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be either variable pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC3-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 17-4, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if small wins A to C occur during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach). Also, if small win C occurs during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-4, in this example, when the second special symbol change display is executed, if small win A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be either change pattern PD3-4 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect) or change pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol change display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol change display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

In this way, in this example, the rate at which the development performance is executed as a specific performance during the variable display differs between when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the paste performance is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development performance is not executed. This avoids inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after the big hit game state or the time-saving state, allowing the look-ahead preview performance to be executed optimally.

In addition, when a small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, a fluctuation pattern common to a small hit C (without time reduction), a miss, or a big hit may be set.

(Processing after closing small hit)
FIG. 17-5 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special pattern process processing in the feature section 090IW. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 090IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 090IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 090IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the processing of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether it is a small win A or not (step 090IWS461). If it is a small win A, it checks whether the non-V winning flag is set or not (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS462). The time-saving counter is set to "10" (step 090IWS463). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation A command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 confirms that the winning is not a small win A (step 090IWS461: N), it checks whether the winning is a small win B (step 090IWS467). If the winning is a small win B, it checks whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, it proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS468). It sets the time-saving counter to "5" (step 090IWS469). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation B command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). It then proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 determines that the winning combination is not a small win B (step 090IWS467: N), it sends a small win end command C to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, it proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 090IWS465). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

The timer that measures the ending period after the small hit closes is set to a value depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time reduction) or a small hit C (without time reduction), but the value is set so that the ending period in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of a small hit C (without time reduction).

(Waiting for special drawing)
17-6 and 17-7 are flow charts showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15 in the characteristic part 090IW. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the big win stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The big win stop flag is a flag indicating that the big win symbol has already been derived and displayed but the big win start designation command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the big win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small win stop flag is a flag indicating that the small win pattern has already been derived and displayed but that the small win start command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS883, which will be described later. If the small win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small win stop flag is also not set, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (miss pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) (step 090IWS873).

If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether or not a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the processing ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the performance during the jackpot (step 090IWS878). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS880).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

If the big win symbol is not displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). If the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small win stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win start command has been received (step 090IWS885). Whether the small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that the small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small win start command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If a small hit start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small hit A or a small hit B, a process table for a small hit notification performance that notifies the player that it is a small hit and a right hit instruction A that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Also, if it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (without time reduction), a process data for a V winning promotion performance that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hit instruction B that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right hit instruction A and the right hit instruction B have different aspects. Also, the right hit instruction is also different from the right hit instruction C in the time reduction state. For example, the size, position, and content of the image showing the right-hit instruction may differ.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS889). The performance control CPU 120 also sets a small win performance period measurement timer to measure the performance period during small win play (step 090IWS890).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 090IWS891).

In this example, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state during small win play, so in the small win performance processing, a performance corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is executed as a small win performance.

If it is determined that there will be neither a big win nor a small win (N in step 090IWS882), i.e., if it is determined that there will be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Example of performance)
Next, specific examples of the presentation when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, and when small hit C (without time reduction) will be explained.

Figures 17-8 to 17-10 show the screen transitions when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 17-8(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning slot, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning slot and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 begins. Then, linked to the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, begin to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figure 17-8 (B) and (C), let's say that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 stop and the big win symbol creates a normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 17-8 (D), let us assume that the middle decorative pattern 090IW101 stops and the missing pattern stops. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not completely stopped, but is in a temporary stopped state that involves shaking. Note that the small pattern 090IW100 continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner.

As shown in FIG. 17-8(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is temporarily erased and the development performance is executed. In this example, the word "Time-saving?" 090IW102, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. Note that the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 17-8(F), after the development shown in FIG. 17-8(E) is executed, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is displayed again. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed.

As shown in Figure 17-8 (G) (H), let's say that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and a small win A or small win B is in reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 17-9 (I), the remaining decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, and the small win pattern "135" for small win A or small win B stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135".

As shown in Figure 17-9 (J), when the small win pattern "135" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 17-9 (K), when a small win game starts, the background A during the small win is displayed, and the text "small win in progress" 090IW105 is displayed to inform the player that a small win game is in progress. In addition, in the case of small win A or small win B, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the V winning hole, making it difficult to generate a big win. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than small win C, which is easier to generate a big win, but in the case of small win A or small win B, the V is not won, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device, the right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen so as not to unnecessarily stir up the player's disappointment. The right hit instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the words "right hit" and an arrow pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the small win background A is a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as by featuring a character.

As shown in Figure 17-9 (L), when the small win game state ends without a win in the V winning slot, an ending screen is displayed during the ending period of the small win. For example, a background or character corresponding to the ending screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 17-9 (M), after the end screen of the small win game is displayed, the start screen of the time-saving mode is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time-saving mode is starting and the number of times the time-saving mode will change are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 17-9 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time-saving state ends, the display of the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right starts to change, and the control of the time-saving state starts. When the control of the time-saving state starts, the background during the time-saving state is displayed, and the number of remaining changes in the time-saving state 090IW107 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, during the time-saving state, a right-hit instruction display (right-hit instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen to allow the game ball to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving state is composed of the characters "right hit" and two arrows pointing to the right. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 is displayed larger than the right-hit instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in Figure 17-9 (O), Figure 17-10 (P) (Q), assume that the decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, the small pattern 090IW100 stops, and the loss pattern stops.

As shown in FIG. 17-10 (R), the next change is then started, and when the display of the decorative pattern 090IW101 and the small pattern 090IW100 changes starts, the remaining number of changes 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time-saving state ends.

Figures 17-11 and 17-12 show the screen transitions when a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 17-11(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning hole, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning hole and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. Then, linked to the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, start to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figures 17-11 (B), (C), and (D), let us say that the decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right stop, and the small win symbol "357" for small win C stops. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at the same time as "357".

As shown in Figure 17-11 (E), when the small win pattern "357" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 17-11 (F), when a small win game is started, the background B during the small win is displayed, and the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to inform the player that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device. In addition, in the case of a small win C, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole, making it easier to generate a big win. This makes the player happy because they can get a large amount of balls. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device and generate a big win, a right hit instruction display (right hit instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed in a large and noticeable manner in the center of the screen. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right hit" and three arrows pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW107 stand out, the background B during the small win is a simple screen without any characters, making it a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed larger than the right hit instruction display 090IW106 during a small win A or B and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving mode, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right hit instruction display 090IW106 for small hit A or small hit B, the right hit instruction display 090IW110 for small hit C, and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during time-saving are all different in size, display position, and display format (number of arrows).

As shown in Figure 17-11 (G), when a prize is won in the V prize slot and the small win game state ends, the letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen during the ending period of the small win, indicating that a prize will be won in the V prize slot and a big win will occur.

As shown in FIG. 17-12(H), the word "ROUND2" 090IW111, indicating that the big win game (second round) is about to begin, is then displayed in the center of the screen, larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 17-12 (I), when a jackpot game (second round) starts, a jackpot background is displayed and the game is played in the jackpot game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. Note that in this example, an example of a small jackpot C occurring during normal play is described, but if a small jackpot C occurs during the time-saving state, the same presentation as above is performed during small jackpot play, and a larger right-hit instruction display is displayed than for small jackpots A and B. Also, different presentations may be performed for a small jackpot C occurring during normal play and for a small jackpot C occurring during the time-saving state, and the size of the right-hit instruction display may be different.

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the presentation executed when the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state is different from when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Specifically, when small win A or small win B is generated, the characters "small win in progress" 090IW105 are displayed during small win play to notify that a small win is in progress (Figure 17-9 (K)), while the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to notify that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device (Figure 17-11 (F)). Therefore, the presentation can be executed appropriately when the display result of a small win is derived and displayed.

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that game balls can enter through a right-hit path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area. A launch promotion display is displayed to promote the launch of game balls into the right-hit path, and the launch promotion display is displayed in a different manner when a display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and when a display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, since a small hit C is easier to generate a big hit than a small hit A or B, a right-hit instruction display 090IW106 (see FIG. 17-9 (K)) is displayed when a small hit A or B is obtained, and a right-hit instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 17-11 (F)) is displayed when a small hit C is obtained. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 17-8 (E), it is possible to execute a presentation suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state as a preview presentation of a small win. That is, an extended presentation is executed, and the word "Time-saving?" 090IW102 is displayed, suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state. This increases the variety of pre-reading preview presentations, thereby improving the excitement of the game.

(Modification)
Next, a modified example of the performance executed in this feature unit 090IW will be described. In the modified example, in FIG. 17-2, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is made different from that when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. In the modified example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is opened by the same pattern, but by making the time before opening the special variable winning ball device different, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. Note that the description of the parts common to FIG. 17-2 is omitted.

Figure 17-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small win games. Note that the operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction).

As shown in Figure 17-13 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds, the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As shown in Figure 17-12 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds in the same pattern as Figure 17-13 (A), the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using the same pattern when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. This allows for optimal control over whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and prevents the user from knowing in advance which small win result will be derived and displayed.

In addition, in this example, a V-winning opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, and the period until the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state differs when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Other variations)
In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, it is possible to provide multiple types of small wins that do not allow the game ball to enter the V winning port. As multiple types of small wins, a small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and a small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port are provided. It is possible to configure the small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and the small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, to execute different effects. The effects may be different during either the fluctuation or the small win game state, or both.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through the big win state or small win state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

In addition, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols that are displayed as losing symbols.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to hold the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to hold the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving symbols may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be determined.

In this example, it is possible to configure the device so that the game is controlled to the time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of times the pattern changes in the normal state reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of changes until the game is controlled to the time-saving state, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the settings are changed, etc.) or when a jackpot is completed. The game is controlled to the time-saving state when the counted number of changes reaches the predetermined number. The counting method may be to determine whether the number of changes has reached the predetermined number by subtracting the value set in the counter each time a change occurs and determining whether the count value has become 0, or to determine whether the number of changes has reached the predetermined number by adding to the counter value each time a change occurs. The predetermined number of times until the game is controlled to the time-saving state may be determined by lottery. This makes it impossible to know when the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, which increases the interest of the game.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 2.5P≦n≦3.0P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). The predetermined number of times N, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 0.4P≦N≦3.8P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). Note that these are just examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

In addition, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a jackpot occurs may be the same as the number of times before initialization. In this case, it is expected that the number of times of fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times P soon after starting the game and will be controlled to the time-saving state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a big win occurs may be set so as not to carry over the number of times before the initialization. In this case, all players can play under fair conditions.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and is controlled to a time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended when the number of fluctuations reaches an upper limit, or the time-saving state may be continued until the next jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again. In such a configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times for the time-saving state is set and the upper limit number is set to a number greater than the predetermined number of times until the time-saving state is entered, the count value will reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state and the upper limit number will be set again, so that the time-saving state can be continued until the next jackpot while the upper limit number is set.

It is also possible to not count the number of changes during the time-saving state. In this case, if a maximum number of times the time-saving state can be entered is set, the time-saving state will end when the number of changes reaches the maximum number.

Also, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches a first number, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time-saving state may be controlled when the number of fluctuations reaches a second number (the so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, if a ceiling is set in the feature part IW090 and it is configured to control the time-saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the counter value continues counting without being reset regardless of whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving). In the case of a small hit C (without time-saving), if no big hit occurs, the counter value continues counting without being reset. As a result, if it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving), the count value may reach a predetermined number during the time-saving state after the small hit play ends, and the time-saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the development after the small hit play ends. Also, even if it is a small hit C (without time-saving) and no big hit occurs, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the time-saving state immediately after the small hit play ends, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the development after the small hit play ends.

As explained above, this feature section 090IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1) to (Means 8) below.

(Means 1)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed,
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) that has a special area (e.g., a V winning hole) and can be controlled to a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance (for example, a part that executes step S76 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 15 ),
When a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-1, a part that executes step S118 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The special display result includes a first special display result (e.g., a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (e.g., a display result of small hit C),
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when the first special display result (for example, a display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, if the game medium does not pass through the special area, control is performed to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-5, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of step 090IWS462 when Y is determined in step 090IWS461a, and step 090IWS468 when Y is determined in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, a display result resulting in a small win C) is derived and displayed, the game is not controlled to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-5, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the process of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, or step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the gaming medium is different when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in FIG. 17-2 ).
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances when the variable means enters the first state in the cases where the first special display result is derived and displayed and in the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 17-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figure 17-9 (K) and Figure 17-11 (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a presentation when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, the game is switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the special winning port wins but the V win does not occur, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if a small win occurs, the game may be switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the game ball does not win the special winning port.

(Means 2) In Means 1,
The rate at which a specific effect is executed in the effect during variable display differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 17-3 and 17-4, an advanced effect is executed when there is a small hit A or a small hit B, but is not executed when there is a small hit C).
With such a configuration, inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after an advantageous state or a special state can be avoided, so that the look-ahead preview performance can be executed preferably.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2,
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined path (for example, a right-hitting path) can enter the variable winning device,
A launch promotion display means for displaying a launch promotion (e.g., a right-hit instruction display) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined path (for example, a part for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 17-7),
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 17-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figure 17-9 (K) and Figure 17-11 (F)).
Such a configuration allows the game to progress smoothly.

In this example, when small win A or small win B occurs, which transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, the special variable winning ball device is set to an open state so that the V is not won, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a small win may be provided that transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, and that opens the special variable winning ball device to make it easier to win a V.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 17-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state in the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control whether or not to control to a special state, and it is also possible to prevent the special display result that will be derived and displayed from being guessed in advance.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to means 5,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that obstructs the passage of the game medium to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that does not obstruct the passage of the gaming medium into the special area (for example, the part shown in Figure 17-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 17-13).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to means 7,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
the plurality of types of special display results include a special display result that is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and a special display result that is not controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area,
Different presentations are executed when the special display result controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and when the special display result not controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 113IW)
Next, the characteristic part 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 113IW, the game state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time-saving state, or a probability-changing state (also controlled in the time-saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special pattern fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal pattern fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of a "normal pattern hit" in the normal pattern game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal pattern hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal pattern hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the special state compared to the normal state and the time-saving state. In this example, when the special state is controlled, the time-saving state is also controlled.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to a guaranteed bonus state or a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, even if the variable display result is a miss, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

Furthermore, in this example, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state (rescue time-saving) after the power is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (800 times in this example) have ended. This time-saving time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in the game), and is a game state called "play time".

Hereinafter, the time-saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a jackpot will be referred to as "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via jackpot", the time-saving state controlled based on the stopping of the time-saving failure symbol will be referred to as "time-saving state B" or "time-saving state via time-saving failure", and in this example, the time-saving state controlled when the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the occurrence of a jackpot, "time-saving state C" or "time-saving state via rescue time-saving".

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time that the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time that the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state may be different or the same.

For example, the probability of a normal hit in the non-time-saving state (normal state) may be set to 100% (no misses on normal), or the probability of a normal miss may be made extremely low so that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 100%, and in the time-saving state, control (1) may not be performed (i.e., the probability of a normal hit may not be changed from the non-time-saving state), and some or all of the controls (2) to (4) may be performed.

The number of fluctuations n before control is exercised in rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in rescue time reduction are preferably specified as follows:

2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. In this example, the probability of a jackpot for each set value s is Since the number of fluctuations for each setting value is different, the number of fluctuations ns (setting value s: 1 to 6) is as follows. Since the probability of a big win when the setting value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is The probability of a big win when the setting value is "2" is about 1/310, so the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. The probability of a big win when the setting value is "3" is Since the probability of a big win is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the probability of a big win when the setting value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. When the setting value is "5", the probability of a big win is about 1/280, so the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. When the setting value is "6", the probability of a big win is about 1/270, so The number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. The following description will be given on the assumption that the number of fluctuations n is set to "800", which can be applicable to any of the set values. The time-saving count N is set to "800", which may be the case even if the setting value is set to "1".

Note that, although we have set a value for the number of fluctuations n that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1" with the lowest probability of winning is set (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). In other words, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, the number of time-saving times N is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, but it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1", which has the lowest probability of winning, is set.

In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n may be greater than the number of time-saving times N, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n may be less than the number of time-saving times N.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
18-1 and 18-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. Among these, FIG. 18-1(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for a jackpot excluding the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation. Also, FIG. 18-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss in a normal state. Also, FIG. 18-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a jackpot. Also, FIG. 18-1(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss.

Also, FIG. 18-1 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 18-2 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving state. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 18-2 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 18-2 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

If a miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in Figures 18-2 (F) and (G). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 18-1 (B) even if the miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction.

Figure 18-2 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Furthermore, Figures 18-2 (I) and (J) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables I and J for misses during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, fluctuation pattern table I shown in Figure 18-2 (I) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, fluctuation pattern table J shown in Figure 18-2 (J) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a time-saving state.

In the event of a miss in the rescue time reduction entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in Figures 18-2 (I) and (J). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 18-1 (B) even if the rescue time reduction entry fluctuation results in a miss.

Furthermore, Figures 18-2 (K) and (L) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables K and L for jackpots during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table K shown in Figure 18-2 (K) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern table L shown in Figure 18-2 (L) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a time-saving state.

When a jackpot occurs during a rescue time short entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in Figures 18-2 (K) and (L). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in Figure 18-1 (A) even if a jackpot occurs during a rescue time short entry fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 18-1(A), in this example, when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β). The fluctuation pattern for a jackpot has a special chart fluctuation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the fluctuation pattern for a miss that performs the same reach effect. This is because, after a reach effect of the same length as the miss fluctuation is performed, a congratulatory effect is performed to celebrate the jackpot, or a re-draw effect is performed to make it look like a new lottery is being held (for example, a re-draw effect is performed in which the jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot A is temporarily stopped and changed to a jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-1(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Fig. 18-1(C), Fig. 18-1(D), and Fig. 18-1(E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the probability that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely super-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely super-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), PA2-1 (normal reach), PA2-2 (super reach α), and PA2-3 (super reach β), and the probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) being determined is high at 90%. Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), PA2-1 (normal reach), PA2-2 (super reach α), and PA2-3 (super reach β), and the probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) being determined is high at 90%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in Figures 18-1 (C) and (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the miss fluctuation, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is higher for the time-saving state that has passed through the rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state that has passed through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

Also, as shown in Figures 18-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern with reach effects is lower in the time-saving state that has passed through the rescue time-saving state than in the time-saving state that has passed through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

As shown in Figure 18-2 (H), in this example, during the special probability state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2 (I), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation results in a miss in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (miss to enter time-saving). If fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving entry presentation is performed to notify the player of a transition (entry) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2 (J), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation in the time-saving state results in a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (miss for time-saving promotion). If fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the user of a transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. Hereinafter, the transition from a time-saving state via a time-saving miss to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving may be referred to as "promotion."

The time-saving entry effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects that are performed when the time-saving state C is controlled, but the contents of the effects are different. Specifically, the time-saving entry effect displays a character string on the image display device 5 indicating that the time-saving state C will be controlled (see FIG. 18-12 (G)), while the time-saving promotion effect displays a character string on the image display device 5 indicating that the time-saving state C will be controlled and promoted (see FIG. 18-15 (D)). In addition, the time-saving entry effect displays a right-hit notification image to promote right-hitting (see FIG. 18-12 (H)), while the time-saving promotion effect does not display the right-hit notification image (see FIG. 18-15 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of control to the time-saving state C is different between the case where the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state C and the case where the time-saving state B is controlled (promoted) to the time-saving state C. This gives players a special feeling when the time-saving state is upgraded, which can increase interest.

The notification manner of control to time-saving state C may be the same when controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C and when controlling (promoting) from time-saving state B to time-saving state C. For example, in either case, variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and a time-saving entry performance may be performed. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and performance data, and to save on memory capacity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2 (K), in this example, if a jackpot occurs in a non-time-saving state due to a time-saving rescue entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA3-3 (time-saving pseudo-jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving entry effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (entry) to a time-saving state via the time-saving rescue state, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving entry effect may be an effect that can be performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-2 (L), in this example, if a jackpot occurs in a non-time-saving state due to a time-saving rescue entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA3-4 (time-saving promotion pseudo jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via a time-saving rescue, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving promotion effect may be an effect that can be performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Note that the length of the fluctuation time is different between when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a miss and when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a jackpot, but it is also possible to select a fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time, or a common fluctuation pattern. This can save on memory capacity.

Note that the method for setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 18-1 and 18-2 is just one example, and various configurations are possible.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 18-1 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 18-2 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing line such as 100 or 200.

(Test terminal treatment)
18-3 and 18-4 are flow charts showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in the test terminal process. The test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffer (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot pattern determination period (Y in step 113IWS32), during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period (Y in step 113IWS33), or if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 113IWS34), it sets the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer (step 113IWS35). The time-saving flags include a time-saving flag A indicating time-saving state A, a first time-saving flag B indicating time-saving state B, and a time-saving flag C indicating time-saving state C.

If it is not during the jackpot pattern determination period, not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and ending period, and none of the time-saving flags are set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the launch position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS36).

When a jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period begins (Y in step 113IWS32), whereas when a time-saving loss symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the time-saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the time-saving loss symbol ends, and the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period ends (Y in step 113IWS34). In other words, the timing of switching the launch position designation signal is configured to differ depending on the trigger for controlling the transition to the time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, by switching the output of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device), but by setting/resetting a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device). For example, if N is found in step 113IWS34, the process proceeds to step 113IWS37 without processing step 113IWS36, or the process of step 113IWS31 is not performed, and instead of processing step 113IWS36, the process clears the bit of the launch position designation signal 3, so that information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device) depending on whether the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in the winning symbol determination period (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 signal (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37C).

Also, when the first special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS37D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS37E) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1 (step 113IWS37F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS37G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit 0 (step 113IWS37H).

In addition, if the jackpot pattern determination period for the second special pattern is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit for the special pattern 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit for pattern 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38C).

Also, if the second special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS38E) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1 (step 113IWS38F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the second special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit 0 (step 113IWS38H).

In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 1 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39B). In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 2 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time reduction flag C is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation is the basis for which rescue time reduction. In this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the first special pattern, but the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the first special pattern. Similarly, in this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the second special pattern, but the special pattern 2 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the second special pattern.

If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when the high probability state flag is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to identify which special symbol variation has been used to control the high probability state.

If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41B). If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer when the time-saving flag is set, and it is possible to specify based on the flag which special symbol variation has been used to control the probability variable state.

Furthermore, if the time-saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). If the time-saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). If the time-saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As described below, when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving flags are reset when the jackpot fluctuation stops, and the time-saving flag A can be set when the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a 10R jackpot A occurs in the time-saving state A, the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from when the jackpot fluctuation stops to when the jackpot ends.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43), thereby transmitting each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal. By outputting the test signals in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be identified on the testing device side.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
FIG. 18-5 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. The customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed after step S161 in the performance control process and before steps S170 to S177. In other words, the customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed every time the performance control process is performed. In the customer waiting demo performance control process, when 10 seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a telop display performance (step 113 IWS 250 Y, S251). Specifically, the CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a telop display performance by using a telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

Figures 18-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display execution lottery table. In the caption display execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a caption display effect will be executed is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 18-6 (A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 18-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 18-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display execution lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 18-6 (A) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 30% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 70% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 40% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 60% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 50% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 50% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 55% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 45% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 18-6 (B) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 60% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 40% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 70% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 30% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 80% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 20% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 85% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 15% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

In this way, the system is configured so that the rate at which the caption display effect is executed is higher when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed, and also prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to ending play just before the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed is reached.

In this way, the system is configured to execute the telop display effect at a higher rate when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the frequency with which the telop display effect is executed.

The system is also configured so that the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the rate at which the caption display effect is executed. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the frequency at which the caption display effect is executed.

The number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be specified by the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction but before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 100 or less.

When it is decided to execute a subtitle display effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes a subtitle display mode determination lottery process to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the effect mode of the subtitle display effect is determined using a subtitle display mode determination lottery table according to the set value.

Figures 18-6 (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display mode determination lottery table. In the caption display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the performance mode of the caption display performance (color of the frame of the caption display area; blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 18-6 (C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 18-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 18-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 18-6 (C) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 40%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 60%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 85%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 15%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 18-6 (D) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 90%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 10%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 95%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 5%.

In this way, the frame of the caption display area is more likely to be displayed in red when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to reaching the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed.

In this way, the frame of the telop display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

In addition, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the percentage of the frame of the telop display area that is displayed in red. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the presentation style of the telop display presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts a caption display performance that displays the caption display area in the determined manner (step 113IWS254).

In addition, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie (Y in step 113IWS255, S256).

The captions and demo movie displayed here will end when the game ball passes through the starting hole, the next variation begins, or a player operation is detected.

Figure 18-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 18-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113 IWS 1011), and if not, ends the advance notice setting process.

The start winning command is a command that indicates the winning judgment result obtained when the game control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number value to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the fluctuation pattern when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B, and predicts and judges the display result and the fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of start winning commands include a pattern designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined reserved memory number designation command.

The pattern designation command is a presentation control command that indicates whether or not a winning combination will result in a jackpot and the type of jackpot. The variable category command is a presentation control command that indicates the range of judgment values that the value of the random number for determining the type of variable pattern falls within (the result of determining the type of variable pattern). The start winning combination command is a presentation control command that indicates which of the first and second start winning combinations has been selected as the start winning combination. The combined reserved memory number designation command is a presentation control command that specifies the total number (combined reserved memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, it is possible to determine, based on the fluctuation category command, whether the fluctuation is accompanied by a super reach, a normal reach, a pseudo-consecutive, or if it is a pseudo-consecutive, how many times the fluctuation is repeated, or whether it is undetermined. "Undetermined" refers to a case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination random number obtained at the time of the start winning differs depending on the number of reserved memories at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning.

The start-win command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in a start-win command storage area formed in RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the performance control CPU 120 stores the commands in the first free storage area of the start-win command storage area in the order in which they were received. Then, each time the display of the decorative pattern begins to change (each time a combined reserved memory count subtraction command is received), each command stored in the start-win command storage area is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start-win command storage area are shifted.

If a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead flag indicating that a look-ahead preview performance is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead preview setting process ends. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a time-saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled to a time-saving state, it proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

If the time-saving state is not being controlled, the number of reserved memories is compared with the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of reserved memories is equal to or less than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is not 10 or less, a pre-reading performance execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance. Specifically, a pre-reading notice performance execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance.

In the lottery table for the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, a judgment value is assigned for each winning judgment result (jackpot, miss with time-saving feature, miss without time-saving feature) as to whether or not the pre-reading preview performance will be executed, and if so, the performance mode (first mode, second mode) of the pre-reading preview performance.

The first aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in red as a countdown, and the second aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in blue as a countdown.

For example, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 30% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 40% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 60% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 4% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, a 6% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 90% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed.

In this way, the first mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both the case of a jackpot and the case of a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a jackpot. Also, the second mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both the case of a miss with no time-saving feature and the case of a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a miss with no time-saving feature.

If it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019) and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by processing step 113IWS1015, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited) for a reserved memory that is stored before the rescue time reduction change is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after control is given to a time reduction state via the rescue time reduction. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the rescue time reduction, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance.

In addition, by performing the processing of step 113IWS1016, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited). This prevents the countdown performance corresponding to the control of the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview performance from being executed at the same time.

For example, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a countdown when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and a countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect, if the countdown display when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and the countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect are allowed to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is expected that the presentation will become complicated. In particular, if the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect both involve countdown displays, it will be difficult to know which countdown display to pay attention to, which is likely to reduce the presentation effect. Therefore, by configuring the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect not to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 18-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 113IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 113IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 113IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 113IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 113IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same even numbered symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot A symbol). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same odd numbered symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot B symbol).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, a stopping pattern that evokes a jackpot (a pattern combination in which the left, center, and right are all the same) is called a jackpot pattern. A stopping pattern that evokes a loss is called a loss pattern.

The performance control CPU 120 also performs a preview performance setting process to set a preview performance that indicates the reliability of controlling to a jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the preview performance setting process, a preview performance execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance, and if it is decided to execute a preview performance, a preview performance mode determination lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine the performance mode of the preview performance to be executed, and sets the execution of the preview performance of the determined performance mode. Then, although not shown in the figure, the process table including the preview performance set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807 described later.

In the preview performance execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a preview performance will be executed is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 90% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction ≦ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 1% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 99% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

In this way, the configuration makes it easier to execute the preview performance when the jackpot fluctuation occurs than when the miss fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this way, the probability of executing a preview performance when the variable display result is a miss is lower when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

In the preview performance mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the preview performance mode (color of the character to be displayed; blue, red) is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 10% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 90% of the time.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 1% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 99% of the time.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance in the case of a jackpot fluctuation than in the case of a miss fluctuation.

In addition, in this way, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, red is more likely to be selected as the character color when the variable display result is a miss than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

Next, if the look-ahead flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the look-ahead preview performance (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 700), a process table including a promotional effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS806). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In addition, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations for the rescue time reduction is reached, if a jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual is used, but this is not limited to this, and the fluctuation display may be configured to be executed using a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach performance with a short fluctuation time.

In addition, in this example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, an effect presentation is performed in which an effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 becomes.

In addition, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the game state. This makes it possible to execute hype effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the remaining number of times, just as when controlled to the normal state, even when controlled to the time-saving state B, and provides a sense of relief time-saving even in the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS809). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 113IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 113IWS810).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display performance processing)
18-9 and 18-10 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 113IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether or not it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether or not the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition designation (a designation that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 113IWS847). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 113 IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 113IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination B designation command nor the second pattern determination B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination B designation command or the second pattern determination B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 113IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process proceeds to step 113IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 113IWS857 will normally be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 113IWS858 and onwards.

In step 113IWS861A, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead preview performance starts is set as the number of times K the look-ahead preview performance is executed, and the number of times K is subtracted by one when the change starts. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the change can be determined to be the target change of the look-ahead preview performance. If the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B) and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead preview performance starts, and the look-ahead flag is reset when the change of the preview target change of the look-ahead preview performance stops, and the look-ahead preview performance targeting the reserved memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is not performed, so that multiple look-ahead preview performances are not executed in duplicate. Note that multiple look-ahead preview performances may be executed in duplicate.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 18-11 to 18-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 18-11 to 18-15, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

Figures 18-11 to 18-14 show specific examples of the presentation mode when the normal state is controlled to time-saving state C. Figure 18-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when the time-saving state is controlled to time-saving state C from time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 18-11(A), the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin count display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "700 spins left until rescue time reduction begins!". At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-11(B), for example, when there are 600 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 18-11(A), the remaining spins display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, stating "600 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!". At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time-saving mode is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 18-11 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 700, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 18-11 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 18-11(C) to 18-12(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol stops, but only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 according to the remaining number of spins is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, the countdown display 113IW104 shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the symbol stops after the display of the varying symbols ends. Each figure shows an example in which a losing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") is derived and displayed.

As shown in Fig. 18-11(C) to Fig. 18-12(E), after 10 spins remain until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, an effect effect is performed in which an effect image of a display range according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 18-12(F) to Fig. 18-12(H), in a fluctuation in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is 0, a time-saving entry effect is performed, the symbols stop, and the losing symbols (in this example, the combination of symbols "254") are displayed. At this time, the decorative symbols may not be displayed, and the losing symbols may be displayed only in the small symbols. Note that Fig. 18-12(G) and (H) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. Fig. 18-13(I) to Fig. 18-14(M) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are displayed as confirmed, and the special symbols also stop fluctuating.

In addition, in FIG. 18-12 (G), a character string indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled to 800 times is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby notifying the control to time-saving state C. Then, in FIG. 18-12 (H), a right-hit promotion image to promote right-hitting is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that since the case of controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C is shown here, the right-hit promotion image is displayed, but since right-hitting has already been performed when controlling from time-saving state B to time-saving state C, the display of the right-hit notification image is limited when the pattern stops (see FIG. 18-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 18-13(I), when the pattern determination period begins, the mode effect start display 113IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from this point on, in the mode transition effect, the decorative pattern 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18-13(J), when the mode transition performance starts, an operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B. For example, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 18-13(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the start of the rescue time reduction. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 113IW108 instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text display "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 18-13 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a presentation (so-called reserved consecutive presentation) in the same manner as in FIG. 18-13 (K) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed by displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 18-1 (E)). Therefore, the fluctuation display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 18-13 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 18-13 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a performance that appears to be the rescue time reduction may be executed first, followed by a performance that notifies of a jackpot.

Although the example shows a case where the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 starts from the timing of the display of the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1", the timing of the display start of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 may start from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 18-12 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 18-13 (L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 18-14 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 113IW110 is displayed to notify that the rescue time reduction will start. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction started" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation starts, the game transitions to time reduction state C, and the rescue time reduction starts.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed or when a jackpot is hit, but for example, when configuring to execute a story-based presentation (for example, a story reach presentation or a story such as whether to perform high-speed fluctuation), the selection buffer for that story and the story counter may also be cleared. Also, it may be configured so that a story can be set when the rescue time reduction is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

In this way, Fig. 18-11 to Fig. 18-14 show the case where control is made from the normal state to the time-saving state C, while Fig. 18-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when control is made from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. For example, Fig. 18-15 (A) and (B) show examples of the display of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state in the time-saving state B, and in addition to the display of Fig. 18-11 (C) and Fig. 18-12 (E) showing examples of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state in the normal state, a right-hit notification presentation (display of a right-pointing arrow image) is performed due to the time-saving state. This right-hit notification presentation is performed continuously while the time-saving state is controlled. It is assumed that the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 18-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 18-15 (B) is 51.

As shown in Figures 18-15 (C) and (D), when the value of the rescue time-saving counter changes to 0, a time-saving promotion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 18-15 (D), a character string indicating the promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike Figure 18-12 (H), the right-hit notification image is not displayed again because the game is already controlled to the time-saving state.

The countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10, but this is not limited to this. For example, the countdown effect and the effect effect may be executed at a timing other than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 (by executing a so-called false effect) to make the player expect to enter the rescue time reduction. In this case, for example, the change when the time reduction counter value is 50 may be ended, and the countdown display and the effect display may be started when the next change is started, and the countdown display and the effect display may be performed over multiple changes, and the countdown display and the effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third change after the countdown display and the effect display were started). This false effect is not limited to being executed when the time reduction counter value is 50, but may also be executed when the time reduction counter value is 100 or 200.

The rate at which false effects are executed may also differ depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period; for example, the rate at which they occur may be higher the fewer the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period. This allows the player to feel that the rescue time-saving period is approaching, increasing interest. Also, this false effect may not be executed when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern involving an SP reach) is selected.

As explained above, this characteristic part 113IW includes the following inventions:

As described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the counting result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the counting result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the presentation control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display is performed. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 113-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A variable display execution means (e.g., a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a fluctuating game state);
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied;
A determination means capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A determination means (for example, a part that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state before the determination by the determination means;
a specific suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a first mode of foresight notice performance. Specific examples of foresight notice performance are not limited to a countdown display, but may be a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is stopped and displayed, a hold change performance in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, or a zone performance in which a special background is displayed), which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more easily satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes).
The state control means can control the state to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., a value of a rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
The device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S113IWS804, S806, and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute special suggestion effects (e.g., teasing effects, countdown effects, effect effects, and subtitle display effects) related to the establishment of a special condition,
The specific suggestion performance execution means is
It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific suggestion performance that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied (for example, when Y is determined in step 113IWS1015, the performance control CPU 120 prohibits the execution of a first mode of pre-reading preview performance that spans before and after the start of control for the rescue time reduction by not executing 113IWS1019).
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of a specific suggestion presentation is restricted during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the presentation control CPU 120 is Y, step 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of a first type of pre-reading preview presentation in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction).

With this configuration, it is possible to avoid problems with the presentation, while preventing the presentation from becoming too complicated and reducing a decline in interest.

In this example, if the game is already controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state is not prohibited (if step 113IWS1014 is Y, step 113IWS1015 is not performed), but this is not limited to the above, and even if the game is controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state may be prohibited.

In addition, in this example, a special suggestion effect is executed during a specified period until the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value corresponding to a specified number of times less than the special number of times, and the execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted during the specified period. Specifically, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction reaches 10, the execution of the countdown effect is started and the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is prohibited. This prevents the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect from being executed at the same time, which prevents the effect from becoming complicated and reduces a decrease in interest.

In addition, in this example, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performances, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performances may be prohibited from being executed if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) even if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performance, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means, when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, can control to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened by giving priority to control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state rather than control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, and thereby controls to the time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state when a time-shortened miss pattern is stopped and displayed in a fluctuation that results in a rescue time-shortened state (a fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0)).
The display control device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special suggestion effect (e.g., a pre-reading notice effect of the second mode) that suggests that a special display result will be derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means,
The special suggestion effect execution means may restrict the execution of the special suggestion effect during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120 is Y, 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of the second type of pre-reading preview effect in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the rescue time reduction).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated, suppressing a decline in interest, and increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 113-3) In means 113-1 or 113-2, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be higher in a predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is activated is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is activated is 11 or more) (see Figures 18-6 (A) and (B)).

This configuration can increase the player's interest by making them look forward to the realization of the special condition, and can also prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to ending the game just before the special condition is realized.

(Means 113-4) In any of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of the special suggestion effect to be executed by one of a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction) (see Figures 18-6 (C) and (D)).

This configuration makes players look forward to the realization of special conditions, increasing interest.

In addition to the caption display effects, if the execution of promotional effects, countdown effects, and effect effects that indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is determined by lottery, the execution rate may vary depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

(Means 113-5) Any of means 113-1 to 113-4 may be provided with an explanatory performance execution means capable of executing an explanatory performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (see Figures 18-11 (A) and (B)).

Such a configuration can improve players' understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

The explanation performance may also be executed at a different rate or at a different rate depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. For example, the explanation performance may be executed at a higher rate the fewer the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. In addition, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the execution rate of the explanation performance may be lowered to prevent a reduction in the performance effect of the countdown performance or effect performance that indicates the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-6) In any of means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion effect execution means may execute, as the special suggestion effect, a first special suggestion effect (e.g., a teasing effect, a countdown effect) in which it is easy to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met, and a second special suggestion effect (e.g., an effect effect, a caption display effect) in which it is more difficult to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met than the first special suggestion effect (see Figures 18-11 (C) to 18-12 (E)).

Such a configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when variable display is not being performed and hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image display means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS256 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is provided,
The special suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a special suggestion effect (e.g., a caption display effect) when a specified image is displayed (e.g., a caption display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the specified image or the suggestion effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously), and the rate at which the special suggestion effect is executed when a specified image is displayed may differ depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met (see Figures 18-6 (A) and (B)).

With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a special suggestion effect is being performed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the selection ratio of the special suggestion effect mode when a specific image is displayed may be changed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met (see Figures 18-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special suggestion effect mode, increasing interest and promoting operation of the gaming machine.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and are controlled to a certain variable state based on the count result reaching a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., based on a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changing without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, there was insufficient interest when the special condition for the variable display number was established. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 114-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes).
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
When a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, the special state can be controlled;
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means can control to a special state of an advantageous degree corresponding to the establishment of a special condition based on the establishment of a special condition when the state is controlled to a special state of an advantageous degree corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls (promotes) to a time-shortening state via a rescue time-shortening state based on the reaching of a rescue time-shortening fluctuation when controlled to a time-shortening state via a time-shortening loss);
Further, when a special condition is satisfied, a notification effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 that performs steps S113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect, a time-saving promotion effect) that notifies the satisfaction of the special condition is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect based on the establishment of a special condition when the special display result is controlled to a special state of advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

With this configuration, when the special display result is controlled to a special state with a degree of advantage corresponding to the derived display, if a special condition is met, a special feeling can be given through the notification effect, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 114-2) In means 114-1, the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect when a special condition is met in the normal state, and the presentation manner of the notification effect differs between when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 executes steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 to execute a time-saving entry presentation when control is switched from the normal state to time-saving state C, and executes a time-saving promotion presentation when control is switched from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With this configuration, notifications can be presented in a way that is appropriate to the situation, giving players a sense of exclusivity and increasing their interest.

In this example, the presentation mode of the notification effects (time-saving entry effect, time-saving promotion effect) performed during the change is different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter = 0 in the normal state and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter = 0 in the time-saving state, but the timing of the execution of the notification effects is not limited to during the change. For example, the presentation mode of the notification effects performed during the pattern determination period from when the pattern stops to when the next change starts may be different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter = 0 in the normal state and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter = 0 in the time-saving state. In that case, the presentation mode during the change may be the same.

(Means 114-3) In the means 114-1 or 114-2, a launch promotion notification means (for example, a part in the performance control CPU 120 that performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a launch promotion notification (for example, displaying a right-hit notification image shown in FIG. 18-12 (H)) to promote the launch of the game medium toward a special path is provided,
The launch promotion notification means may be capable of executing a launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may display a right-hit notification image based on control from the normal state to time-saving state C (see FIG. 18-12 (H)), and may not display a right-hit notification image based on control from time-saving state B to time-saving state C (see FIG. 18-15 (D)). Note that in FIG. 18-15 (D), a right-hit promotion image (a right-facing arrow displayed under the small pattern) based on control to time-saving state B is displayed, but this right-hit promotion image is different from the right-hit notification image displayed based on control to time-saving state C).

Such a configuration can prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when a special condition is met in the special state, it may be possible to prohibit the execution of the launch promotion notification as shown in FIG. 18-15(D), or to execute the launch promotion notification in a less aggressive manner than when a special condition is met in the normal state. For example, the launch promotion notification may be made by reducing the display range or making the arrow transparent. In addition, when a special condition is met in the normal state, the launch promotion notification may be made on the image display device 5, which attracts a high level of attention from players, while when a special condition is met in the special state, the launch promotion notification may be made using light-emitting members or speakers 8L, 8R, which attract less attention from players than the image display device 5.

The launch promotion notification means can execute two launch promotion notifications in different ways: a first launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 18-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path when a special condition is met in the normal state, and a second launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 18-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path while the special state is under control. When a special condition is met in the special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated while still issuing notifications according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of means 114-1 to 114-3, the presentation style of the notification presentation may be the same when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation executed when control is made from the normal state to time-saving state C may be the same as the presentation executed when control is made from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the amount of performance data, and reduce memory capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of means 114-1 to 114-4, when a transition from the normal state to a special state occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be restricted (for example, when N in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015), while when a transition from a low-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state B with 100 time-saving times) to a high-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state C with 800 time-saving times) occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be executed (for example, when Y in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1019).

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately provide specific suggestion presentations while minimizing the occurrence of problems with presentation.

(Means 114-6) Any of means 114-1 to 114-5 may be provided with a special suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS806 regardless of whether or not the time-saving state is in effect) that can execute a special suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition in a special state.

With this configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by creating anticipation of the realization of special conditions in special situations.

The presentation style of the special suggestion effects may differ between the normal state and the time-saving state. For example, the text color of the countdown effect, or the color or pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-6, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern other than the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a higher probability of determining a shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than a special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 18-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if a player has played for a long period of time and a loss in a long fluctuation pattern is selected with a high probability even when the time-saving state is reached after rescue time-saving, it is expected that the player will be stressed. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a loss in a time-saving state via rescue time-saving is likely to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the stress felt by the player can be reduced.

(Means 114-8) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-7, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that the special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a lower probability of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 18-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if the probability of a missed reach being selected is high even after a rescue time-saving state has been reached after playing for a long period of time, it is expected that this will cause stress to the player. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a missed reach variation pattern is less likely to be selected in a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the stress caused to the player can be reduced.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been gaming machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state based on the count result reaching a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., based on the machine changing a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been gaming machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the control of the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number of times. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 115-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A first passage area (e.g., a first start winning hole) is provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a left area) among a plurality of paths through which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can move can pass;
A second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where the game medium passing through a special path (e.g., a right area) different from the specific path can pass through;
a variable display execution means (e.g., a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, variable display of first identification information based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a first start winning hole) and variable display of second identification information based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a second start winning hole);
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes).
The second starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area,
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-saving state A by performing step 113IWS537).
a special output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F) that can execute a special output (for example, output of easy-to-win state designation signals 1 and 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot (time-saving state A)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C));
Further, a specific output means (e.g., a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS35) capable of executing a specific output (e.g., output of a launch position designation signal 3) capable of specifying that the game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific output means is capable of executing a specific output in common for a special state controlled after an advantageous state and a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 113IWS35 in common regardless of which time-saving flag is set).

With such a configuration, the trigger for control to the special state can be specified externally, and the specific signal can be standardized. For example, it can be specified externally whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the occurrence of a jackpot or a rescue time-saving.

In this example, the test device outputs a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. Similarly, an external device such as a hall management computer can output a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. This allows the hall management computer to perform operational analysis such as the rate at which the rescue time-saving state is reached during actual operation and the customer demographics of players when the rescue time-saving state is reached, and also allows for common signals.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The special output means may be capable of executing a special output (e.g., output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2, 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled when a special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a time-saving state via a missed time-saving state (time-saving state B)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is met (e.g., a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C)) (e.g., a part that performs steps 113IWS42D, S42F in the game control microcomputer 100).

With such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger for control to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally specify whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the stopping of a symbol that fails the time-saving state or a rescue time-saving state.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or 115-2, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of a special condition when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may prioritize control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state over control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, so that when a time-shortened loss pattern is displayed in a fluctuation that results in a rescue time-shortened state (a fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0), the state control means may control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state).

Such a configuration can increase the player's chances of recovery.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to 115-3, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is met and a special display result is derived and displayed, a signal control means (for example, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS37E when a time-saving missing pattern is displayed in a stopped state even if the fluctuation results in a rescue time-saving) may be provided.

With such a configuration, the display results can be properly notified to the outside.

The contents shown in this characteristic section 113IW may also be applied to the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 105-1) to (Means 107-15) below.

(Means 105-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and is controllable to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., The technique control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. The advantageous state has a plurality of types including a specific advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot B). Depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states the player is controlled to, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and after a 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to a time-saving state until the next jackpot occurs), and the advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is met is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and it may be controlled to a 800-time time-saving state as a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving. Such a configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

(Means 105-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, the rate at which the player is controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state differs from the rate at which the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the selection rate of the jackpot type differs when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established differs between when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 105-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types of special states is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 105-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate degree of rescue can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 105-6) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss fluctuation, in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern table E shown in Figure 18-1 (E), and in the time-saving state via a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern tables C and H shown in Figures 18-1 (C) and 18-1 (H)). With this configuration, a decline in interest can be prevented by transitioning to a special state with a faster play speed (for example, a time-saving state with a shorter fluctuation time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 18-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 18-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, a decline in interest can be suppressed by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on playing for a long period of time.

(Means 105-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., time-saving counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of variable display in the special state, and the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., value of the time-saving counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and can update the number of times updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding value information, specific numerical information, and special information setting information, and an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on), and the initialization means may initialize the setting information and specific numerical information of the special information when the predetermined condition is met, but not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether or not the time-saving flag is set and the value of the time-saving count counter, but not resetting the value of the rescue time-saving count counter). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

(Means 106-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; and a start condition (e.g., a first start winning slot or The present invention relates to a variable display executing means for executing a variable display when a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second start winning hole) is satisfied and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state) is satisfied, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) for storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., a RAM 102) for holding numerical information and reserved information when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined condition (e.g., a clear when the power is turned on). and recovery means (e.g., a portion that executes step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes recovery control to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means and the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when power supply is started. The state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of a rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and after the recovery control is executed, the state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information, and the update means may update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). This configuration makes it possible to optimize control through initialization while minimizing disadvantages to players when a power outage occurs.

(Means 106-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, the ratio of players being controlled to a special state with a special advantage (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state differs from that when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type differs when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established differs between when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 106-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types of special states is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to be controlled when a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 106-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate degree of rescue can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 106-6) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, the variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table E shown in FIG. 18-1 (E) in the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, and the variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table H shown in FIG. 18-2 (H) in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state with a short variable time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate in the special state controlled when a special condition is established, when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 18-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 18-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, a decline in interest can be suppressed by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on playing for a long period of time.

(Means 106-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., time-saving counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of a variable display in a special state, and the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., value of the time-saving counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and can update the number of times updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding value information, specific numerical information, and special information setting information, and an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on), and the initialization means may initialize the setting information and specific numerical information of the special information when the predetermined condition is met, but not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether or not the time-saving flag is set and the value of the time-saving count counter, but not resetting the value of the rescue time-saving count counter). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

(Means 107-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The display control device further includes a suggestion effect execution means for updating the data, and executing a suggestion effect (for example, a teasing effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a subtitle display effect) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of a plurality of effect modes in which the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the selection proportion of the numerical value to be displayed varies in the countdown effect (a numerical value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is selected at a proportion of 100%, but the value to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), the range in which the effect is displayed varies in the effect effect (a range corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is displayed at a proportion of 100%, but the range to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), and the color of the subtitle display area varies in the subtitle display effect (see Figures 18-6 (C) and (D))), and the performance mode of the suggestion effect may be a mode suggesting the period until the special condition is established (see Figures 18-11 and 18-12). Such a configuration can increase interest by drawing attention to the presentation style of the suggestive presentation, and can also promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (e.g., countdown presentation) may be such that the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be specified (see Figs. 18-11 and 18-12). With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

(Means 107-3) The suggestion effect is an effect that displays a specific image (for example, an effect effect that displays an effect image), and the specific image may be displayed in multiple ways that differ in at least one of color and size (including the size of a single image and the size of the display range of multiple images), and the period until the suggested special condition is met may differ depending on the way the specific image is displayed (see Figures 18-11 and 18-12). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a reserved memory number buffer) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a demo movie), and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display performance and a demo movie performance can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive performance can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established, the rate at which the suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed may differ (see Figs. 18-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-5) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a demo image) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. The game machine includes a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a subtitle display effect), and the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a caption display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed may differ (see Figs. 18-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggestive effect, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-6) The device includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a changing state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image (e.g., a demo movie) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means, and the suggestive performance execution means may be capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a dialogue performance by audio output) based on at least one of detecting that an operation means (e.g., a hitting ball operation handle 30) has been operated and that a game medium has passed through a predetermined area (e.g., the first start winning port or the second start winning port) when the predetermined image is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide suggestive effects to players who actually play the game, which can promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive effect (e.g., a caption display effect) is executed depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 18-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) is executed in a specific manner (e.g., "red") depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 18-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-9) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-10) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect in a special mode (for example, the second mode) depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect in a specific mode (for example, "red") regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-11) The suggestive effect execution means may be configured to execute suggestive effects (for example, displaying an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction) at different rates during a specific period after the start of power supply, depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-12) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2), and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and can further include a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0), and can execute a specific notification effect (for example, time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 107-13) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 not accompanied by a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3 accompanied by a reach effect), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not obtained (see Figures 18-1 and 18-2), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern rather than a predetermined variable display pattern is higher. In the case where the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less is high (see FIG. 18-1 (A)), the rate at which the specific variable display pattern is determined when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result is lower in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more). (For example, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more, a variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), and when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, a variable pattern is selected using a variable pattern table in which the selection rate of the variable patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIG. 18-2 (F) and (G) is changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 107-14) A preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-15) A preview performance execution means (e.g., a portion in the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS802A) is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific manner (e.g., "red") and a predetermined manner (e.g., "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific manner than in the predetermined manner when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific manner during a predetermined period before a special condition is established than during a period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 116IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 108IW, the game state is controlled to one of low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "normal chart hit" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) described later. However, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, in the high base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is more likely to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning hole). In addition, in a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, in the high base state, the game ball may be more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) compared to the normal state.

In addition, in this example, the probability of hitting a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the high probability state compared to the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as the time-saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as the probability change state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled based on the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled after the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed is also referred to as the time-saving state via a miss.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after a jackpot occurs, the time-saving state (high base state) may be controlled (hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled in this manner is also referred to as the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, or simply rescue time-saving. It is also referred to as "play time"). Note that in this example, even if the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving has occurred, it is not configured to be controlled to the rescue time-saving state again, but it is not limited to this configuration, and it may be configured so that if the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving has occurred, it may be controlled to the rescue time-saving state again. Also, for example, if the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurs after the variable display has finished a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example), the game may be configured to be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port), and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, which of the controls (1) to (4) is performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

Also, for example, in a low base state, the probability of a normal hit may be 1/1, or the probability of a miss may be so low that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 1/1. In other words, even if the control described above in (1) is not performed when the rescue time reduction is activated, a high base state may be achieved by performing some or all of the controls described above in (2) to (4).

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. As described later, in this example, when the setting value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time-saving times N is 108 to 1026. Also, when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time-saving times N is 127 to 1212. And, in this example, both the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied when they are set to any of the setting values. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above-mentioned regulations at least when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(First embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described.

(Type of time reduction)
19-1 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of time-saving in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, the time-saving state (high base state) can be distinguished into a time-saving state A that is a time-saving state via a big win (low probability/high base state), a time-saving state B that is a time-saving state via a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state), and a time-saving state C that is a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-1, in this example, if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. With this configuration, the advantage can be made different depending on the game state, and interest can be improved. In this example, if any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-1, in this example, if a time-saving miss occurs during the normal state and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (high base state) with 100 times of time-saving. On the other hand, if a time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the number of times of time-saving is not updated. In other words, even if a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (high base state) and the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 50 times, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, a time-saving miss that occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) is essentially invalid. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case in which a time-saving miss is determined during the probability state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 19-1. For example, when the time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again (for example, set to 100 times), or when the time-saving miss occurs only during the time-saving state (high base state) via the time-saving miss in the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again. Also, for example, even when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 100 times during the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., falling from the time-saving state to the normal state). Various modes of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs may be considered.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-1, in this example, when rescue time-saving occurs during normal and time-saving states, the time-saving state is controlled to a time-saving state with 800 times of time-saving. Thus, in this example, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, because the number of times of time-saving is greater.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this example, if a rescue time-saving state occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state), the number of time-saving times is updated, whereas if a time-saving miss occurs during a time-saving state that includes a rescue time-saving state (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, after the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times by the rescue time-saving function, even if the 800 fluctuation display times end without a jackpot occurring, the time-saving state will not be controlled again.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
19-2 to 19-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the variation patterns (variation times) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. EXT shown in FIG. 19-2 to 19-4 is the second byte data of the performance control command (2 bytes) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in Figures 19-2 to 19-4, 14 types of first variation patterns #A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and 13 types of second variation patterns #A to #M for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used.

When the first special symbol variable display is executed, if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable pattern table A for the first special symbol in a low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-2 (A) is selected and the variable pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 19-2 (A), if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), when the first special symbol variable display is executed, one of the first variable patterns #A to #F is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the first special symbol in the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-2 (B). As shown in FIG. 19-2 (B), if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, one of the first variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 19-2(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the first fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 19-2(A). Therefore, in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuation display is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability fluctuation state), a long fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table C for the first special symbol in the high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 19-2 (C). As shown in FIG. 19-2 (C), if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 19-2 (C), in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), if the display result of the first special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the probability is low/base state is high, the variation pattern table D for the first special symbol in the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 19-3 (D) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 19-3 (D), if the probability is low/base state is high, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, one of the first variation patterns #J, #K, #L is determined.

As shown in FIG. 19-3 (D), in the low probability/high base state, if the display result of the first special symbol variation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first variation pattern #J, #K with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first variation pattern #A, #D with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined. Also, as described below, the low probability/high base state ends when a predetermined number of variation displays are executed, but when the variation display of the final variation of the low probability/high base state is executed, the first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern) with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the variable pattern table E for the first special symbol when rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 19-3 (E). As shown in FIG. 19-3 (E), if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, either the first variable pattern #M or #N is determined.

As shown in Figures 19-2 to 19-3, the first variation patterns #M and #N are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the first variation pattern #M (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 19-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled (i.e., the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), as described below. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established.

In addition, when the first variation pattern #N (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation is executed that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 19-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (i.e., controlled to a low probability/high base state as rescue time-saving), and then a presentation is executed that notifies the player that a jackpot will be hit. With this configuration, the player is notified that a jackpot will be hit after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

When the second special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-4(A). As shown in FIG. 19-4(A), if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the second special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the second variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 19-4 (A), in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), if the display result of the second special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the second reserved memory count is 0, the second fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved memory count is 1 or more, the second fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the second special symbol for states other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-4 (B). As shown in FIG. 19-4 (B), if the second special symbol variation display is executed when the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), one of the second variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 19-4(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the second fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 19-4(A). Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a state other than the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) (low probability/low base state, high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), low probability/high base state), a fluctuation display of a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the variable display is one that results in rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the variable pattern table E for the second special symbol when rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 19-4 (C). As shown in FIG. 19-4 (C), if the variable display is one that results in rescue time reduction, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, either the second variable pattern #L or #M is determined.

As shown in FIG. 19-4, the second variation patterns #L and #M are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the second variation pattern #L (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, FIG. 19-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled to a time reduction state (i.e., that the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), as described below. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a time reduction state (low probability/high base state), and it is possible to increase the excitement when the rescue time reduction is established. In addition, if the second variation pattern #M (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot will be hit is executed after a presentation that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, FIGS. 19-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that a time-saving state will be entered (i.e., that the player will be controlled to a low probability/high base state as a rescue time-saving state). With this configuration, the player is informed that a jackpot will be hit after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

In this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state are configured to use the same fluctuation pattern table (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same) in all cases, but this is not limited to the above. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different) in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state. For example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state may be configured to have a higher rate of being determined as a fluctuation pattern with a shortened fluctuation time than the time-saving state via the jackpot or the miss time-saving state, and the average fluctuation time may be shorter. With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state occurs (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, in a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, unlike a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss or a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern that results in a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) at the time of a miss is not determined (or the rate at which it is determined is low), and the average fluctuation time may be shortened. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is rescued (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) does not result in a miss, so a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(First special symbol normal processing)
19-5 to 19-7 are flow charts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The first special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A when the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50A). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved memory number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, it checks the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. If the first reserved memory number is 0, it sends a first customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the first random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53A), decreases the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54A). In other words, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is met, so the order in which each random number value was extracted can be identified. Note that in this example, the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number are also stored in such a way that the order in which they were extracted can be identified.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the performance control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55A is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change processing (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be, for example, configured to send a setting value command each time the variable display ends, or configured to send a setting value command during the variable display.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, if the probability change flag and high base flag are off, it determines that the state is a low probability/low base state and transmits a low probability/low base background designation command; if the probability change flag is off and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a low probability/high base state and transmits a low probability/high base background designation command; if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a high probability/high base state and transmits a high probability/high base background designation command; and if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it determines that the state is a high probability/low base state and transmits a high probability/low base background designation command.

The processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) in which a background designation command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the performance control CPU 120 may be executed after the update processing of the rescue time-saving count counter and the high base count counter and the control processing related to the high base flag are performed in the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later). That is, when the fluctuation starts, if the rescue time-saving count counter is updated and the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled due to the establishment of the rescue time-saving state, a low probability/high base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background, or if the high base count counter is updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is ended and the state is controlled to the normal state, a low probability/low base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later), if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is not executed. Therefore, in this example, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction does not decrease even if the change display is executed, and only if the game is not in a high probability state (low probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction decreases when the change display is executed. Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and the game may be configured so that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction decreases uniformly when the change display is executed even if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state).

When the probability flag is not set, that is, when the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later are executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special pattern variable display is executed or the second special pattern variable display is executed. That is, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is configured to be updated at the timing when the first special pattern variable display starts and the timing when the second special pattern variable display starts. This configuration allows for optimization of the update of the rescue time reduction counter in a configuration in which the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed in parallel.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the rescue time-saving counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Also, if the state in which the rescue time-saving occurs is a time-saving state via a jackpot or a missed time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state is controlled again to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Therefore, in this example, if the next jackpot does not occur even after the 800 fluctuation display is executed after the RAM clear processing or after the end of a jackpot game, a rescue time-saving occurs and the state is controlled to the time-saving state.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 19-1, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss because the number of time-saving times is greater. In this example, steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) are processed so that the number of time-saving times is updated if a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state). For example, when a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state) with 50 remaining times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is updated to 800. On the other hand, in this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) including a rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is not updated. For example, in a time-saving state (high base state) via rescue time-saving, when the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 500, even if a time-saving deviation occurs, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 500 and is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described later) are configured to control the state to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving effect, which is more advantageous than a time-saving effect that is not achieved, when a time-saving effect miss is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special pattern in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved (time-saving effect miss) begins, control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol where the time-saving rescue is established, but in this case the number of time-saving times is not updated due to the time-saving miss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With this configuration, even if the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display where the time-saving rescue is established, the advantage of the time-saving state due to the time-saving rescue can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In addition, in this example, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 and a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the high base counter is set to "800", but the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not set. If a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs, or when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction occurs, a rescue time reduction does not occur (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not controlled continuously to the 800th rescue time reduction).

Specifically, if the variable display is executed 800 times without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction ends and the game transitions to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., no new rescue time reduction occurs). Also, even if 800 variable displays are executed in the normal state to which the game transitions without a jackpot occurring, a rescue time reduction does not occur. After a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction occurs again, for example, when a jackpot occurs after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game ends, or when a RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the RAM clear process.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the rescue time reduction occurs, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time a variable display is executed during the rescue time reduction. As soon as the rescue time reduction ends, a new rescue time reduction is established, and the rescue time reduction is continuously controlled until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the process of updating the rescue time reduction counter is not executed during the rescue time reduction. This means that even if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction will not control the player (i.e., the player will not be continuously controlled to the rescue time reduction of 800 cycles), but if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction ends, the rescue time reduction may occur.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction count counter is set to "800" and the high base count counter is set to "200". In this way, if the variable display is executed 200 times during the rescue time reduction without a jackpot occurring, the rescue time reduction ends and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is entered, and if the variable display is executed 600 times without a jackpot occurring in the normal state to which the rescue time reduction is entered, the rescue time reduction may be initiated.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later) is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base number counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than this.

In addition, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time reductions. For example, the high base count counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time reduction occurs the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, and 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

The game control microcomputer 100 then sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609A). By processing step 061IWS5609A, it becomes possible to identify that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established in the first fluctuation pattern setting process described below, and to determine a fluctuation pattern exclusively for when rescue time reduction is established.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610A) and also controls the transmission of a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) is executed, and in this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, in a low probability/high base state, the first special symbol variable display is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol variable display is executed in the long variable. However, since it is in a high base state, the normal symbol hit probability is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform the launch operation of the game ball (right hit) in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, and the right-hit indicator 26 is lit up. In addition, if the right-hit indicator 26 is already lit, such as when a rescue time-saving event occurs during the time-saving state, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described below) may be omitted.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute a presentation suggesting that the rescue time reduction will be established or a presentation suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction (for example, a teasing presentation or a countdown presentation, which will be described later).

In addition, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the configuration may be configured to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and not to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/low base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state, so that when in the high base state, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state. However, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274 described below), so the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base count counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base count counter is not "0", the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state.

In the first embodiment, as described below, the high base flag is set and the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is managed when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state at the end of the jackpot game based on 6R jackpot A, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a time-saving miss, and when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a rescue time-saving. In this example, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state is ended and the state is transitioned to the normal state (low probability/low base state) based on the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed a total of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times. See Figure 19-1).

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., if it is in a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618A) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later are executed, and the value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the game is in a high base state (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later) judges that the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes have been performed a total of a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100, 200, or 800 times; see FIG. 19-1), and the processing of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, terminating the low probability/high base state and transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is intended to continue the right-hit notification and continue the right-hit state until the fluctuation display ends.

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, if the second jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating second special symbol, is set, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58A. As a result, if the first special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether or not a jackpot determination value has been stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating between big wins, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for determining a win, and then the process may proceed to step 061IWS59A, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating as a big win in step 061IWS57A, the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A may not be performed, and a miss random number value (fixed value) may be set as the random number for winning judgment to perform a small win judgment, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for winning judgment was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, the game state is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 100 times the number of time-saving times, and when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 200 times the number of time-saving times. With this configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module in step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is configured to be executed after the update process of the rescue time-saving count counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and step 061IWS5602B to S5608B).

Therefore, in this example, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it is assumed that a jackpot has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and the advantage of the time-saving state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot game is determined. Specifically, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that a 6R jackpot A has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and it is controlled to a time-saving state with 200 time reductions after the end of the jackpot game (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287 described later). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player due to the rescue time reduction (for example, to reduce the amount of investment by the player).

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). Then, based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62A), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63A), and proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern (step 061IWS66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67A) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68A). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later), if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached, it is determined that the win will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether time reduction has been missed in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later).

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability is low), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, if a time-saving deviation occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the deviation is effectively invalidated by a configuration in which the number of time-saving times is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the time-saving state (high base state) is in a high base state, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving deviation has occurred in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed, and it may be determined that the deviation has occurred without time-saving.

For example, among the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may not be executed, and in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later). In other words, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, a time-saving miss may not occur, but in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, a time-saving miss may occur.

When multiple types of time-saving misses are provided, each with a different degree of advantage (e.g., the number of times the time-saving is applied), the type of time-saving miss is determined to be the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. In this case, the determination process can be configured to use a common type-determining random number for the time-saving type determination in addition to the large win type determination and small win type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small win, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(First variation pattern setting process)
19-8 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., when the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) and selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 19-3 (B), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the high probability flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in a low probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-2 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., low probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 19-3 (D) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variable flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-2 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table C for the high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 19-2 (C) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 19-2 and 19-3 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer (step 061IWS1717A).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705A), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1706A).The game control microcomputer 100 then updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation processing (step 061IWS1707A).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the first special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the first special symbol variation pattern table E is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 19-9 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). The case where the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not in a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is set to a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121A).

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), it performs control to send a first symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not a second jackpot flag is set, which indicates that a jackpot will be obtained based on the variable display of the second special pattern.

If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not the second small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern, is set. If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays a big win symbol (Y in step 061IWS1125A) or a small win symbol (Y in step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first forced symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big win flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big win flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop the display of a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129A.

In this example, when the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the first forced pattern determination command. Also, when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the second forced pattern determination command (see steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, S1129B described below). In other words, in this example, even if rescue time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the other special pattern while the variable display of one of the first and second special patterns is being executed, the variable display of the one special pattern is not forcibly stopped.

In this example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, the first special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, if the display result of the first special symbol is a big win, or if it is a big win and the big win type is high in favor (for example, 6R big win B), the first special symbol is not forced to stop, and the first special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the second special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a small win and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a big win with a high advantage, is being executed, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small win game ends, the value of the reel control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the reel control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed, and the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the first special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the update of the first change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the first special pattern continues to be changed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the first change time timer resumes.

(First special symbol stop processing)
19-10 and 19-11 are flow charts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011A). The CPU 103 also controls the right-hit display 26 to end its lighting (step 061IWS2012A) and transmits a right-hit lighting end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B is executed, ending the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) and transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state) when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 19-1) begins, and the processing of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, turning off the right-hit display 26 when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 19-1) ends.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special pattern display device 4A to derive and display the stopping pattern of the first special pattern (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced pattern determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129A of the first special pattern change process, the CPU 103 causes the missing pattern to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot has started (step 061IWS2016A). The CPU 103 also clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018A) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the first special pattern, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the right-hit display 26 may be configured to start lighting up when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.

If the first big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). If the first small win flag is set, control is performed to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). The CPU 103 also clears the first small win flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 061IWS2030A). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, the time-saving miss does not occur in the high probability state (high probability state), so the normal state (low probability/low base state) is in effect), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032A). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, by processing steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below), if a time-saving error occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times, and if a time-saving error occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) continues and the number of time-saving times (i.e. the value of the high base number counter) is not updated.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below) is configured so that if a time-saving miss occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) including a rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the display of the first special pattern changes and the display of the second special pattern changes are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, when a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number of times counter) is not updated. However, this is not the only possible configuration. For example, when a time-saving miss occurs in a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state) (or when the remaining number of times in the time-saving state is less than 100 times due to a time-saving miss), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number of times counter) may be updated, and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times may be controlled again.

In addition, in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be able to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving counts. For example, if the time-saving count is not achieved the first time, the high base count counter may be set to "100," and if the time-saving count is not achieved the second time, the high base count counter may be set to "200."

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described below), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 90% probability, and 200 times with a 10% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034A) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described below), in this example, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up when the time-saving miss occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, when the time-saving feature does not work, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is not set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is not reset), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The value of the rescue time-saving counter may be set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is reset) even when the time-saving feature does not work, such as when a jackpot occurs or when the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

As shown in Figures 19-10 to 19-11, in this example, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, and when a time-saving miss occurs, a right-hit notification is configured to be executable to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area. Also, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a gate notification may be configured to be executable as the right-hit notification to prompt the player to aim at the passing gate 41 and launch the game ball.

Also, when the jackpot pattern is displayed in a stopped state with the second special pattern, the right hit notification or gate notification is not executed, and when the game ball enters the first start winning hole in that state, the right hit notification or gate notification is executed (in this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first start winning hole, the display of the first special pattern does not start immediately, and the first reserved memory is entered).

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is likely to be performed), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a low degree of recognition (e.g., low-volume sound output or small-screen display) to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of a game ball into the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided on the right side of the game area) is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is suspected to be performed intentionally), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a high degree of recognition (e.g., high-volume sound output or large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be issued accurately. In particular, with the above configuration, a mild left-hit notification may be given to a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area in a manner in which the player is less aware of the surroundings of the gaming machine, while a left-hit notification may be given to a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation in a manner in which the player is more aware of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With this configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation can be prompted by a staff member at the gaming establishment to return to a left-hit operation.

In the above case, the system may be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the number of game balls detected on the right side of the game area, such as at the passing gate 41 or the second start winning port, reaches a certain number. The system may also be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the passing gate 41 detects game balls multiple times (e.g., five times) within a specified period (e.g., one minute), and to issue a left-hit notification when the second start winning port (or a special winning port provided on the right side of the game area) detects a specific number of game balls (e.g., one ball) or more that are less than the specified number.

In addition, this feature unit 116IW displays a demo when a specific condition is met, but if a game ball is detected entering the passing gate 41 or the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided to the right of the game area) while the demo display is being displayed in the normal state, the execution of the demo display that was being executed may be terminated and a left-hand hit notification may be issued.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
19-12 to 19-14 are flow charts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. Note that the state in which the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is when the second special symbol display device 4B is not displaying the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50B). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, it checks the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. If the second reserved memory number is 0, it sends a second customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the second random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53B), decreases the value of the second reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54B). In other words, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. In other words, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is met, so the order in which each random number value was extracted can be determined.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the presentation control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55B is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). Note that the specific method of sending the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special pattern normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

If the probability of a special bonus is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610B) and also controls the transmission of a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., if it is in a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618B) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag, which indicates that a high base state is in progress (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, if the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating first special symbol, is set, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58B. As a result, if the second special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether a jackpot determination value has been stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between big wins, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for winning judgment in step 061IWS57B, and the process may proceed to step 061IWS59B, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for winning judgment was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating in the big win state in step 061IWS57B, the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B may not be performed, and a miss random number value (fixed value) may be set as the random number for hit determination and a small win determination may be performed, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, the game status is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). Then, based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62B), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63B), and proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern (step 061IWS66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67B) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68B). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS69B, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the game will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether or not the game will be missed with time reduction in step 061IWS70B.

If the probability of winning is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern memory area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second variation pattern setting process)
19-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

If the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., if the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092B) and selects the fluctuation pattern table C for the second special symbol when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 19-4 (C), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, it is checked whether the high probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the high probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if it is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-4 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712B). If the high probability flag has not been set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or if the high base flag has been set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for times other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 19-4 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 19-4 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717B).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

In addition, when the second special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705B), and starts the fluctuation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation processing (step 061IWS1707B).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the second special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the second special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
19-16 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). The case where the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has occurred and the decision result of the type of jackpot, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), it performs control to send a second symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing and whether or not the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the variable display of the first special symbol, is set.

If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop processing and whether or not the first small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern, is set. If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS11256), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big win flag or the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big win flag or the second small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop the display of a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129B.

In this example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, the second special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, and the display result of the second special symbol is a big win and the big win type has a high advantage (for example, 6R big win C), the second special symbol is not forced to stop, and the second special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the first special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120B is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that will result in a sure-win is being executed, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the value of the reel control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the reel control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, and the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the second special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the update of the second change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the second special pattern change display continues to be executed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the second change time timer resumes.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball (left shot) aiming at the left side of the play area in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In principle, the game ball does not enter the second start winning hole located on the right side of the play area and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, but the player may mistakenly perform the firing operation (or intentionally aim for the variable display of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the variable display of the first special symbol, even if a long variation is executed), and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. In other words, there is a risk that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed in a variable display that the player does not intend, or that the player may intentionally aim for the second start winning hole.

In this example, while one of the first and second special symbols is being displayed, a small winning symbol is displayed in the display of the other special symbol, and a losing symbol is forcibly displayed in the display of the other special symbol. For example, in a normal state (low probability/low base state), even if an unintended winning entry into the second start winning slot occurs and the display of the second special symbol is executed, the display of the second special symbol will be forcibly stopped at a losing symbol if the display result of the display of the first special symbol is a small winning. Also, in a normal state (low probability/low base state), even if a player intentionally performs a firing operation (right hit) aiming for a winning entry into the second start winning slot and the display of the second special symbol is executed, the display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes), so the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, if the first special symbol is displayed and a small win symbol is derived during the second special symbol display, the second special symbol display is forcibly stopped at a losing symbol. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a big win symbol being derived from an unintended special symbol display, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
19-17 and 19-18 are flow charts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set or not (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-hit lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stopping symbol of the second special symbol (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the variation.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). The CPU 103 also clears the second jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018B) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the second special pattern, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

If the second big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). If the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). The CPU 103 also clears the second small win flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the reel control process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-processing for the small win (step 061IWS2026B).Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing for the second special symbol (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 checks whether it has been decided that the time reduction has been missed (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032B). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034B) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 19-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process is performed to output a signal as shown in FIG. 19-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer. As shown in FIG. 19-19, in this example, the external output signals are a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door open signal, a prize ball signal, and an out ball signal. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a high base state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time reduction is not performed. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output at the start of a variable display that becomes a rescue time reduction. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period. The security signal is a signal output at the time of error detection. The door open signal is a signal outputted to the outside when the door is opened. The prize ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 prize balls are dispensed. The out ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 out balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of jackpots can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal, the number of consecutive wins can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal, the number of high base control via time reduction misses can be measured by the jackpot 3 signal, and the number of high base control via rescue time reduction can be measured by the jackpot 4 signal.

In this example, in addition to the case where the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, since the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving rescue is activated, when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started at the start of the variable display. Note that, for example, when the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, a signal may be output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot 2 signal, so that it may be possible to externally identify that the transition to the time-saving state was triggered by the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal may be output externally during jackpot play and during a high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output externally at the start of a low probability/high base state (or during a low probability/high base state), making it possible to distinguish between a high probability/high base state and a low probability/high base state externally.

In this example, when the rescue time is reduced, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction, and the variable stop signal is output to the outside at the start of the pattern determination period in response to the end of the variable display. With this configuration, a signal that can be specified to be controlled to a high base state based on the rescue time reduction can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing. In addition, when the jackpot 4 signal and the variable stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid missing signals externally. In addition, the number of times that the rescue time is reduced by the output of the jackpot 4 signal can be specified externally. In this way, it is possible to specify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled in an external device such as a hall management computer, so that it is possible to perform operational analysis of gaming machines in gaming establishments, such as the actual operational rescue time reduction achievement rate and the type of customer demographic when the number of rescue times is reached.

In this example, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). However, if the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving stops being displayed or at the start or end of the pattern determination period, for example, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output even during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a time-saving miss. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a rescue time-saving. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving even during a high base state.

(Game state transition)
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 19-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable. Also, since it is in the low base state, the normal hit probability is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball win the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player performs the game ball launch operation (left shot) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the start winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, mainly a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B occurs.

As shown in Figures 19-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first high probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/low base state, the game will transition to a low probability/high base state after the jackpot play ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

As shown in Figures 19-20, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving occurs (after RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When the game moves to the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the second special symbol is displayed in the normal time, whereas the first special symbol is displayed in the long time. Also, because the game is in the low base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole and to display the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the starting winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole, and the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state, a 6R jackpot C or a 6R jackpot D will mainly occur.

As shown in Figures 19-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition again to the high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, if a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability/low base state, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), and the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When the game moves to the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, since the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to display the first special symbol, the player aims the game ball to the right of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B will mainly occur.

As shown in Figures 19-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability/high base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first high probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability/high base state, after the jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a low probability/high base state, and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284-S2286, S2288).

When the game moves to the low probability/high base state, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, because the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims the game ball at the right side of the game area and performs the shooting operation (right shot). Therefore, in the low probability/high base state, the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the first special symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or 6R jackpot B will typically occur.

As shown in Figures 19-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/high base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/high base state, the game will transition back to the low probability/high base state after the jackpot play ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284-S2286, S2288).

Also, as shown in Figures 19-20, when the rescue time-saving mode is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game is again controlled to the low probability/high base state with the time-saving number of 800 (see steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5607B-S5608B).

Also, as shown in Figures 19-20, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via a time-saving miss, if the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurs in a low base state, when the display of the first special pattern changes and the display of the second special pattern changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B). Also, if the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurred in a high base state, when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 200 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the game transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B).

In addition, if the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state via the rescue time reduction, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the game transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Also, as shown in Figures 19-20, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), a 6R jackpot C is generated and the state is controlled again to the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), or a 6R jackpot D is generated and the state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), so even if a jackpot occurs, there is a 100% probability of the state returning to the probability variable state. Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), it can be said that at least two more jackpots are guaranteed to occur during the probability variable state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), if a 6R jackpot B occurs, the state is controlled to the high probability/low base state and the probability variable state continues, but if a 6R jackpot A occurs, the state transitions to the low probability/high base state and the probability variable state ends. Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), it can be said that only one more jackpot is guaranteed to occur during the probability state (one loop).

In this example, the jackpot types are all 6-round jackpots, 6R jackpots A to D, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, this example shows a case where the jackpot is controlled to a low probability/high base state when a 6R jackpot A occurs, but even when controlled to the same low probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot A, or a 10-round jackpot, 10R jackpot A, with different numbers of rounds. Similarly, even when controlled to the same high probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot D, or a 10-round jackpot D, with various possible embodiments.

As shown in Figures 19-2 to 19-4 and 19-19, in this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol's variable display is executed in a long variable time. In other words, the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a shorter variable time (or the probability of execution is high) than the second special symbol's variable display. Thus, in this example, the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) are states in which the first special symbol's variable display is more likely to have a shorter variable time than the second special symbol's variable display (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability change state) that are the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a percentage. For example, in the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display may be lower than 100%, but may be configured to be at least higher than the second shortened state described below.

In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (or the rate at which it is displayed is high). Therefore, in this example, the high probability/low base state (first probability state) is a state in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state) which is the second shortened state, the rate at which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol is 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a ratio configuration. For example, in the second shortened state, the percentage of times that the second special symbol's variable display has a shorter variable time than the first special symbol's variable display may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than in the first shortened state.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the first special pattern, and in the second shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the second special pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the display of one of the first and second special symbols is being changed and the other special symbol is changed, the display of the one special symbol is not forcibly stopped. In this configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a long change is made, the display of the first special symbol is executed and a short rescue time is established, and the display is controlled to the short rescue time (high base state), the display of the second special symbol is continued without being forcibly stopped. Here, as the control of the rescue time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbols, such as the control to increase the probability of winning the normal symbol, the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control related to the normal symbol, such as the control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning port), if the control related to the special symbols is performed, such as the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., control to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency) cannot be executed until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes) ends, and the benefit of the rescue time reduction cannot be enjoyed. In such a state, even if the rescue time reduction is controlled, the progress of the game will be significantly delayed and interest will decrease.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the change time of the first special symbol (i.e., the change display of the first special symbol is controlled to the first shortened state (in this example, low probability/high base state) in which the rate at which the change display of the first special symbol has a shorter change time than the change display of the second special symbol) in addition to the control of the normal symbols. With this configuration, when the rescue time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability/high base state), so that even if the change display of the second special symbol (long change) that is being executed continues, it is possible to execute the change display of the first special symbol with a shortened change time (i.e., improved change efficiency), and the benefit of the rescue time reduction can be enjoyed. In addition, when the rescue time reduction is controlled, the game can be played smoothly, and interest can be increased.

The display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation) that is currently in progress will continue even after the transition to the first shortened state's rescue time reduction (high base state), but if a jackpot occurs due to the display of the first special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time, it will be forcibly stopped at a losing symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B, S1129B).

(Example of control of game state)
Next, an example of control of the game state will be described. Figures 19 to 21 are time charts for explaining an example of control of the game state in the first embodiment.

Of Figures 19-21, Figure 19-21(A) shows an example of control of the game state when, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the display of the second special symbol that results in a time-saving miss is started, and while the display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display of the first special symbol that results in a rescue time-saving miss (no time-saving) is started.

As shown in Figure 19-21 (A), when the variable display of the first special pattern that establishes the rescue time-saving starts (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-21(A), the losing symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol where the rescue time reduction is established (T2 timing), but at this time the losing symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-21(A), after the rescue time-saving effect is established and a transition is made to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving effect (low probability/high base state), the time-saving effect is deduced and displayed in the display of the second special symbol that started before the display of the first special symbol that established the rescue time-saving effect (T3 timing), but at this time the number of times the time-saving effect has occurred is not updated due to the time-saving effect not occurring (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving effect due to the rescue time-saving effect, which has a higher degree of advantage and has a greater number of times the time-saving effect has occurred than the time-saving effect not occurring, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-21(A), the display result of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established is a miss (no time-saving effect), but even if the display result of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established is a miss for the time-saving effect, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the display of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established (miss for the time-saving effect) starts (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the display of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established derives and displays a miss for the time-saving effect (T1 timing), but at this time the number of time-saving effects is not updated due to the miss for the time-saving effect (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving feature, which has more time-saving attempts and is more advantageous than the time-saving feature that is missing, will be maintained.

Of Figures 19-21, Figure 19-21(B) shows an example of control of the game state when the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving ends at the start of a variable display that results in a time-saving error.

As shown in Figure 19-21 (B), in the time-saving state due to rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state), when the variable display that is the time-saving deviation starts, the high base count counter is updated and the value becomes 0 (t1 timing), control is performed to end the rescue time-saving and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-21(B), when the display of the first special symbol indicates that the time-saving feature has been lost (t2 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state to a time-saving feature (low probability/high base state) due to the time-saving feature being lost (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
19-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 15. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). Also, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot B to D, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (variable jackpot pattern). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates a "small jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (small jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols with two symbols aligned on the left and right is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. If there are multiple types of time-saving misses, the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) according to the type of time-saving miss.

However, in this example, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, it is effectively invalidated, so when in a high base state, even if the received display result designation command indicates a "time-saving miss," the combination of decorative patterns for a "miss" is displayed, rather than a combination of decorative patterns for a miss pattern including a special pattern (e.g., a star pattern). Note that in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, a special pattern corresponding to the time-saving miss is displayed.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

In this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot during the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) . In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed at a lower rate in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, if a display (e.g., a countdown display) that suggests the upcoming rescue time reduction can be executed during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), then by restricting the execution of a timer display as a preview display at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, preventing them from interfering with each other.

In addition, in this example, the preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and is configured so that the probability of the preview effect being executed in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, when multiple types of preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with high jackpot expectations may be restricted from being executed during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher may be restricted from being executed. In addition, for example, when a preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed is configured to be executable, the execution of the preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed may be restricted during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less).

In addition, for example, even if there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview effect (and the look-ahead preview effect) may not be restricted.

In addition, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance or the preview performance may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the type of preview performance with a high expectation may be reduced (or not executed). In addition, if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving, that is, the reserved memories are stored before the fluctuation of the rescue time-saving is reached and are executed after being controlled to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, It may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation that will be performed after control of the time-saving rescue is performed. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the time-saving rescue is performed, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance. Note that even if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is performed, when in a time-saving state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving state via a missed time-saving rescue), it may be possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that targets reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation that will be performed after control of the time-saving rescue is performed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the game to a time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can notify the player that the game will control the game to a time-saving state as a rescue time reduction at the appropriate timing, thereby increasing the excitement when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period has reached zero, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving function is changed is reached, a special change pattern (second change pattern #M) is used to execute a time-saving function entry appearance effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, a full rotation effect (i.e., a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times the time-saving function is changed, may be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving change is reached, a dedicated time-saving change pattern for a miss is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a normal miss pattern may be used, or a change pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short change time may be used. By configuring in this way, the change pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving change is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next change display starts, the image display device 5 switches to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state (see steps 061IWS56A, S56B), and this change in background image can notify the user that the time-saving state is being controlled by the time-saving change.

If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is not 0, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the change pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a promotional effect (e.g., an effect that suggests the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) corresponding to the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a countdown effect (e.g., an effect that counts down the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) or an effect effect (e.g., an effect that changes the effect image according to the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving state, will be described. Fig. 19-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state in the first embodiment is shifted to. In Fig. 19-23, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 19-23, as shown in FIG. 19-23(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 19-23(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. Also at this time, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-hit is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 19-23(C), the blackout state is resolved, and an image is displayed (for example, a "Chance mode has been entered" display shown in FIG. 19-23(C)) to notify the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) has begun, and a special sound effect is output.

In the configuration shown in Figures 19-23, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the rescue time-saving feature is initiated, so that a notification that the time-saving feature will be activated can be issued at an appropriate time based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving feature, thereby enhancing interest.

In addition, in the configuration shown in Figures 19-23, when a change display is being executed based on a change pattern (e.g., first change pattern #M) that is specifically designed for when rescue time-saving is established, the time-saving entry effect is executed, so that the player can be clearly notified by the time-saving entry effect that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the establishment of rescue time-saving.

In addition, in the configuration shown in Figures 19-23, when the time-saving entry effect is executed (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving is started), the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, so that the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

When the time-saving state, including the rescue time-saving state, ends and transitions to the normal state, a left-hand hit instruction display instructing the player to hit left may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, the notifications and logo display in the time-saving entry performance may be made in the same manner as the notifications and logo display in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. In addition, these notifications and logo displays may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after the transition to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving.

When the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 19-23(B), a blackout effect is started in the same manner as the time-saving time-saving effect, making it difficult to see the effect display (e.g., decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5, and a right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs the player to hit right is displayed. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 19-23(C), the blackout state is eliminated and an effect is executed in which a jackpot pattern (e.g., the combination of patterns "777") is stopped and displayed. Then, the game moves to a jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after once recognizing that the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect has been achieved, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

In addition, when the configuration of this feature unit 116IW is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a time-saving entry appearance presentation may be executed, and then a notification of a small win may be made.

(Variation 1-3)
Next, the configuration of the modified example 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a time reduction entry presentation is configured to notify that the control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) will start, but since it is also configured to start the control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) at the start of the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, it may be configured to execute the time reduction entry presentation in the variable display immediately before the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special pattern normal processing and the second special pattern normal processing, when the value of the updated rescue time reduction counter is "1", a rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, indicating that the fluctuation display is immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established, and in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing, if the rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, a dedicated fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern #M or the first fluctuation pattern #N) is determined to be used only for the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established. Then, in the variable display start setting processing, if the remaining number of rescue time reductions is 1, a process table including a time reduction entry performance is selected. By such processing, a time reduction entry performance can be executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established.

Figure 19-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the time-saving state in variant 1-3 of the first embodiment. In Figure 19-24, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 19-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display that establishes the rescue time-saving. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-24(A), when the variable display two times before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving is stopped and then the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, as shown in FIG. 19-24(B), a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. However, since the time-saving state has not been entered at this point, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing right-hit is not displayed.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 19-24(C), the blackout state is cleared, and an image is displayed (for example, the "Chance mode has been entered" display shown in FIG. 19-24(C)) to notify the user that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin, and sound effects are output. At this point, the time-saving state has not yet been entered, so the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing the player to hit to the right is not displayed.

After that, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, control of the time-saving state begins, and the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed, as shown in FIG. 19-24 (D).

In the configuration of variant 1-3 shown in Figure 19-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving mode begins, so the player can prepare to hit the right in anticipation of the start of the rescue time-saving mode. In this respect, too, a notification that the time-saving mode will be entered can be issued at the appropriate time based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving mode, which can increase interest.

In addition, when a time-saving entry effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving is established, the variable display in which the rescue time-saving is established executes the variable display using a variable pattern that is also used in other variable displays (i.e., a variable pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, the variable pattern can be made common when the rescue time-saving is established and before it is established, and data capacity can be reduced. Note that the variable display that executes the time-saving entry effect (the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving is established) may also execute the variable display using a variable pattern that is also used in other variable displays (i.e., a variable pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established).

In addition, in the configuration of variant example 1-3 shown in Figure 19-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving feature starts, but the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the variable display indicating that the rescue time-saving feature is established starts (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving feature starts), so the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving feature is established is a jackpot, it may be possible to execute a performance that gives the illusion of entering the time-saving feature. With this configuration, the player is informed of the jackpot after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving feature has been established, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In addition, the configuration that enables the execution of a time-saving entry effect and a time-saving entry appearance effect when a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, or when a variable display immediately prior to a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, is not limited to gaming machines with the configuration shown in the first embodiment of this characteristic unit 116IW, but can also be applied to gaming machines with other configurations, such as a gaming machine with a high probability/low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently, as shown in the second embodiment.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic part 116IW will be described. Note that in this embodiment, detailed descriptions of parts that perform the same configurations and processes as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and the description will focus mainly on parts that are different from the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT state: a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a state controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), a state controlled to a low probability and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state), a state controlled to a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state), and a state controlled to a high probability and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases in which the game ball wins in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is long. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is short.

In the second embodiment, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)) when the display result is other than a big win or a miss in the time reduction. In other words, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss in the time reduction, and the display result is not a miss (no time reduction) (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short when the display result of the first special symbol is a small win, making it extremely difficult (or practically impossible) to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 17.

(Transition of Game State in the Second Embodiment)
The transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 20-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. First, in the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable, so that the player performs the launch operation (left hit) of the game ball aiming at the left of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the start entry into the first start entry hole mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, a 10R variable jackpot, a 6R variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 20-1, when a 10R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 variable display times are completed.

Also, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time-saving state (in this example, low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state)) is controlled via the time-saving miss and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-1, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state occurs (after the RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, if the next jackpot does not occur and the number of fluctuations reaches 800), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the rescue time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are started (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), in the second embodiment of this feature unit 116IW, the first special symbol is displayed in a long variation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal variation time, so the player aims the ball to the right of the play area (hits to the right). Therefore, in the KT state, a start entry into the second start entry hole occurs primarily, and the second special symbol is displayed primarily. Also, since the second special symbol is displayed primarily, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R special jackpot, a 6R special jackpot, or a 2R special jackpot occurs primarily.

As shown in Figure 20-1, when a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 6R jackpot is 50% in total, so once the high probability/high base state is entered, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%.

As shown in Figure 20-1, when a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, if a 6R high probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Note that after a 6R normal jackpot occurs and the state becomes low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and 50 variable displays end, the state will transition to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) as shown in FIG. 20-1.

As shown in FIG. 20-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the rescue time-saving is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of changes reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game is again controlled to the low probability/high base state (first KT state) with the number of time-saving times of 800 (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). Note that the number of time-saving times in the second embodiment corresponds to the remaining number of times that the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display can be executed in the low probability/high base state (first KT state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-1, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

For example, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) via a time-saving miss, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B in the first embodiment).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled via the rescue time reduction, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5617A-S5620A, S5607B-S5608B, S5617B-S5620B in the first embodiment).

In the example shown in FIG. 20-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state with 50 time-saving times, but as in the first embodiment, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game may be different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 100 time-saving times, and when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 200 time-saving times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it may be determined that the jackpot has occurred in a high base state, and the time reduction count may be controlled to a low probability/high base state of 200 times after the jackpot game ends (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A, S59B in the first embodiment corresponds to the part that is executed after the update process of the rescue time reduction count counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A, S5602B to S5608B). This configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

As shown in FIG. 20-1, when a 10R or 2R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 10R or 2R jackpot is 50%, so once the high probability/low base state is entered, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

Note that in FIG. 20-1, a case where the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but there is also a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a low probability. In this case, if a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Also, if a 6R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in FIG. 20-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 20-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 20-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

As shown in FIG. 20-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the first special symbol is displayed in a normal change time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a long change. In other words, the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time (or the rate at which it is displayed) than the second special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/low base state (normal state) is a first shortened state in which the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol is high. Note that in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state) which is the first shortened state, the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-1, in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time (or the percentage of the second special symbol being displayed) than the first special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state) are second shortened states in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol. In the second embodiment, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/low base state (second KT state) which are the second shortened state, the percentage at which the second special pattern fluctuation display is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the first special pattern fluctuation display may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is established in the normal state, the rescue time reduction is controlled by increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). In addition, in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the rescue time reduction is controlled by shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., controlling to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). In other words, a transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the rescue time reduction is established by the execution of the rescue time reduction by executing ...

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, the display of the first special pattern is configured so that when the display result is other than a big win or a miss with the time-saving feature, it will be a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than a miss (without time-saving feature)). In other words, the display of the first special pattern is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss with the time-saving feature, and it will not be a miss (without time-saving feature) (or the rate of small wins is higher than a miss (without time-saving feature)). In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed, a losing symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, by combining these configurations, when the first special symbol is displayed during the second special symbol display (long change), a rescue time reduction is established by executing the first special symbol display. In addition to the control for the normal symbols, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the second special symbol's change time (i.e., the second special symbol is controlled to a second shortened state (in this example, a low probability/high base state (first KT state)) in which the probability that the second special symbol display will have a shorter change time than the first special symbol display is high). In this case, the display result of the first special symbol display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a small win unless it is a big win or a time reduction miss. Then, based on the fact that a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display (long change) being executed is forcibly stopped at a miss pattern. Therefore, without waiting for the long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) to expire, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with a shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency), and it is possible to enjoy the benefits of the rescue time reduction. In addition, when controlled by the rescue time reduction, the game can be smoothly progressed, and interest can be increased.

(First special symbol normal processing in variant example 2)
20-2 to 20-5 are flowcharts showing the normal processing of the first special symbol in the second variant example.

In variant 2, the processes in steps 061IWS50A to S56A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 20-3, in the second modification, the processing of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, so the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter is executed even in the high probability state (high probability state). In other words, not only in the non-high probability state (low probability state), but also in the high probability state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is executed is uniformly decreased when the fluctuation display is executed. Therefore, in the second modification, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", the high probability flag may be set.

When the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the special chance flag is set (Y in step 061IWS56061A), i.e., if rescue time reduction is established in the special chance state, the process moves to step 061IWS5701A.

In addition, in variant 2, the high base count counter is set to "100" after a special jackpot, and each time a change display is executed, the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A. Here, if the special jackpot flag is set when the value of the high base count counter after the decrement becomes "0", that is, if the special jackpot state after a special jackpot play has reached 100 changes but has not fallen out of special jackpot state, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and high base state are maintained until the state falls out of special jackpot state.

On the other hand, if the high base count counter value after subtraction becomes "0", and the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations and only the high probability flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described below is executed), or if the game was controlled to a low probability/high base state after a normal jackpot, the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS5620A). In variant 2, if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations, the high probability state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time-saving state (high base state) continues until it reaches 100 fluctuations due to the processing of step 061IWS56191A.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue time reduction flag indicating that rescue time reduction has been achieved in the special probability state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability of winning is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the probability of a bonus is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment stored in the random number buffer area (different from the random number for jackpot judgment or the random number for jackpot type judgment, and is a random number dedicated to fall judgment) and performs a fall lottery process based on the random number for fall judgment (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment extracted in the start winning judgment process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in advance, and performs a probability of a bonus fall lottery judgment. When the value matches the fall judgment value, the game control microcomputer 100 decides to end the probability of a bonus. In the second modified example, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is decided to end the probability of a bonus with a probability of 1/800, for example.

If the special probability state is not to be dropped (the special probability state is not to be ended) (N in 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. If it is decided to end the special probability state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter that can count the number of fluctuations in the special probability state after a jackpot game, and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game.

If the change after the big win is less than 100 (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the provocation reach A flag indicating that provocation reach A will be executed (step 061IWS5713A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In the second variant, when the probability of a jackpot being played in the probability of a jackpot state after a jackpot game is lost with less than 100 fluctuations, only the probability of a jackpot flag is reset by the processing of step 061IWS5711A. In addition, after the display result of the ongoing fluctuation display suggests whether a jackpot will be reached or the probability of a jackpot will be lost and the probability of a jackpot state will end, a provocative reach A is executed to notify the player that the probability of a jackpot state will be lost.

If the fluctuation is not less than 100 after the jackpot (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, it resets the high probability flag and high base flag, and ends the high probability state and the time-saving state (step 061IWS5712A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach A flag, which indicates that provocative reach A will be executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, the same provocation reach A is executed in both cases where the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play and where the player falls out of the special mode after 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, if the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play, the player may be notified that the player will fall out of the special mode and then be notified that the time-saving state will continue. This can prevent the player from becoming too disappointed when the player falls out of the special mode in a short period of time.

If the rescue time-saving flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets the high base count counter to "800" (step 061IWS5708A). The game control microcomputer 100 also resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, it sets the provocation reach B flag, which indicates that provocation reach B will be executed (061IWS5710A), and proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the rescue time reduction is established after the probability change, the state is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the rescue time reduction from the time when the rescue time reduction is established, and if the rescue time reduction is established before the probability change, the state is controlled to the normal state from the time of the probability change, the benefit received depending on the timing of the rescue time reduction will be significantly different, and there is a risk of insufficient rescue. Therefore, in the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A is configured so that if the rescue time reduction is established in the probability change state, the state is controlled to the time reduction state due to the rescue time reduction when the probability change occurs. Therefore, the count of 800 times of the time reduction due to the rescue time reduction will not start when the rescue time reduction is established, but after the probability change occurs and the transition to the time reduction state occurs. With this configuration, rescue due to the rescue time reduction can be received appropriately.

In addition, by processing step 061IWS5707A, the rescue time-saving flag is reset when the game falls into the special probability state and is controlled to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving. This configuration allows the information that the rescue time-saving has been established in the special probability state to be properly managed.

Information indicating the state of the rescue time-saving flag is stored, for example, in RAM 102. When the RAM clear process is executed, the rescue time-saving flag and the special probability flag are reset. In other words, when the RAM clear process is executed during a special probability state in which the rescue time-saving flag has been established, the game state becomes a normal state (low probability/low base state) in which the rescue time-saving flag is not set. With this configuration, information indicating that the rescue time-saving flag has been established during a special probability state can be appropriately managed.

In the RAM clear process, the high probability flag is reset, but the rescue time reduction flag is maintained. Also, if the high probability flag is not set at the start of the fluctuation but the rescue time reduction flag is set, control may be made to the rescue time reduction (low probability/high base state). In other words, if the RAM clear process is executed when the game is in a high probability state where rescue time reduction has been established, the game state will be the normal state (low probability/low base state), but when the fluctuation display starts, control may be made to the rescue time reduction.

In addition, in step 061, the IWS5710A process suggests whether the display result of the ongoing variable display will be a jackpot or a drop into the special probability state, which will end the special probability state, and then executes a provocative reach B that first notifies the player that the drop into the special probability state will occur, and then notifies the player that the time-saving rescue function will control the player to a time-saving state (high base state).

As shown in FIG. 20-5, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, the rescue time reduction flag is reset if set (step 061IWS631A). By processing step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage information that rescue time reduction has been established in a high probability state. It is also possible to prevent excessive rescue from being performed.

In addition, in variant 2, if the execution of the jackpot determination module determines that a jackpot has occurred, and if the guaranteed jackpot flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach C flag, which indicates that provocative reach C will be executed (061IWS633A).

Step 061: IWS632A to S633A processes the ongoing variable display to indicate whether it will result in a jackpot or a drop into the special probability state, ending the special probability state, and then a provocative reach C is executed to notify the player that a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes in steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second variant, it is determined whether any of the provocation reaches A to C is set, and if set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding provocation reach is determined. The other processes are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, the second special symbol normal processing and the second variation pattern setting processing execute the same processing as the first special symbol normal processing and the first variation pattern setting processing. Therefore, in the second modification, in both the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display, it is possible to execute a probability drop lottery or an instigation reach.

In the first and second variation pattern setting processes, when any of the provocation reaches A to C is set and the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game exceeds 100 variations, a provocation reach may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20-6, a common presentation (for example, a common background image may be displayed) may be executed regardless of whether or not a high probability state has occurred until the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game reaches 100 variations. In other words, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not a high probability state has occurred until the 100th variation. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-6, a high probability state fall judgment presentation may be executed to notify whether a high probability state has occurred or the high probability state is continuing at the 100th variation.

For example, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern A is executed to notify the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached. Also, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached but the player is under control of the rescue time reduction, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern B is executed to notify the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached and the player is under control of the rescue time reduction.
In addition, if a jackpot is hit at the 100th variation, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern C that notifies the player of the jackpot is executed. In addition, if the probability change state continues, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern D that notifies the player of the continuation of the probability change state is executed.

The configuration shown in Figure 20-6 can create tension for the player during the period from the 100th change onwards in the special probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, in the second variant, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, the player is notified that the game has fallen out of the high probability state, and then the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, no notification may be given even if the game falls out of the high probability state. In other words, even if the game falls out of the high probability state, no notification may be given or the presentation may change, and the game may fall out of the high probability state without the player noticing.

(Example of the second modification)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the provocation reach in Modification 2 will be described. Fig. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the provocation reach in Modification 2. In Fig. 20-7, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (1) (2) (3-1) for provocation reach A, (1) (2) (3-2) (4) for provocation reach B, and (1) (2) (3-3) for provocation reach C.

In the probability bonus state, as shown in FIG. 20-7(1), when the left and right decorative patterns are aligned, a provocative reach begins in which the friendly character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a engage in a battle, as shown in FIG. 20-7(2).

In the case of provocation reach A, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (3-1), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to inform the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will drop out of the probability drop state. After that, the game will transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the case of provocation reach B, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (3-2), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to notify the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will fall into probability drop, but as shown in FIG. 20-7 (4), a text display of "Entering Chance Mode" and a rescue time-saving image 014IW004c are displayed to notify the player that the rescue time-saving control will be applied. Note that this is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 20-7 (4), and for example, the time-saving entry performance shown in FIG. 19-23 may be executed. After that, the game transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

In the case of the provocation reach C, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (3-3), the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle, and a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot has been achieved. After that, the game moves to the jackpot game state.

In the second modification, when a rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, a rescue time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify the fact. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (1) and (2), when a rescue time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction). The rescue time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 20-8 can be realized, for example, by transmitting a presentation control command indicating that a rescue time reduction has been established to the presentation control board 12 when the main board 11 determines that a rescue time reduction has been established, and by controlling the presentation control board 12 to display a "Chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5 when the presentation control command is received. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to a time reduction state after the high probability state ends, giving the player a sense of security and increasing the interest.

Note that the notification of rescue time-saving activation as shown in FIG. 20-8 may be made (or drawn) not only in the special state, but also when rescue time-saving activation is activated in the normal state, or when the game is controlled to the time-saving state by rescue time-saving activation.

(Example of control of game state in Modification 2)
Next, a description will be given of an example of control of the gaming state in Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), if the rescue time reduction has not been established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state occurs, the high probability state flag and high base flag are reset when the drop to high probability state occurs (T1 timing), and the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-9(B), if the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability, for example, if the rescue time reduction is established at timing t1 in FIG. 20-9(B), the rescue time reduction flag is set at timing t1. Then, when the drop to high probability occurs (timing t2), the high probability flag and rescue time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. In other words, the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/high base state.

The configuration shown in variant example 2 can be applied to both the first and second embodiments described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (second special probability state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur. When applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (first KT state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur.

In addition, in both the first and second embodiments described above, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed in parallel, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The configuration shown in variant example 2 can also be applied to a configuration in which the display of the special symbols is executed in the order of the start winning, or a configuration in which either the display of the first special symbol or the display of the second special symbol is executed with priority.

In addition, the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples described above, information that can identify the number of times the rescue time reduction has occurred may be retained. For example, the high base flag set for the second rescue time reduction after a transition may be different from the high base flag set for the first rescue time reduction.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, different effects may be executed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue (for example, a different background display may be displayed, or a different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined).

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a case has been shown where the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example are applied to a gaming machine in which high probability control is performed until the next high probability state occurs (or until the game falls into high probability state), but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set for the number of special symbol games (i.e., the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) in which high probability control is performed.

Specifically, a case will be described in which a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above is applied to a gaming machine configured as a so-called ST machine, in which the probability of a jackpot is about 1/100, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times (e.g., 8 times) of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set. Note that in the ST gaming machine, multiple types of jackpots (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided as the display results of the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display, and when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot) is set at a predetermined rate (e.g., 5%). In addition, when the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage is reached, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set to 8 times. If no jackpot occurs in the 8 special game games where the probability control is performed, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the upper limit number of special game games where the high base control is performed is set to 249. In other words, after the jackpot game state ends, if the next jackpot does not occur, the game is controlled to a probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 probability games, and then to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time games.

The ST gaming machine described above can be configured so that if, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 250 times) have ended in a non-probability state (low probability state), a rescue time-saving mode has been established, and the machine is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

When this configuration is applied, if a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage occurs, after the jackpot game state ends, the game will first be controlled to a high probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 high probability states. At this time, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a jackpot. And since it is a high probability state (high probability state), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated.

When the 8-time chance state (high probability/high base state) ends without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to a 249-time time-saving state (low probability/high base state). At this time, the game is in a non-chances-of-chance state (low probability state), so the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is updated (e.g., decremented by 1) each time a special game (i.e., the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display) is played.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 times ends without a jackpot, the state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) is executed, the rescue time-saving state is established and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). Here, if there is a reserved memory stored during the time-saving state of 249 times (low probability/high base state), the rescue time-saving state is established by executing the special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) based on the reserved memory, and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the state has been changed to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to increase interest.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the state is controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether the number of reserved memories stored at the time when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving state is established, and if it is determined to be greater, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, the normal state controlled after the time-saving state ends with 249 times of time-saving and before the rescue time-saving state is established (i.e., the normal state controlled once after the time-saving state and in a short period (for example, the period until the reserved memories stored in the time-saving state are consumed)) is also referred to as the special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

In addition, for example, when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) ends and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) due to the rescue time-saving state is controlled, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that control of the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) due to the rescue time-saving state will begin. In this case, after the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of a variable display in the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs (for example, a variable display immediately after the end of the time-saving state or a variable display immediately before the rescue time-saving state is established), or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of a variable display that causes the rescue time-saving state to occur.

For example, in the ST gaming machine described above, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (e.g., a 5R special jackpot) occurs among multiple types of jackpots, the machine will be controlled to a special jackpot state with 8 special jackpots (high probability/high base state) after the jackpot game state ends, unless the next jackpot occurs, and then the machine will be controlled to a time-saving state with 32 time-saving jackpots (low probability/high base state). In other words, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage occurs, even if the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) following the special jackpot state (high probability/high base state) ends, rescue time-saving will not be established within a short period of time (e.g., the period until the reserved memory stored in the time-saving state is consumed).

In this case, if the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) is 32 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time), a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state, while if the number of time-saving times is 249 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), a similar left-hit notification may not be executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. In other words, a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) may not be executed when transitioning to the special normal state. With this configuration, if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time after the end of the time-saving state, the player is not made aware that he or she has once transitioned to the low-base state (normal state), which can improve interest.

In addition, for example, by differentiating the types of presentation control commands such as background designation commands, jackpot start designation commands, and jackpot end designation commands sent from the main board 11 side between the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) where the number of time-saving times is 32 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time) and the time-saving time is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), the presentation control board 12 side may distinguish between these time-saving states and perform presentation control that matches each time-saving state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc., outputting BGM, etc.). The method of distinguishing between time-saving states on the presentation control board 12 side is not limited to this, and for example, the type of jackpot or the number of time-saving times after jackpot play may be specified by the received display result designation command.

In addition, when the number of time reductions is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time reduction is established within a short period of time), even if the configuration is such that the left-hit notification (for example, the display of the left-hit instruction display on the image display device 5 instructing left-hit) is not executed on the performance control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed, the main board 11 side executes processing (for example, turning off the right-hit indicator 26, stopping the output of the right-hit test signal output as a test signal, changing the launch position designation signal, etc.) corresponding to the transition to the normal state (i.e., switching from the state of right-hit to the state of left-hit). During the transition to the normal state (i.e., the special normal state), the main board 11 side may temporarily stop the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), or may continue the external output. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), the output of the launch position designation signal output as a test signal may be changed (or the output of the right-hit test signal may be stopped).

In addition, for example, the effects executed may be different between the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) and the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state). For example, effects (such as a countdown effect) that indicate that a rescue time-saving count will be achieved or the number of times until it is achieved may be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), but may not be executed in the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) in which the number of remaining times of the time-saving count is indicated. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

The configuration that can obtain the above-mentioned effect is not limited to the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state controlled after the probability-changing state used in the above explanation, or the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established. For example, the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established may be configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state, and smaller (or equal) than the sum of the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state and the upper limit memory number (e.g., 4) of the special game based on the entry into the start winning hole (e.g., the second start winning hole) that is easy to enter in the time-saving state. With such a configuration, even if the game moves to the low base state (normal state) after the end of the jackpot game state through the probability-changing state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the rescue time-saving can be established without generating a new start winning in the low base state (normal state), so that the player is not aware that the game has moved to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving is established, and interest can be improved.

In addition, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability bonus state) at which the rescue time-saving feature is established is smaller than (or the same as) the number of time-saving features in the time-saving feature state, the rescue time-saving feature can be established before the time-saving feature state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after the probability bonus state (high probability/high base state) ends (i.e., the number of time-saving features can be updated by establishing the rescue time-saving feature).

In addition, in the above-mentioned ST gaming machine, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after passing through a special probability state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be different when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the first special pattern and when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the second special pattern (or the proportion of advantageous time-saving times among the multiple types of time-saving times may be different). In this case, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 32 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 32 out of 249), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 249 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 249 out of 249).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be different (or the ratio of advantageous rounds among multiple types of round numbers may be different) when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 5 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 10 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high). With this configuration, the advantageous degree can be made different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, thereby improving interest.

In addition, even in the above ST gaming machine, different variation pattern tables may be used for the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state). For example, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a variation pattern table may be used in which the variation pattern with the shortened variation time is determined more frequently (and, for example, the variation pattern in which a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of a miss is determined less frequently) than in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state). With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of misses in the reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is low, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, for example, the types of jackpots may be a sure-variable jackpot in which the sure-variable state (high probability/high base state) continues after the jackpot game state ends until the next jackpot occurs, a non-sure-variable jackpot A which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving cycles, and a non-sure-variable jackpot B which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time-saving cycles, and a rescue time-saving mode may be established if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 variable display cycles have ended in the non-sure-variable state after the gaming machine is powered on or a jackpot occurs. That is, a jackpot type may be set in which the time-saving state is controlled until just before the rescue time-saving is established (specifically, the sum of the number of times the time-saving state is activated and the upper limit number of memories (e.g., 4) of the special game based on entering a start winning port (e.g., the second start winning port) that is easier to enter in the time-saving state is greater than (or the same as) the number of fluctuations (non-variable state) at which the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, a transition of the game state is made from the time-saving state after the jackpot game to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving (actually, the game is controlled to the normal state (i.e., special normal state) once before the rescue time-saving is established), which can increase interest.

As explained above, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 116-1-1) to (Means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and has update means (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 061IWS56) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter). and special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The update means is The special state control means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the identification information starts (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter being "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A and S5606B to S5607B), and further includes an announcement effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B) capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect shown in FIG. 19-23) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition when a variable display in which a special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-1-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 when step 0) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter) and a special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The numerical information is updated at the timing when the display is started and the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the means further includes an announcement effect execution means capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect shown in Figure 19-24) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition when a variable display immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-2) Means 116-1-1 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time reduction) and a second variable pattern #L (missing entry into rescue time reduction)), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met (for example, , the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B), before the special condition is established, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and the notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B, or the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS805, S806B). With such a configuration, the notification effect can clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-3) Means 116-1-2 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 19-24). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when and before the special condition is met, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-3, the special state control means can control the special state to a different degree of advantage after the end of the advantageous state depending on whether the advantageous state was controlled to a special state or a non-special state (e.g., a low base state) in which the advantageous state was controlled (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. If a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times the time-saving count, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), When a special condition occurs and the time-saving state (high base state) is entered, the time-saving state is entered with 200 times the number of times of time-saving. See FIG. 19-1. When the variable display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is a specific display result, the special state is considered to have been controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to be controlled after the advantageous state ends is determined (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B after updating the rescue time-saving count counter and setting the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). Such a configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

(Means 116-5) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-4, a game area in which the game medium can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting with the left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting with the right), and a launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward either the first path or the second path (e.g., a portion in the image display device 5 that displays the right hit instruction display 100IW108 or the left hit instruction display), are provided, and the launch promotion notification means is capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward the second path when a notification performance is executed (e.g., the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when a time-saving entry performance is executed. See Figs. 19-23 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be executed appropriately.

(Means 116-6) Any of means 116-1-1 to 116-5 is provided with a signal output means (e.g., see FIG. 19-19) capable of outputting a signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) capable of identifying that a special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition in response to the start of a variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and capable of outputting a signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) capable of identifying that a variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display. With such a configuration, a signal capable of identifying that a special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 117-1) to (Means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5 603B) and a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state) (for example, in a high base state, control is performed to increase the probability of a normal winning, control to shorten the variation time of a normal pattern, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port)). , S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), a variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B), and a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information at a higher rate (for example, a part where the variable display of the first special symbol is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second special symbol). The low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability state) in the first embodiment are executed in a variable time. See Figs. 19-2 to 19-4 and 19-19. The second shortened state in which the variable display of the second identification information is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information at a higher rate (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a variable time shorter than the variable display of the first special symbol, and the high probability/low base state in the first embodiment is executed in a variable time shorter than the variable display of the first special symbol). The present invention is provided with a shortened state control means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206) capable of controlling the game to a short state (first probability variable state; see Figs. 19-2 to 19-4 and 19-19), and an update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, , the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607). A portion for executing steps S061IWS1125B and S1129B), the variable display execution means, during execution of the variable display of one of the first and second identification information, does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one of the first and second identification information based on the establishment of a special condition by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information (for example, see FIG. 19-21 (A)), and, during execution of the variable display of the second identification information, based on the deriving and displaying a specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, is capable of deriving and displaying a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS1125B and S1129B), and the shortened state control means, when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition, is capable of control to the first shortened state (for example, the portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A and S5607B). When the rescue time reduction is established, the game transitions to a low probability/high base state in which the first special symbol changes over a shorter time than the second special symbol. See Figures 19-20.) With this configuration, the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is established, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 117-2) In means 117-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) that is different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established, the special condition is established. The special state can be controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, and S2030B to S2031B. See FIG. 19-21 (A)), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special display result has been derived and displayed is lower than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been satisfied (for example, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is 800, while the number of time reductions in the time reduction state via time reduction loss is 100. See FIG. 19-1). With such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the special state is controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been satisfied, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is established by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, it does not control to a special state with a degree of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 117-5) In any of Means 117-1 to 117-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). With such a configuration, in a configuration where the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 118-1) to (Means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter), and a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state) (e.g., a state in which control is performed to increase the probability of a normal hit in a high base state, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port)). 5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284), a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a low probability/low base state (normal state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable display time than the variable display of the second special symbol. See FIG. 20-1), and A second shortened state in which the variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/low base state (second KT state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol. See FIG. 20-1). and a shortened state control means (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206 in the first embodiment), in which the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the part that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time shortening counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (e.g., steps S061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment). the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the one of the identification information (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in the first embodiment), and the shortened state control means is capable of control to the second shortened state when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment). With this configuration, while the variable display of one identification information is being executed, a specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information based on the derived special display result, and the variable display of the one identification information is controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is met, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 118-2) In means 118-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is met, the special state control means A special state can be controlled based on the fulfillment of a condition (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A-S2031A, and S2030B-S2031B in the first embodiment), and the advantage of the special state controlled based on the special display result being derived and displayed is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition (e.g., in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is 800, whereas in the time-saving state via time-saving loss, the number of time-saving times is 100. See FIG. 20-1). With such a configuration, even if a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is fulfilled, the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the degree of salvation for the player can be increased.

(Means 118-3) In means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition when, during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, a special condition is satisfied by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, it does not control to a special state of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (e.g., corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 118-5) In any of Means 118-1 to 118-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the updating of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 119-1) to (Means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time reduction counter), and a special state control means (e.g., a step in the first embodiment that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) that can control to a special state (e.g., a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state). a specific state control means capable of controlling the specific state (for example, a high probability state) which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment); an end determination means for determining by lottery that the specific state is to be ended in the specific state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the second modified example); and a normal state control means capable of controlling the specific state to the normal state based on the determination by the end determination means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5704A and S5712A in the second modified example). and notification performance execution means (for example, a part that executes the processes of steps S061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A in the second modified example, and the process of determining a variation pattern depending on the state of the provocation reach flags A to C in the first embodiment) capable of executing notification performance capable of notifying whether a specific state will end or a specific display result will be derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means. When a special condition is established by the numerical information becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state can be controlled (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and when a special condition is established in the special state, the special state can be controlled after the end determination means determines that the special state will end after the special condition is established (e.g., the part in which in variant example 2 executes steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A to S5709A. See Figure 20-9), and the notification effect execution means can notify, when a special condition is established in the specific state, by a notification effect (e.g., the provocative reach B shown in Figures 20-7 (3-2) and (4)). With this configuration, even if the specific state ends, the notification effect will notify the player that the special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition, which gives the player a sense of security and increases their interest.

(Means 119-2) Means 119-1 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised to an advantageous state (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS631A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-3) Means 119-1 or 119-2 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time reduction flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised in the special state after the specific state ends (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS5707A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-4) Means 119-1 to 119-3 include special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition in a specific state when the special condition is established in the specific state, and the specific state control means can end control of the specific state by executing an initialization process (e.g., the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the special information is erased by executing the initialization process. With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-5) Means 119-1 to 119-4 are provided with a special condition fulfillment notification effect execution means capable of executing a special condition fulfillment notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (2), a "Chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that control will be made to a chance mode (rescue time reduction) is displayed on a part of the image display device 5) that notifies the player that a special condition has been fulfilled in a specific state. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that control will be made to a special state after the specific state ends, which gives the player a sense of security and increases interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means can control the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a specific state, if the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A in modified example 2), and the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect that notifies the player that the specific state will end or that a specific display result will be displayed when the variable display is executed more than the predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in modified example 2 and the processing that determines the variable pattern depending on the state of the provocative reach flags A to C after the 100th change after being controlled to the probability variable state. See FIG. 20-6). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase the interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A) may be applied.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means The stage further includes a predetermined suggestion effect execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (e.g., a notice effect) when the variable display is executed, and a special notification effect execution means that is capable of executing a special notification effect (e.g., a time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that control of a special state will begin based on the establishment of a special condition, and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, the execution ratio of the notice effect does not change between a period when the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is 10 or less and a period when the number of times remaining is 11 or more). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacked out when the variation starts). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A is provided with a variable display execution means for effect that can execute a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (e.g., blacking out when the variation ends). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is established, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is established (for example, in the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established, a variable pattern dedicated to the rescue time reduction is not used. Then, after the losing pattern is derived and displayed, the establishment of the rescue time reduction is notified). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to means 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means even when the power supply is stopped, an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the memory contents of the backup memory means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a recovery means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when the power supply is started. With this configuration, control can be optimized through initialization processing, and disadvantages to players can be reduced when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) Any of means 1A to 6A includes a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of the high base flag) that can identify that the device is being controlled to a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are retained by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process, but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of the high base flag and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) below may be applied.

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means is configured to control the state to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, it is capable of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in both cases of a jackpot and a miss), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is higher than that of a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot), and when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is established than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, immediately before the rescue time reduction occurs, the probability of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in the event of a miss is lower). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display using a specific variable display pattern is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is met.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests the establishment of a rescue time reduction, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means executes suggestive effects more frequently in a specified period before the special condition is established than in the period before the specified period. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the occurrence of disadvantages to the player caused by the player quitting the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Any of means 1B to 3B includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is met (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is met but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed in a specific mode more frequently than in a predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the notice performance is executed in a specific mode less frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed in a specific mode but a specific display result is not derived and displayed in a predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C) below may be applied.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time-saving mode)). , and the state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the variable display pattern determination means can determine to a special variable display pattern when the special condition is established, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine to a special variable display pattern before the special condition is established and can execute a specific notification effect (e.g., time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is established and the special condition is established and the special condition is established. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing an effect in a common mode with the specific notification effect and then executing a special notification effect (e.g., an effect that looks like a time-saving mode has started) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. With such a configuration, the player is notified that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition has been met, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect to notify that the specific display result is derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is satisfied (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining the jackpot variation pattern in the same manner as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met, and a notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect (e.g., a mode transition effect that notifies that control of the time-saving state by rescue time-saving will begin) that notifies players that control of the time-saving state will begin during the display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, the effect can be clarified when switching game states, and interest can be increased.

(Means 6C) In any of means 1C to 5C, a signal output means is provided that outputs a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is satisfied, at the start of the display period, and outputs a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of a special state after outputting the specific signal. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied, and a means capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward the special path. and a special output means capable of executing a special output (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game is in a gaming state in which the player is expected to perform a right hit, or an announcement that the game is in a state in which the player will perform a right hit), where the first start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward a special path at an appropriate timing can be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D) below may be applied.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and the state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means is in accordance with the number of times the variable display has been executed. The special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the number of times being a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of the special number of times, and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (e.g., first variable pattern #A) that can be determined even before the special condition is established when the special condition is established, and further includes a special notification effect executing means that can execute a special notification effect (e.g., display of a background image corresponding to a rescue time reduction) that notifies the player that the control of the special state will begin after a non-specific display result (e.g., a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established. With such a configuration, the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the special condition is established can be increased. In addition, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer and a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., an effect in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, or an effect in which the color or shape of the reserved display is changed) that predicts the variable display corresponding to the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means. and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, a zone display that displays a special background, etc., and the look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display after the variable display when the special condition is satisfied (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a reserved memory that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control process becoming complicated and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and also to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests that a rescue time-saving feature will be established, or a subtitle display while waiting for customers, etc.), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is established). With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) Any of means 1D to 4D includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation of the rescue time-saving function and the effects during rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) below may be applied.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation and display of the fixed display result, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving is more likely to be determined to be a variable pattern with a shortened variable time than the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the variable display is executed by the shortened variable display pattern at a higher rate, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable display pattern #C) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern even when a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving has a lower rate of determining the variable pattern that becomes a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) when the display result is a miss than in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is lower, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state controlled when a special condition is met (for example, different background images for the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, the difference in game states can be clearly notified to the player, enhancing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the preview target, and the look-ahead notice execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performances it will execute between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performances it will execute between a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state and a time-saving state via a jackpot). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, a hold change effect in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, a special background display, etc.) that is capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the prediction target among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the prediction target (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the prediction target is the reserved memory stored before the rescue time-saving fluctuation is reached and corresponds to the fluctuation that occurs after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

The configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above characteristic part 090IW, characteristic part 113IW, and characteristic part 116IW. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 090IW to the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW, the value of the small win counter can be decremented by 1 to end the time-saving state when a small win with a V win occurs during the time-saving state, while the value of the small win counter can be configured not to be decremented when a small win without a V win occurs during the time-saving state.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A light emitter;
An operation means operable by a player;
A sound output means;
a performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance capable of informing the user that the game is being controlled to the advantageous state, an operation performance that prompts the user to operate the operation means in the specific performance, a movable body performance that operates the movable body when the game is being controlled to the advantageous state, and a result notification performance and a post-event performance that are executed after the movable body performance;
Equipped with
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance in which a specific character is displayed before the movable body performance , a second specific performance in which a special character is displayed before the movable body performance , and a third specific performance in which neither the specific character nor the special character is displayed before the movable body performance can be executed;
As the post-effect performance, a first post-effect performance can be executed in which the specific character is displayed after the result notification performance is executed in the first specific performance,
As the post-effect performance, a second post-effect performance can be executed in which the special character is displayed after the result notification performance is executed in the second specific performance,
As the post-event performance, after executing the result notification performance in the third specific performance, a third post-event performance can be executed, which is a performance mode related to the third specific performance and does not display either the specific character or the special character;
As the movable body performance, a first movable body performance that executes the movable body performance in the first specific performance can be executed,
As the movable body performance, a second movable body performance that executes the movable body performance in the second specific performance can be executed,
As the result notification performance, a first result notification performance that executes the result notification performance in the first specific performance can be executed,
As the result notification performance, a second result notification performance that executes the result notification performance in the second specific performance can be executed,
It is possible to make the light-emitting body emit light in the post-event performance, the operation performance, the movable body performance, and the result notification performance,
The sound output means can output a performance sound in the post-event performance, the operation performance, the movable body performance, and the result notification performance,
The post-event performance can be executed when a first condition is satisfied and when a second condition that is more advantageous to the player than the first condition is satisfied.
When the first post-performance is executed when the second condition is satisfied , the light emitter can be caused to emit light in a specific light emission pattern common to when the second post-performance is executed when the second condition is satisfied ;
When the third post-effect performance is executed when the second condition is satisfied , it is possible to cause the light-emitting body to emit light in a light-emitting pattern different from the specific light-emitting pattern ,
In the first movable body performance, it is possible to output the performance sound corresponding to the first movable body performance from the sound output means by a sound output pattern common to the second movable body performance,
In the first result notification performance, it is possible to output the performance sound corresponding to the first result notification performance from the sound output means by a sound output pattern common to the second result notification performance,
The proportion of the second advantageous state is different depending on which of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images